User manual

The complete Limner manual.

Limner User Manual v0.9.0. Every tool, workspace, and shortcut, together in one place.

Prefer to search? Open the interactive manual →
Contents · 45 chapters

Getting around

Getting Started

The install steps below are the Windows ones. On Apple hardware, start with Limner on Mac or Limner on iPad; everything after the install, from the Home screen to saving and exporting, works the same on all three.

When you are ready to learn the workspace, the panels, and the rest of the tools, see The Interface, the Brush tool, Layers, and File Formats.

Install and first run

Run the installer

On Windows, Limner ships as a signed installer for Windows 10 and 11. Download it from the official Limner download page, then run it. The installed program is Limner.exe. On a Mac, Limner comes as a signed and notarized disk image, and on iPad from TestFlight; see Limner on Mac and Limner on iPad.

The SmartScreen note

Limner's installer and executable are code-signed by a verified publisher, Parker Vincent (the developer behind Limner). Because Limner is still a new app, Windows SmartScreen may show a blue "Windows protected your PC" screen the first time you run the installer. That is normal for a newly released app, not a sign that anything is wrong, and it fades as more people install. If you see it, click More info, confirm the publisher reads Parker Vincent, then choose Run anyway. This is the same signature Limner verifies before installing any future update.

First launch

Limner opens to the Home screen, its front door to your recent works and new canvases. What appears first depends on your last session:

  • Crash recovery. If Limner did not close cleanly last time, it finds the automatic backups it saved and shows a "Recover unsaved work?" prompt. This takes priority over everything else (recovering unsaved work comes first). See Crash recovery below.
  • The Home screen. With nothing to recover, Limner shows the Home screen: your recent works as preview cards, newest first with the latest as a large Continue card, beside one-click quick starts, New Book…, and Open File…. Click any work to pick up where you left off. See The Home screen below.
  • Prefer the classic blank start? Untick Show Home screen on startup (in the Home screen footer, or Edit ▸ Preferences). Limner then launches the old way: a "Welcome back" prompt when you have a recent file, otherwise an empty app waiting for File ▸ New or File ▸ Open.

Double-clicking a .limner or .limnerbook file in Explorer (or the Finder) launches Limner and opens it directly.

The Home screen

The Home screen is its own surface: while it is up only the menu bar stays, and the painting workspace appears the moment you open or create something. Documents and Books are listed together, each with a live preview captured every time you open or save it. Works from before this feature fill in on their own: Limner quietly generates a few previews per launch while you sit on the Home screen, newest first.

  • Quick starts. A New Canvas button opens the full New Document dialog. Below it, Screen, Square, A4 print, 4K, Vector, and Animation create a canvas instantly (Vector and Animation are Limner Plus workspaces, so on the Free tier they open the unlock window instead); Last used repeats your most recent size; More sizes… opens the full dialog too.
  • Right-click a work to open it, show it in Explorer (Show in folder on the Mac), or remove it from Recent. A file that no longer exists dims with a Missing note and a small X that removes it in one click.
  • Coming back. The Home button at the right end of the menu bar (or File ▸ Home) reopens it any time; Back to canvas or Esc returns to what you were doing. Closing the last document tab lands on the Home screen again.
  • The footer. Show Home screen on startup turns the whole screen off and on; Docs and Community open your browser, and only when clicked. The Home screen itself never touches the network.
  • The first-run card. On a fresh install a short card above the Recent grid points out where to begin. Dismiss it once, or open your first document, and it stays gone.

Keeping Limner up to date

On Windows and Mac, Limner has a built-in updater. It only ever contacts the network to fetch a small version manifest and, if you choose to update, to download the new signed installer (a signed and notarized disk image on the Mac). No identifiers are sent, and you can turn the whole feature off. On iPad TestFlight delivers updates like any other app.

Check for updates

  • Windows manual check. Help ▸ Check for Updates… checks immediately and tells you whether you are up to date or shows an available update.
  • Windows automatic daily check. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Check for Updates Automatically is a checkbox (hover text: "Once a day on launch. This anonymous check sends no Limner or device identifiers."). When it is on, Limner checks at most once every 24 hours on launch.
  • macOS. Help ▸ Get Limner Updates… opens the secure download page, and the Mac menu bar's Help ▸ Check for Updates… starts a check. The background signed-feed check is separate; the Windows manual-check and automatic-check preference controls are not available on macOS. See Limner on Mac.
  • iPad. Updates arrive through TestFlight; the iPad build does not fetch or install a desktop update.
  • Version readout. Help ▸ "About Limner…" shows the version you are running.

The update flow

When an update is found, a status bar badge ("Update available") and a dialog appear. The dialog shows the new version, what you have now, and the release notes. From there you can:

  • Download and install the update. Limner downloads the new installer, verifies its SHA-256 hash and its code signature (the signer must match the verified publisher), and then offers Install now. On Windows, installing closes Limner so the installer can replace the running program, then reopens it; on the Mac, the verified disk image is mounted and the new copy is installed and relaunched for you.
  • Skip this version to silence the automatic check for that release (a manual check still surfaces it).
  • Later to dismiss the prompt for now.

For what a check sends, the two verification steps, and the SmartScreen note, see Updating Limner in Troubleshooting.

Creating a document

Choose File ▸ New… (Ctrl+N) to open the New Document dialog.

New Document dialog

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
PresetCustom, plus 12 size presets in three groups (see below)CustomFills Width, Height, and Resolution from a ready-made size. The fields stay editable afterward.
Width0.1 to 100000 (in the chosen unit)2048 pxCanvas width. Resolved to pixels, clamped, and rounded to an even number.
Height0.1 to 100000 (in the chosen unit)2048 pxCanvas height. Resolved to pixels, clamped, and rounded to an even number.
OrientationPortrait / LandscapePortraitTwo buttons. The lit one names the shape the fields describe, and picking the other swaps width and height. A square counts as portrait.
Unitspx, pt, mm, cm, inchpxThe unit for Width and Height. Switching converts the numbers so the physical size is preserved.
Resolution72, 96, 150, 300, 350, 600, 1200 DPI72 DPIPrint resolution. It is written into exported PNG and PSD headers but does not change the pixel dimensions, and Image ▸ Image Size can change it later.
Backgroundany sRGB color, or Transparentwhite (255, 255, 255), not transparentThe starting paper color. Check Transparent for a transparent background layer (the color picker is disabled while transparent is on).

Below the fields, the dialog shows the resolved size as "Canvas: W × H px", a note when a side was rounded to an even number, and a memory warning when the canvas would need more than 512 MiB per layer.

Size and resolution limits. The final pixel dimensions are clamped to a minimum of 16 px and a maximum of 16384 px per side on the desktop (8192 px on iPad), and forced to an even number (H.264 timelapse requires even width and height, and even dimensions tile cleanly). DPI is kept between 1 and 2400.

Size presets. Selecting a preset fills the fields with these pixel sizes and DPI:

GroupPresetSizeDPI
ScreenFull HD1920 × 108072
Screen4K UHD3840 × 216072
ScreenSquare1080 × 1080, 2048 × 2048, 4096 × 4096, or 8192 × 819272
Print, 300 DPIA42480 × 3508300
Print, 300 DPIA33508 × 4961300
Print, 300 DPIUS Letter2550 × 3300300
Print, 300 DPIPostcard 4 × 6 in1200 × 1800300
SocialPortrait post1080 × 135072
SocialStory1080 × 192072

Click Create to make the document, or Cancel (or press Esc, or click outside) to dismiss the dialog.

Opening a document

File menu

  • File ▸ Open… opens a .limner document, or takes a Photoshop (PSD or PSB), OpenRaster or SVG file as a new document. The legacy .artpaint extension is also accepted, so older files keep loading. If a file is already open, Limner switches to its tab instead of opening a second copy.
  • Photoshop import. Every kind of .psd and .psb opens, up to the 16384 px canvas ceiling: layers, folders and masks are rebuilt, text, layer effects, vector masks, pattern fills, Smart Objects and adjustment layers stay live and re-editable, and anything Limner has no model for is kept as pixels. The same dialog also opens OpenRaster (.ora) and SVG files as new documents.
  • File ▸ Import… (Image) brings a PNG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, BMP, TGA, or TIFF image into the current document as a new layer, centered at its native scale. This item is enabled only when a document is open.
  • File ▸ Import… (SVG) places an SVG file's groups and paths into the document you have open, as vector layers.
  • File ▸ Open Book… opens a .limnerbook project; see Book.

If a document cannot be opened, Limner shows a "Could not open file" dialog with the reason.

Drag and drop

Drag a file onto the Limner window to open it. The action depends on the file type:

File typeWhat happens
.limner, .artpaintOpens as a document
.psd, .psb, .oraImports as a new document
.svgOpens as a new document, its groups as vector layers
.limnerbookOpens the Book
.abrImports as new brush tips
.png, .jpg, .jpeg, .webp, .bmp, .gif, .tga, .tif, .tiffAdded as a new layer if a document is open, otherwise opened as a new document
anything elseShows an "Unsupported file" message listing the accepted types

Dropping several files opens or imports each one in turn. The file picker and drag and drop accept the same image types, and on Windows a file opened from the command line or a file association takes the same route.

For the full details of every format Limner reads and writes, see File Formats.

Saving

  • File ▸ Save writes the document to its current file. If the document has never been saved, Save behaves like Save As. If nothing has changed since the last save, Save does nothing.
  • File ▸ Save As… writes to a new file. The default name is untitled.limner (or the existing file's name). The native extension is .limner; the legacy .artpaint extension is still offered so existing files can re-save in place.

When you save, Limner shows a brief "Saving…" indicator in the status bar. Writes are atomic, so the previous file is never left truncated, even when you save over the file you have open.

Note
Every save writes the 0.9.0 document layout, a damage-resistant container of named parts, which needs 0.9.0 or later to open. Documents from older versions open unchanged until you save them, so keep a copy of anything an older version must still open. Every save is checked by reopening the file before Limner reports it saved, and a save that fails its own check leaves your previous file untouched.

The modified dot

A document with unsaved changes shows a dot marker:

  • In the document tab strip, the tab label gains a "•" suffix while it has unsaved changes (hover text: "Unsaved changes: click to switch").
  • Undoing back to the saved state clears the dot again, and Save skips a write when nothing has changed.

Default shortcuts (all rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts):

ActionDefault shortcut
SaveCtrl+S
Save AsCtrl+Shift+S
OpenCtrl+O
Export PNGCtrl+E

Autosave and crash recovery

While you work, Limner periodically writes a background backup of each modified document or Book (by default about every two minutes, in between strokes). These backups are never "the" save: an autosave does not clear the modified dot or change which file Save targets, so you still need to save your work normally.

If Limner does not close cleanly, those backups remain on disk. The next launch detects them and shows the Recover unsaved work? prompt:

  • Restore (or Restore all) reopens each backed-up document or Book, pointed back at its original file so Save goes to the right place.
  • Discard backup (or Discard backups) throws the backups away.

For where these files live and the related preferences, see Preferences and Shortcuts.

Draw your first thing (five minutes)

This quick walkthrough gets you from a blank canvas to an exported PNG.

  1. Create a canvas. File ▸ New…, leave the defaults (2048 × 2048 px, 72 DPI, white background), and click Create.
  1. Choose a brush. Click the Brush tool in the left tool strip (default shortcut: B). Open the Brush panel and pick a preset. For everything the Brush tool can do, see the Brush tool.
  1. Pick a color. Open the Color panel and choose a color; the panel shows it as a hex value too. Tip: hold Alt anywhere on the canvas to pick up a color from the artwork (the eyedropper).
  1. Draw a stroke. Drag on the canvas to paint. Press [ and ] to shrink and grow the brush, even mid-stroke. Made a mistake? Press Ctrl+Z to undo.
  1. Add a layer. Press N (or Layer ▸ New ▸ Add Layer) to add a new layer above the current one, then draw on it without touching your first stroke. Layers stack from bottom to top. See Layers to learn about blend modes, opacity, masks, and reordering.
  1. Export a PNG. Choose File ▸ Export As…, pick PNG, click Export…, pick a location, and save (or press Ctrl+E to export a PNG straight away). The PNG keeps transparency and records your document's DPI. To save the editable project itself (with all layers intact), use File ▸ Save and keep the .limner file.

That is the whole loop: new document, brush, color, stroke, layer, export. Help ▸ Limner Manual (F1) opens this manual from inside the app, and Help ▸ Search the Manual jumps straight to the page that answers a question. From here, explore The Interface to learn the workspace zones, dig into the tools, or read up on File Formats.

New in 0.9.0

  • Windows 10 or later. The installer states the requirement up front; the Mac build needs macOS 13 and the iPad build iPadOS 16. See Limner on Mac and Limner on iPad.
  • The modified dot clears on undo. Undoing back to the saved state clears the modified marker, and Save skips a write when nothing has changed.
  • No more "experimental" notice. The one-time first-save note about the format is gone; the format is the versioned container described in File Formats.
  • A first-run card you can dismiss. A short card points out where to begin on a fresh install, and it stays gone once dismissed.
  • The manual is one keystroke away. Help ▸ Limner Manual opens the manual and F1 does the same, and the Help menu itself is searchable, so a feature you cannot find is one keystroke from an answer.
  • A Vector mode quick start. Vector mode opens with a way in rather than an empty canvas.

Limner Plus

For installing and updating the app itself, see Getting Started.

Free and Plus

Limner and Plus are both free during the beta. Limner Free is the complete Illustration studio: raster painting, the full brush engine, layers, filters, timelapse, and the everyday file formats. Limner Plus adds the larger design, animation, and production workspaces.

Limner Free includes:

  • Raster painting with the full brush engine, layers, blend modes, masks, and selections.
  • Filters and adjustments: HSL, Levels, Curves, Gaussian Blur, and the rest.
  • Brush Studio: build your own brushes, with .abr import and export and .lbrush presets.
  • Timelapse recording and video export, with social presets and end cards.
  • Watermark stamping on PNG, JPEG, and single-page PDF exports.
  • Opening and saving .limner, and importing and exporting PNG, JPEG, PSD, OpenRaster, SVG, and CMYK TIFF.
  • Platform-appropriate update access, autosave and crash recovery, rulers, symmetry, and the rest of the core workspace.

Limner Plus adds:

  • Vector design workspace and editable vector layers.
  • Vectorize Layer (Image Trace): any raster layer traced into editable vector shapes. Editable vector layers and Image Trace stay Plus in any document.
  • Animation studio: the cel timeline, a keyframed 2D camera, per-channel motion, scale, rotation and opacity curves in the graph editor, layer parenting, an audio track, composited onion skin, and GIF, APNG, MP4, PSD, and PNG-sequence export (with GIF and image-sequence import).
  • Comic and manga studio (Book projects).
  • Every future Limner Plus feature.

On Limner Free, some Plus commands are hidden and the rest are marked rather than hidden, so you can see what Plus adds. The Vector and Animation workspace buttons stay visible with a Plus mark, as do the matching Home screen cards and Layer ▸ Vectorize Layer; choosing one opens the Limner Plus window instead of running the command. Book commands live in File and open the Book home or the Page Manager.

Getting a key

During the open beta, keys are free. Request one from the Limner website: enter your name and email on the signup form, and a key is emailed to you. There is one key per email address, so asking again just re-sends the same key.

On iPad there is nothing to enter: the beta is fully unlocked on iPadOS, with every workspace and every Plus feature available and no key entry in the app. Keys apply to the desktop builds on Windows and macOS.

Plus is free while Limner is in beta, on Windows and macOS with a key and on iPad with nothing to enter. Pricing for the full release will be announced before anything changes.

Starting a 14-day desktop trial

Choose Help ▸ Start a free trial..., enter your email address, and click Start. Limner emails a signed trial key. Paste that key into the activation field to unlock Vector, Animation, and Book on this computer. The dialog explains that the trial covers Vector, Animation and Book for 14 days and that the key arrives by email.

The 14 days begin when the server creates the trial, and the email includes its end date. Each email address and device can receive one trial. Requesting again or reinstalling does not start another 14 days. A trial key cannot be activated on a different device.

You can close the request dialog while it finishes. Reopen the trial command to see its result. If email delivery is delayed, Limner reports that the trial was created and delivery will be retried; its original end date stays the same. Check your inbox before making another request.

The iPad beta remains unlocked and has no trial request or desktop-key entry.

Activating Plus

Open Help ▸ Enter Limner Plus Key…, paste your key into the field, and click Activate. The first time you launch Limner, a welcome window also offers to paste a key or to continue on Limner Free. On macOS the menu bar at the top of the screen has the same window under Help ▸ Limner Plus….

Activation happens online and ties the key to the computer you activate on. Keys may be scoped to desktop, iPad, or Both, and a mismatched key is refused before it replaces your current key. Paid and comp keys support up to three desktops and two iPads in separate platform groups, within the key's scope. Beta and trial keys each have one seat per permitted platform. As soon as activation succeeds the Plus tools appear, Help ▸ About Limner… shows "Limner Plus" instead of "Limner Free", the Help menu's key entry reads Manage Limner Plus…, and Start a free trial… leaves the Help menu.

Moving a key to another computer

On the currently activated computer, open Help ▸ Manage Limner Plus…, choose Deactivate this device, then Confirm deactivation. The computer returns to Limner Free when the server confirms the release. Keep your key so you can enter it on the new computer. Your documents stay on the old computer.

Each key allows two self-serve deactivations per rolling 30 days. For more, contact limnersupport@limnerart.com. New-device activation also has a separate anti-abuse limit, so releasing a seat does not reset that limit.

If the reply is lost, choose Retry device deactivation when online. Limner saves the pending request and retries it after relaunch; retries do not spend another deactivation. Automatic renewal waits until the request is resolved. If the saved request itself is damaged and cannot be read, Limner moves it aside as deactivation.pending.corrupt in its settings folder, writes a line to its log, and carries on: renewal and key entry work again instead of staying paused. A device that stays offline for more than 30 days stops occupying a seat; the next activation still checks for a free seat.

Staying activated and privacy

Desktop Limner performs entitlement maintenance at most once a day on launch, so you do not have to do anything to stay activated. Online beta, trial, paid, and comp keys keep working offline for up to 14 days after their last successful renewal, or until the key expires if that is sooner. Online perpetual keys keep a 90-day grace.

Desktop activation and renewal contact the configured license service with the key and device activation identifiers needed for entitlement upkeep. Activation and renewal include the device's platform. The iPad beta has no key or entitlement maintenance and does not contact the license service. Limner never sends your artwork.

A desktop trial request sends your email address, device activation identifier, and platform to that service so it can issue and deliver the trial key. Trial access ends at the signed expiry even if the computer stays offline.

Limner reaches the network for only these things: the once-a-day version check, downloading an update you choose to install, activating or renewing your key, and requesting a trial. It never sends your artwork, and it sends no personal identifiers beyond what those requests need.

If a feature is locked

A workspace button or menu item marked with a Plus star, or a panel that reads "... is a Limner Plus feature", is part of Plus. Choosing it opens the Limner Plus window, which lists what Plus adds and offers Start a free trial and key entry. On the desktop you can start a 14-day trial there; on iPad everything is already unlocked during the beta.

If a key will not activate, check that you are online (activation needs a connection), that you pasted the whole key, and that the key is not already active on another computer. If the key is in use on too many devices, deactivate another computer from this one when that computer is online, or contact limnersupport@limnerart.com.

Limner on Mac

For everything that is the same on all platforms, start at Getting Started. This page covers only what is specific to the Mac.

What you need

  • macOS 13 Ventura or later. Earlier versions of macOS cannot run Limner.
  • Apple silicon or Intel. One download serves both. Limner runs natively on each, without translation.
  • A pen tablet is optional. A trackpad or mouse draws perfectly well; a connected tablet adds pressure and tilt.

Installing Limner

Download the disk image from limnerart.com, open it, and move Limner to your Applications folder. Then open it from Applications the way you open any other app.

Limner for Mac is signed with an Apple Developer ID and notarized by Apple, so macOS checks it and opens it without the warning that unidentified downloads produce. If you ever see a warning that Limner cannot be checked, you are not running a build from limnerart.com.

Cmd instead of Ctrl

Every shortcut written as Ctrl in this manual is Cmd on a Mac. Save is Cmd+S, Undo is Cmd+Z, Redo is Cmd+Shift+Z, and the command palette is Cmd+K.

You do not have to translate them yourself. Limner spells its own shortcuts for the machine it is running on, so the menus, the tooltips, the command palette, and the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog all show Cmd on a Mac and Ctrl on Windows. The Option key keeps the name Alt in those labels. A shortcut you record in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog on one platform still works on the other.

Two things stay literal, because they read the physical key rather than the shortcut modifier: holding Ctrl while dragging a selection subtracts from that selection, and Alt does the same, on every platform including the Mac.

The Mac menu bar

Limner adds a real Mac menu bar at the top of the screen, beside the Apple menu. It carries the standard Mac items plus click mirrors for the commands people reach for most:

  • Limner: About Limner, Hide Limner, Hide Others, Show All, and Quit Limner.
  • File: Home, Open, Save, Save As, Export PNG, and Close Window.
  • Edit: Undo and Redo.
  • View: Enter Full Screen.
  • Window: Minimize and Zoom.
  • Help: Check for Updates… and Limner Plus….

These rows are grayed out when they cannot act: Save, Save As and Export PNG with no document open (Save and Save As also work on an open Book), Undo and Redo when there is nothing to undo or redo, and Open while a Book is open. Home, Check for Updates and Limner Plus are always available.

Limner's full menus stay inside the window, exactly as they are documented throughout this manual, so nothing is reachable only from the system menu bar.

The mirrored items deliberately show no shortcuts of their own. macOS gives a menu item's shortcut priority over the app, so a native Cmd+Z item would take Undo away from a text field you were editing. The in-window shortcuts do that work instead, and they behave as they do on Windows. The standard Mac items keep their usual keys, including Cmd+Q to quit and Cmd+W to close the window.

Drawing on a Mac

  • Metal. Limner draws through Metal, so compositing, filters, and the brush engine run on the GPU.
  • Retina. The canvas renders at the display's full resolution rather than being scaled up from a smaller image.
  • Pressure and tilt. A connected pen tablet reports pressure and tilt to the brush engine, so pressure curves and tilt dynamics behave as they do on Windows.
  • Trackpad gestures drive the canvas. A gesture that starts on the canvas belongs to the canvas: two-finger scroll pans it, pinch zooms around the point you pinched, and a deliberate twist rotates it. A gesture that starts over a panel stays with that panel.
  • Mouse and keyboard. The wheel zooms, Space-drag pans with any tool, and Space+Cmd-drag zooms by dragging.

Keeping Limner up to date

Choose Check for Updates in the Mac menu bar's Help menu, or click the Update available badge in the status bar when the daily check finds one. (Limner's own in-window Help menu offers Get Limner Updates…, which opens the download page.) When a newer version exists, Limner downloads the disk image and verifies it before trusting it: the download must carry a valid signature and must be signed by the same Apple developer identity as the app you are running, or it is refused. Once it is verified, Install and Relaunch closes Limner, replaces the copy in your Applications folder, and reopens the new version. Open Disk Image is there if you would rather mount the image and drag it across yourself.

The macOS, Windows, and iPad builds share a release and a document format, so a document saved on one opens on the others without converting anything.

Limner on iPad

Everything in the rest of this manual applies on iPad as well, with two exceptions noted where they come up: a new canvas reaches 8192 px per side rather than 16384, and updates come from TestFlight rather than from inside the app. This page covers the parts that only exist there. For the shared basics, start at Getting Started.

What you need

  • iPadOS 16 or later. Earlier versions cannot run Limner.
  • An Apple Pencil, to paint. Out of the box the Pencil is the only thing that paints, which is what lets you rest your hand on the glass; fingers work the interface and navigate the canvas, and can paint too once you turn on Finger Painting.

Everything is unlocked during the beta

Limner for iPad is free during the beta and every feature is unlocked. There is no key to enter and nothing to buy inside the app: Vector, Animation, Book, and every Plus-labelled feature are simply available.

Beta keys are a desktop matter. If you also use Limner on Windows or macOS, see Limner Plus for how keys work there.

Apple Pencil

  • Only the Pencil paints. Resting your palm, your wrist, or the side of your hand on the glass while you draw does nothing to the artwork.
  • Pressure and tilt. Both reach the brush engine, so pressure curves, tilt dynamics, and every brush setting behave as they do with a tablet on the desktop.
  • One line is one line. A long stroke stays a single stroke with a single Undo, including through the brief moments the hardware itself loses contact with the Pencil.
  • Palm rejection has a grace period. For about half a second after the Pencil lifts, fingers stay ignored, so a wrist resting between two strokes cannot press a button or drag a slider. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Palm Rejection (on by default) turns that grace period off; your hand is always ignored while the Pencil is touching. If a palm still gets through, Record Input Trace beside it writes a log of every touch to Limner's Documents folder for diagnosis.

What fingers do

  • One finger works the interface. Buttons, sliders, panels, and menus all respond to a finger.
  • Hold one finger on the artwork to sample a colour. After about half a second the colour loupe appears under your fingertip and follows it; lift to take that colour as the foreground. Touching down with a second finger or with the Pencil cancels the sample cleanly.
  • Two fingers navigate. Pan, pinch to zoom, and rotate the canvas with two fingers.
  • The Reference board navigates on its own. Two fingers pan and pinch the board without moving the canvas behind it.
  • The Pencil always wins. Every finger gesture stands down the moment the Pencil touches the glass, so a gesture in progress never turns into a mark.

Press and hold to reorder

Press and hold a layer row for a moment and it lifts, ready to be dropped into a new position or nested into a folder. This is the touch equivalent of dragging a row with a mouse, and it works the same way in the Layers panel and in folders.

Your documents in the Files app

Open uses the system document picker, so you can pick Limner documents and Books from On My iPad, iCloud Drive, or another Files provider, and the Files app can move, rename, duplicate, tag, and share them like any other document. Limner edits the picked file where it lives: Save writes back to that same file, so the original in iCloud Drive or elsewhere is the version you just saved, and your other devices see the change once Files syncs it. The file also stays in Recent, and reopening it from there, even after Limner restarts, opens the original again.

If the file was moved, renamed or deleted in Files while it was open, or Limner can no longer reach it, Save refuses instead of writing somewhere else and says so; choose File ▸ Save As… to keep your changes. A file you deleted in Files is treated as gone even while it sits in Recently Deleted: its Recent entry says it could not be opened, and Limner never edits the copy in the trash. Recover it in Files and the Recent entry works again.

Save As works as before on iPad: type a name and choose Save to keep a new document in Limner's own folder (On My iPad ▸ Limner), or Save to Files to save it there and then hand a copy to the Files picker, so you can put it in iCloud Drive or anywhere else. Exports go out through the same Files picker.

Some storage providers do not let an app edit a file where it lives. When Limner cannot open a picked file in place, it copies the file into its own folder, On My iPad ▸ Limner ▸ Imported, opens that copy, and says so in an Editing a copy notice. Save then writes to the copy and the original does not change; to put your changes back, choose File ▸ Save As… and pick Save to Files.

Crash-recovery backups always stay in Limner's own storage. Limner never writes them next to a file you opened from Files. When Limner leaves the foreground (you switch apps, pull down Control Center, or iPadOS warns that memory is low), it takes a recovery snapshot of your unsaved work straight away, rather than waiting for the next periodic one, and asks iPadOS for time to finish writing it. Leaving again within a minute with nothing changed does not take another. Your settings and Recent list are saved at the same moment, so a file you opened is still in Recent after iPadOS closes Limner in the background.

The file formats are the same everywhere. A .limner document written on iPad opens on Windows and macOS, and one written on the desktop opens on iPad, with layers, folders, masks, and text intact. Older .artpaint files still open everywhere.

Saving a timelapse to Photos or Files

When you finish a timelapse on iPad, Limner asks where the video should go: Save to Photos, Save to Files, or Cancel.

The video is finished and written to a recoverable copy inside Limner before that question is asked, and Photos permission is requested only if you choose Save to Photos. So a denied permission, or choosing Cancel, never costs you the recording: the finished file is still there and can still be saved through Files.

For what a timelapse records and how to control it, see Timelapse.

The tool options bar

The tool options measure the space they have and render the richest layout that genuinely fits, so the bar stays usable in either orientation. Undo and Redo stay centred, and the controls you reach for most stay within reach.

Finger painting

Prefer drawing by hand? Turn on Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Finger Painting and one finger drives the active tool at full pressure, on every tool a pen can drive: brushes, fills, transforms, Mesh Warp, Liquefy and the polygon selection. Two fingers still pan, zoom and rotate, a second finger ends a one-finger stroke, and the Pencil still wins whenever it touches the glass. The colour loupe moves to the Eyedropper tool while finger painting is on. Even with it off, a finger can drag existing anchors and objects with the Selection and Direct Select tools, and the anchor and handle hit zones are larger on iPad than on the desktop.

Reach any tool in one gesture

Hold a tool group on the strip and it opens under your finger; slide onto the tool you want and lift. Tapping still selects the tool shown on the key, and a second tap opens the flyout, exactly as on the desktop.

Naming your work

Save As on iPad asks for a name, warns before replacing a file, and can hand a copy straight to Files; a new document is no longer quietly written as "untitled 2". Every timelapse export option (Faster, Fit to time, the 9:16, 1:1 and 16:9 crops, Hold last frame and the watermark) works on iPad, re-encoding through the same hardware pipeline the recording uses, and PNG sequence export and Import Image Sequence both work as they do on the desktop.

Updates on iPad

Updates arrive through TestFlight during the beta, so there is no update check inside Limner on iPad. The Windows and macOS builds have their own in-app update check.

The Interface

For the full menu reference see Menus. To rebind keys or change preferences see Preferences and Shortcuts. For what lives inside each dockable panel see the Panels overview.

The Limner Illustration workspace
The Limner Illustration workspace.

The window at a glance

Limner stacks a series of bars across the top and bottom of the window, puts the tool strip and dockable panels along the sides, and gives whatever space is left to the canvas. Top to bottom, left to right:

ZoneWhat it is
Menu barThe menus on the left (nine in Illustration and Animation, and with a Book open: File, Edit, Image, Layer, Select, Filter, View, Window, Help; ten in Vector: File, Edit, Layer, Object, Path, Type, Select, View, Window, Help) and, at the right end, the Quick Access strip and the workspace switcher: Illustration, Vector, Animation, then Book and Home.
Tool options barA contextual bar whose controls change to match the active tool.
Document tab stripOne tab per open document; appears only when at least one document is open.
Left tool stripThe vertical strip of tool keys.
Dockable panel areasA panel area on the left (it collapses on its own in a narrow window) and one on the right.
Status barThe bottom row: the active tool, a readout you choose (dimensions or layers), status chips such as Saving or Update available, and the zoom and rotation controls centred under the canvas.
CanvasEverything that remains in the middle. The artwork lives here.

The flat ink-black theme with a single bright cyan accent is intentional: the chrome stays dark and quiet so the one hot color, cyan, always means "this is active or actionable". See Theme below.

F11 (View ▸ Fullscreen) gives the canvas the whole screen, and F11 again brings the window back. Ctrl+0 fits the canvas to the window and Ctrl+1 shows it at 100%, pixel for pixel; the same two views are buttons in the status bar's zoom cluster.

Workspace mode switcher

The workspace switcher sits at the right end of the menu bar: a weak "Mode" label followed by the Illustration, Vector and Animation buttons, then a divider, a Book button and a Home button that returns to the Home screen. The active mode is highlighted; clicking a different one switches the current document into it. Once you have starred commands in the command palette, a Quick Access strip of one-click buttons also appears in this row, next to the mode buttons; see Command palette, Quick Access, and workspaces.

ModeTooltipNotes
Illustration"Raster painting: brushes, selections, filters"The raster painting workspace.
Vector"Vector art: editable paths with fill and stroke"The editable-path workspace.
Animation"Frame by frame animation: draw cels on a timeline"The frame-by-frame cel workspace. See Animation Mode.

A few things worth knowing about modes:

  • Mode is per document. Two open documents can sit in different modes at the

same time.

  • Switching never converts your layers. The mode is a lens on the same

document. Switching reconfigures the tool strip and the panels, but the layer stack is left exactly as it was. (Entering Animation mode does add an opaque white paper under your art the first time, so frames are not see-through; see Animation Mode.)

  • Switching on a document that already has artwork asks first. Rather than

switching silently, Limner opens a dialog with three choices: New starts a fresh document in the chosen mode, Convert reinterprets the current document in that mode, and Cancel leaves the document where it is.

  • The Ctrl+Shift+M hotkey cycles the workspaces in switcher order: Illustration, Vector, Animation, and back to Illustration. While a Book is open it skips Animation, which a Book page can never be.

reached by clicking its switcher segment; pressing the hotkey while in Animation returns you to Illustration.

  • A document opens in the workspace that suits its contents: an animation opens

in Animation mode, a document with vector artwork in Vector mode, and everything else in Illustration.

Switching an Illustration document into Vector mode first asks what you mean: Switch this document re-lenses the same document (your layers stay, the Vector tools and panels appear), New Vector document starts a fresh Vector document and leaves this one untouched, and Cancel stays put. Tick "Don't ask again when switching workspace mode" to make the switch immediate from then on.

Books

A Book is a multi-page comic or manga project. It is not a fourth mode: the mode buttons are still only Illustration, Vector, and Animation, and Book is a separate axis with its own button beside them, lit while the Page Manager surface is showing. A Book wraps a sequence of pages, and each page is its own document that you paint in Illustration or Vector.

A Book opens from the Book button at the right end of the menu bar, beside the workspace switcher, and with Limner Plus from the File menu:

  • File ▸ New Book starts a fresh book.
  • File ▸ Open Book opens an existing one.
  • File ▸ Open Recent Book lists books you opened lately.

A Book saves to a single .limnerbook file that holds all of its pages. While a Book is open you get a page list (to add, reorder, and page through the pages) and a comic Panel tool in the tool strip, which lays down panel frames that clip their artwork so nothing spills into the gutters. For the full page and panel workflow see Books.

The menu bar holds nine menus in Illustration and Animation (and with a Book open): File, Edit, Image, Layer, Select, Filter, View, Window, Help. Vector mode holds ten: File, Edit, Layer, Object, Path, Type, Select, View, Window, Help. The workspace switcher sits at the right end of the same bar, and in a narrow window the menus fold right to left into a "..." overflow button so the switcher keeps its place. Every command and its shortcut is documented in Menus.

The menus are filed the way Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint file them: colour and tone adjustments under Image ▸ Adjustments, selection edits and Free Transform under Edit, Expand, Contract, Border and Feather under Select ▸ Modify, and app settings under Edit ▸ Preferences.

Tool options bar

The bar directly below the menus is contextual: its contents change with the active tool. Pick a selection tool and you get the selection mode and feather; pick the Fill and you get tolerance, and so on. Each tool's options are documented on that tool's page under Tools.

Three things hold their place no matter which tool is active:

  • Undo and redo sit in the exact centre of the bar, as a pair of small arrow

buttons (hover "Undo (Ctrl+Z)" and "Redo (Ctrl+Shift+Z)"). They are pinned to the bar's true centre, so they stay put however many controls the active tool shows.

  • The active tool's name and icon lead the bar on the left, in bold.
  • A "Snap" checkbox appears from any tool while a ruler or guides are in use,

so you can turn snapping off without leaving the brush.

The sliders are responsive: their track width scales with the window, growing on a wide screen and shrinking on a narrow one, so a busy bar stays clear of the centred undo and redo.

The bar holds a constant height no matter which tool is active, so the canvas no longer shifts up or down when you switch tools.

When the window gets narrow, the bar keeps each tool's essential controls visible and tucks the rest into a "more" menu at the right edge; Undo and Redo always stay on screen. At full width the bar shows everything.

The Brush bar

With the Brush active, the bar is trimmed to the four controls you touch constantly, each with its caption on the left:

ControlWhat it does
SizeThe brush diameter.
HardnessThe edge falloff, from soft to hard.
OpacityThe maximum coverage of the stroke.
FlowHow fast paint builds up within a stroke.

A live thumbnail of the active brush sits at the far left (click it to open the Brush picker). Pinned to the right edge, clear of the centred undo and redo, are the colour swatch, an Erase toggle (paint transparently with the current brush), and a Tool Settings button that opens the deeper Tool Settings panel where the blend mode, stabilizer, pressure curves, tip shape, scatter, and texture live. The full set of brush controls is on the Brush page.

Document tab strip

When you have one or more documents open, a tab strip appears showing one tab per document.

ElementBehavior
Tab labelThe document title. A bullet ( • ) is appended when the document has unsaved changes.
SwitchClick a tab to bring that document to the front.
CloseThe small X next to each tab closes that document. If it has unsaved changes, Limner asks before closing.

Hovering a tab shows "Unsaved changes: click to switch" when it has unsaved work, or "Click to switch" otherwise.

Left tool strip

The vertical strip on the far left holds the tools as a column of icon keys. The active tool's key is lit in cyan.

The strip is resizable. Drag its right edge wider and the keys reflow into more columns, the way Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint let you widen a compact tool column. Each key is 40 by 36 points before the UI scale preference. Pen, Pencil, and Airbrush sit on the strip as brush families beside Brush: each drives the full brush engine and remembers the last brush you picked in it, across restarts.

Tool groups and flyouts

Related tools are bundled into a group that shares one key. A grouped key shows a small corner triangle to signal "more tools live here". The key displays the active tool when one of its members is selected, otherwise the group's first tool.

  • Click a single-tool key to select that tool.
  • Click a grouped key that is not active to select the tool shown on it. Two groups open their flyout instead, because selecting their tools changes the document: the construction-aid group (picking a ruler places it) and the Mesh Warp / Liquefy group (Mesh Warp lifts the layer).
  • Click the active grouped key to open or close its flyout.
  • Double-click a grouped key, or click its corner triangle, to open the flyout from any state.
  • Each flyout row also carries a pin that gives that tool a key of its own on the strip (see below). The Illustration and Animation strips have pins (the two modes share one layout, so a pin made in either shows in both); the fixed Vector strip has none.

In Illustration mode the strip starts with these 20 keys, in this order (flyout order shown). Shortcuts are the defaults; the Tools Reference says which of the other tools can be given a key in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

KeyTools (default shortcut)
BrushBrush (B)
PenPen
PencilPencil
AirbrushAirbrush
EraserEraser (E)
BlendBlend, the Smudge tool
RetouchClone Stamp, Heal
SelectionRect Select (M), Ellipse Select (Shift+M), Lasso (L), Polygon Select (Shift+L)
Auto selectMagic Wand (W)
EyedropperEyedropper (I)
FillFill Bucket (Shift+G), Colorize
GradientGradient (G)
ShapeRectangle (U), Ellipse (Shift+U), Line, Curve
TextText (T)
Layer MoveLayer Move (V)
DeformMesh Warp, Liquefy
CropCrop (C)
Construction aidsLinear Ruler, Parallel Ruler, Radial Ruler, Concentric Ruler, Symmetry, Perspective
VectorObject, Line Edit
PanPan

Pen, Pencil, and Airbrush are Brush keys that each remember their own last-used brush. Transform has no key on the strip: press Ctrl+T or choose Edit ▸ Free Transform. While a Book is open, a Panel tool key is added at the end of the strip. See Crop Tool and the Tools Reference.

In Vector mode the strip is built for path work and grouped into captioned sections (View ▸ Show ▸ Tool Strip Captions, on by default; the captions show while the strip is one column wide and keeps its default layout): Select (Selection with the Object Lasso, and Direct Select), Shapes (Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Star and Spiral, with Line on its own key), Draw (Pen with Curvature, Pencil with the Vector Brush, and Eraser with Scissors, Knife and Join), Modify (Shape Builder with Pathfinder, Width, and Rotate with Scale and Reflect), Type, View (Artboard, Hand, Zoom) and Color (Gradient with the Style Picker), with a Fill-over-Stroke stack at its foot. The order is fixed by default, but the All Vector Tools panel (Window ▸ Customize Vector Toolbar) reorders and regroups its keys. While a Book is open, a Panel tool is appended to whichever strip is showing. See Vector Mode and Tools.

Animation mode uses the Illustration paint strip, unchanged, since you draw each frame with the same raster tools. See Animation Mode.

Picking from a group, and pinning

Holding a group key for about a third of a second opens its flyout under the pointer or your finger; slide onto the tool you want and lift to pick it. The strip's order itself is fixed (the old drag-to-rearrange was removed). To give a tool a key of its own, click the pin on its flyout row ("Give ... its own key on the tool strip"); the new key appears right after its group. The group's flyout keeps a row for that tool with a lit pin ("... has its own key. Put it back in this group."); click it to fold the tool back. The Illustration and Animation strips share one layout, so a pin made in either shows in both; the Vector strip has no pins. Window ▸ Reset Tool Strip Layout puts every pinned tool back.

Cursors

Over the canvas, Limner shows a Photoshop and Clip Studio-style cursor that matches the active tool, so the pointer tells you what it will do.

  • Brush, Eraser, Liquefy, and the blend brushes show a ring sized to the

brush, optionally with a centre crosshair. Toggle the ring with View ▸ Show ▸ Brush-Size Cursor and the centre crosshair with View ▸ Show ▸ Crosshair in Brush Tip.

  • Caps Lock switches the brush tools to a precise mode: the ring is replaced

by a fine crosshair, the way Photoshop's Caps Lock works. Press it again to go back to the ring. This affects only the brush-style tools.

  • Eyedropper shows a crosshair; the Text tool shows an I-beam.
  • Transform, Layer Move, the Object tool, and the Vector-mode Selection tool

show contextual handle cursors: a four-way move inside the box, a directional resize arrow over a corner, and a grab over the rotation handle. Mesh Warp shows a grab over a grid point and a move elsewhere. (The Direct Select and Line Edit point editors keep the plain arrow.)

  • The draw, select, shape, ruler, and pen tools show a precise crosshair.
  • View gestures override the tool cursor: holding Space shows an open hand,

dragging to pan shows a closed hand, and a Space+Ctrl scrubby zoom shows a magnifier.

Status bar

The bar across the bottom of the window is a single glanceable row. Left to right:

ElementShows
Active toolThe tool icon and name. The gestures a tool answers to are on its key's hover text in the tool strip, not here.
Document readoutOne slot you click to choose: Dimensions ("1920 × 1080"), Layer ("3 layers (active: Background)", a long name shortened and shown in full on hover), or None. The choice is remembered.
ArtboardsIn Vector mode, when the document has artboards: previous, a menu of every artboard with the active one named, next. Each choice makes that artboard active and fits it to the window.
Saving / ExportingA cyan "Saving…" or "Exporting…" indicator, shown only while a background save or export is running.
Soft ProofA chip while View ▸ Proofing ▸ Soft Proof is simulating a press profile.
Status lineA transient confirmation or notice ("Saved.", a refusal, the crash log offer), with the long explanation on hover. Nothing here ever blocks a stroke.
Update badgeA cyan pill that appears only when an update is available or ready (see below).

Centred under the canvas area sits the view cluster:

ElementWhat it does
Zoom outZooms the view out one step.
Zoom sliderSets the zoom directly; the readout shows the true magnification, so 100% is one screen pixel per canvas pixel.
Zoom inZooms the view in one step.
FitFits the whole canvas in the window (Ctrl+0).
100%Shows the canvas pixel for pixel (Ctrl+1).
Rotate counter-clockwiseRotates the canvas view 15 degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotation sliderSets the canvas view rotation directly.
Rotate clockwiseRotates the canvas view 15 degrees clockwise.
Reset rotationReturns the canvas view to 0 degrees.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Rotation slider-180.0 to 180.0 degrees0Rotates the canvas view. The value is clamped to the range and the buttons step it in 15 degree increments.

Canvas rotation is a view-only transform: it turns how you see the canvas, it does not rotate the artwork itself.

Update badge

The badge only appears when there is news to act on:

  • Update available: a cyan pill reading "Update available". Click it to see

details. Hover reads "A newer version of Limner is available. Click for details."

  • Update ready: a cyan pill reading "Update ready" once the update is

downloaded and verified. Click it to install. Hover reads "The update is downloaded and verified. Click to install."

  • Updating: a plain "Updating…" label while a check, download, or

verification is in progress.

When Limner is up to date there is no badge. For more on updating see Updating.

Dockable panels

Limner has two panel areas: one on the left, beside the tool strip, and one on the right. In Illustration and Animation the left area holds Tool Settings and the Brush picker by default; in Vector mode it starts empty. On a narrow window the left area collapses on its own to give the canvas room; Window ▸ Show Left Panels forces it open or closed, and Use Responsive Panel Layout hands the decision back. The right area collapses to a fixed 14 pixel rail when empty, which doubles as a drop target so you can drag a panel back into it.

Each panel rides in a tab you can move freely. The panels themselves are documented in the Panels overview; the Layers panel is covered in Layers.

Moving, floating, and docking a tab

  • Reorder: drag a tab sideways within its dock to reorder it.
  • Float: drag a tab out of the dock to open it as a floating window.
  • Dock: drop a tab on a window edge to dock it there.
  • Close: right-click the tab and choose Close panel. Reopen it later from the

Window menu.

Right-click a tab to split

Right-clicking a panel tab opens a "Move panel" menu with four placements and a Close panel item:

  • New column left puts the panel in a new column to the left.
  • New column right puts it in a new column to the right.
  • Stack above stacks it above the current panel.
  • Stack below stacks it below.

Reopening and resetting

  • Every panel has a checkbox in the Window menu. A check means the panel is

open, docked or floating. Toggle it to show or hide the panel. The menu lists the panels for the current mode.

  • Window ▸ Reset Workspace Layout restores the default arrangement: it

puts the default panels back where they started, re-docks anything you had floating, and closes the panels that are not part of the default.

Theme: dark, light, and Customize

Limner ships with a flat ink-black dark theme accented by a single bright cyan ( #2de2ff ). The dark chrome keeps attention on the artwork, and the cyan marks exactly one thing: what is active, focused, or actionable (the lit tool key, the active tab, the slider fill, the update badge).

A light "paper" theme is available, and you can build a custom theme from a base and an accent color. All three are reached from Edit ▸ Preferences:

  • Light Theme / Dark Theme toggles between the two built-in skins.
  • Customize Theme… opens an editor seeded from the current theme.
  • Reset Theme clears any custom theme.

See Menus ▸ Edit for the rest of the Preferences submenu, and Preferences and Shortcuts for how the choice is remembered between sessions.

New in 0.9.0

  • The workspace switcher lives on the menu bar. At its right end, with a Home button beside it, in every workspace.
  • Pixels look like pixels. At 200 percent zoom and above the display switches to nearest sampling, so hard edges stay hard the way Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint show them.
  • More undo. Undo entries are charged at their compressed size, so the history holds far more steps on a mostly empty canvas.
  • Vector strip captions. In Vector mode the tool strip carries Select, Shapes, Draw, Modify, Type, View and Color captions (View ▸ Show ▸ Tool Strip Captions) and a Fill-over-Stroke stack at its foot.
  • Narrow windows. The menu bar collapses right to left into a More menus button, and the Vector panels wrap or scroll rather than clipping.
  • Right-click a panel tab for New column left / right, Stack above / below, and Close panel.
  • Flipping a rotated view mirrors what you see instead of the unrotated canvas.

Command palette, Quick Access, and workspaces

This page is about getting around faster. The window zones themselves (tool strip, panels, status bar) are covered in The interface, and every menu item is listed in Menus.

The command palette

Press Ctrl+K (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts) or choose View ▸ Command Palette. A dimmed window opens with the search field already focused: type a few letters, press Enter, and the command runs. It reaches practically everything in the app: menu items, tools, panel toggles, workspace modes, and app settings, so it is usually faster than remembering which menu holds a command.

Searching and running

  • Matches are ranked, best first. A term can match anywhere in a command's name, in hidden keywords (typing "hotkeys" finds Keyboard Shortcuts), or even as scattered letters, so "gblur" still finds Gaussian Blur.
  • Shortcuts show on the row. A command that has a keyboard shortcut shows it as a chip, read live from your keymap: a rebound command shows your key, not the factory one.
  • Unavailable commands gray out, they do not hide. The palette mirrors the menu bar's graying, so a command that needs a selection or an open document stays visible but muted, and running it does nothing. Hover a grayed-out row to read why (for example "Open or create a document first" or "Requires Limner Plus").
  • The Home screen and the Page Manager hide the document. There, rows that would change it are grayed out with "Not available on the Home screen" or "Not available in the Page Manager". Opening, creating and saving, app settings, layouts and panels stay available.
KeyWhat it does
Ctrl+KOpens the palette with an empty search. Rebindable.
Up / DownMove the highlight through the results.
EnterRuns the highlighted command and closes the palette.
Esc, or a click outsideCloses the palette without running anything.
Click the star on a rowStars or unstars the command without running it. The palette stays open.

Browsing when the search is empty

With the search field empty the palette becomes a browsable catalog: your Favorites group first, then Recent, then every command grouped by category (File, Edit, Selection, Layer, Filter, Object, Path, View, Tools, Panels, Workspace, Animation, App). It doubles as a way to discover what Limner can do.

Recent holds the last 8 commands you ran from the palette or the Quick Access strip, most recent first, and it persists across sessions, so tomorrow's first Ctrl+K still shows yesterday's habits. A command that is both starred and recent appears only under Favorites.

When the palette refuses

The palette will not fire a command into the middle of another live operation: while a stroke or drag gesture is down, while a filter dialog's live preview is showing, during a transform, while a marquee selection is being dragged out, or while a text preview is active. In those moments Ctrl+K does not open the palette, and Quick Access clicks are ignored. Commit or cancel the operation first, then reach for the palette. This is deliberate: running an arbitrary command under an uncommitted preview could strand the preview on your canvas.

Note
While the palette is open, single-key canvas shortcuts are suppressed: typing b searches for commands instead of switching to the Brush.

Favorites and Quick Access

Every palette row carries a star at its right edge. Clicking the star marks the command as a favorite without running it, and the palette stays open so you can star several commands in one visit. Click the star again to unstar.

Starred commands show up in two places:

  • In the palette: a Favorites group at the very top of the browse view, in the order you starred them.
  • In the top bar: a Quick Access strip appears at the left end of the menu bar's switcher row, marked by a small pin, with the workspace buttons to its right. Favorites that do not fit the window move into a "..." menu at the end of the strip rather than being clipped. Each favorite is a one-click button. The strip only exists once you have starred at least one command, so the top row stays clean by default.

A favorite that does not apply right now greys out instead of disappearing (hover it and the tooltip says it is not available right now), so the strip's buttons never shuffle position. You can star any command, even one that is currently greyed. Favorites persist across restarts in your settings.

Named workspaces

A workspace is a named snapshot of your layout: which panels are open, where they are docked or floating, and which tools you have pinned onto keys of their own. Save one arrangement for painting with the references and color panels out, another stripped down for inking, and switch between them in one click.

The controls live at the bottom of the Window menu, under the Workspaces heading:

  • Save Workspace As… prompts for a name and saves the current layout. Saving under an existing name updates that workspace in place.
  • Apply: click a workspace's name to restore its layout.
  • Rename / Delete: the small pencil button renames a workspace, and the trash button deletes it.

Workspaces are stored in the app settings, not inside your documents, and they persist across restarts. A few honest edges worth knowing:

  • Delete asks no confirmation. If the layout you just deleted is still on screen, choose Save Workspace As… again with the same name and you have it back.
  • A workspace does not record which mode you were in. Applying one changes your panels and tool strip only; the document and its Illustration / Vector / Animation mode are untouched. Ctrl+Shift+M cycles those three workspaces in switcher order (skipping Animation while a Book is open), and Ctrl+N creates a new document from the palette like everywhere else.
  • The palette carries only Save Workspace As… Applying, renaming, and deleting are done from the Window menu.
  • Workspaces saved by a different Limner version restore partially. Both halves of the snapshot are version-stamped: an arrangement saved under a different dock or tool-strip layout version is ignored and your current one is kept, because pinning the strip or the docks to an old shape would be worse than doing nothing.

The same menu's Reset Workspace Layout and Reset Tool Strip Layout restore the factory defaults; neither touches your saved workspaces.

Canvas focus mode

Canvas focus hides every panel and bar: the tool strip, the docked panels, the menu bar, the tool options bar, and the status bar. The artwork fills the window and nothing competes for your eye. Toggle it from View ▸ Canvas Focus (Hide Panels), from the command palette, or with a key of your own.

  • Esc brings the interface back. Esc answers to the most urgent thing first: if a dialog or a live preview is open, Esc closes that, and the next Esc exits canvas focus.
  • No key is bound by default. Tab already moves focus between interface fields, so Limner does not claim it the way Photoshop does. Bind your own under Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts; the command is named Canvas Focus (Hide Panels).
  • Independent of fullscreen. F11 removes the window frame; canvas focus removes Limner's own chrome. Use both together for an edge-to-edge easel.
  • Not saved between sessions. Restarting Limner always starts with the full interface visible.

Tips

  • Star the handful of commands you keep digging two menu levels for (Flip Canvas, a favorite filter, a panel toggle); one starred command saves a trip every time you need it.
  • Closed a panel and cannot find it? Ctrl+K and type its name; panels reopen from the palette too.
  • Save your current layout as a workspace before experimenting with docking, so one click undoes the experiment.
  • If canvas focus becomes a habit, bind it to a comfortable key; the toggle is instant in both directions.
  • The interface - the window zones the workspaces rearrange, including the mode-switcher row that hosts Quick Access.
  • Menus - the full View and Window menu listings.
  • Preferences and Shortcuts - rebinding Ctrl+K and giving Canvas Focus a key.

New in 0.9.0

  • The palette covers the app. Essentially every command is now reachable, searchable, and favoritable from the command palette, and Ctrl+N creates a new document there like everywhere else.
  • The workspace toggle cycles. Ctrl+Shift+M now cycles Illustration, Vector and Animation in switcher order instead of bouncing between two (it skips Animation while a Book is open).

Tools

Tools Reference

Limner's tools live on the left tool strip. Click a tool to select it, or press its keyboard shortcut. Many tools share a slot with a flyout (a small popup): the first click selects the tool shown on the key and a second click, or a double-click, opens the flyout; the Ruler and Deform slots open their flyout first. Pen, Pencil and Airbrush sit on the strip as brush families: each drives the full brush engine and remembers the last brush you picked in it. Every shortcut shown here is the default and can be changed in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts, except where a tool is marked as not bindable.

The contextual options bar at the top of the window changes to match the active tool, and it is responsive: at narrow widths the less-used controls move into a More popup at the right end of the bar. Undo and Redo stay centred. When a raster ruler is active a Snap switch appears in the bar's header. Each tool page lists its options with exact ranges and defaults.

The strip itself changes with the workspace. Illustration and Animation share the twenty-slot raster strip below; the Vector workspace has its own fifteen-slot strip with section captions; and while a Book is open a Panel tool is appended to whichever strip is showing. See The Interface for the strip's layout. On the raster strip (Illustration and Animation) each flyout row carries a pin: tap it to give that tool a key of its own on the strip, and tap the lit pin to fold it back into its group. The Vector strip has no pins; Window ▸ Customize Vector Toolbar regroups it instead. Window ▸ Reset Tool Strip Layout restores the default order.

Painting and erasing

ToolDefault shortcutPage
BrushBBrush Tool
Penunbound (bindable)The inking brush family; the same options bar as the Brush. See Brush Tool and Brushes
Pencilunbound (bindable)The Pencils folder as a tool. See Brushes
Airbrushunbound (bindable)The Airbrush folder as a tool. See Brushes
EraserEEraser Tool
Blendunbound (bindable)The blending brushes (Smudge and the wet mixers), with Sample all layers and a Sample radius. See Smudge Tool
Clone Stampunbound (bindable), shares a slot with HealClone Stamp and Heal Tools
Healunbound (bindable), shares a slot with Clone StampClone Stamp and Heal Tools

A saved Blur brush loads as a Smudge brush, and Filter ▸ Gaussian Blur softens a whole layer or selection.

Fills and shapes

ToolDefault shortcutPage
Fill BucketShift+G, shares the Fill slot with ColorizeFill Bucket Tool
Colorizenot bindable, shares the Fill slot with Fill BucketColorize Tool
GradientGGradient Tool
RectangleURectangle, Ellipse, and Line Tools
EllipseShift+URectangle, Ellipse, and Line Tools
Lineunbound (bindable)Rectangle, Ellipse, and Line Tools
Curveunbound (bindable)Drag out a line, then bend it by its handles; Enter commits. See Rectangle, Ellipse, and Line Tools
TextTText Tool

Move, transform, warp, and crop

ToolDefault shortcutPage
Layer MoveVTransform and Layer Move
TransformCtrl+T (no strip key)Transform and Layer Move
Mesh Warpunbound (bindable), shares the Deform slot with LiquefyMesh Warp Tool
Liquefyunbound (bindable), shares the Deform slot with Mesh WarpLiquefy Tool
CropCCrop Tool

Sampling and selecting

ToolDefault shortcutPage
EyedropperIEyedropper Tool
Pan (Hand)not bindable (Space-drag pans from any tool)The Interface
Rect SelectMSelections
Ellipse SelectShift+MSelections
LassoLSelections
Polygon SelectShift+LSelections
Magic WandWSelections

Construction aids

The Ruler slot holds six aids, and opens its flyout on the first click so you can choose one: Linear Ruler, Parallel Ruler, Radial Ruler, Concentric Ruler, Symmetry, and Perspective. None of them has a bindable key; reach them from the strip or the command palette. See Construction Aids.

Editable stroke tools

The Vector slot of the raster strip holds Object and Line Edit, the two tools that work on an editable stroke layer (Layer ▸ New ▸ New Editable Stroke Layer): Object selects, moves, restyles and redraws whole lines, and Line Edit reshapes them point by point. Neither has a bindable key. See Vector Editing and Output.

Vector tools

The Vector workspace has a strip of its own, in Illustrator's order with section captions (View ▸ Show ▸ Tool Strip Captions), real icons, and a Fill-over-Stroke stack at its foot (X targets, Shift+X swaps, D restores the defaults, / removes the targeted paint). Each of these tools is described in Vector Mode and Tools. The letter keys are active only in Vector mode.

SectionSlotTools (default key)
Select1Selection (V), Object Lasso (Q)
Select2Direct Select (A)
Shapes3Rectangle (M), Ellipse (L), Polygon, Star, Spiral
Shapes4Line (\)
Draw5Pen (P), Curvature (Shift+`)
Draw6Pencil (N), Vector Brush (B)
Draw7Eraser (E), Scissors (C), Knife (K), Join (Ctrl+J joins selected paths)
Modify8Shape Builder (Shift+M), Pathfinder (F)
Modify9Width (Shift+W)
Modify10Rotate (R), Scale (S), Reflect (O)
Type11Type (T)
View12Artboard (Shift+O)
View13Hand (H)
View14Zoom (Z)
Color15Gradient (G), Style Picker (I)

Several labels exist in both strips and mean different tools: Pen, Pencil, Eraser, Rectangle, Ellipse, Line and Gradient in the Vector strip work on vector objects, their raster namesakes on pixels. The Zoom tool exists only in the Vector strip; in the raster workspaces use the status bar, Ctrl+0 / Ctrl+1, the wheel, or Space+Ctrl-drag.

Book

While a Book is open, a Panel tool is appended as the last slot of whichever strip is showing. It draws and edits comic panels: line width, border colour, an optional fill, Snap to the page guides and neighbouring panels, and Delete for the selected panel. It has no bindable key. See Book.

New in 0.9.0

  • The Blur tool is gone. The Blur tool, the Blur brush mode and the built-in Blur preset were retired; use the Smudge tool or Filter ▸ Gaussian Blur instead.
  • Colorize. A new tool in the Fill slot flats line art from a few color hints and solves the color again whenever a hint or a line changes. See Colorize Tool.

Brush Tool

The Brush always paints with whatever brush is currently selected in the picker, so its feel ranges from a hard inking pen to a soft airbrush to a wet oil smear depending on the preset. To change the brush itself (tip, dynamics, texture, and the rest) see Brushes and the Tool Settings panel.

Shortcut

The default key is B. Like every shortcut in Limner, it is rebindable from Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Options bar

When the Brush is active, the contextual options bar shows the controls below. The slider values are not fixed defaults: they mirror the parameters stored on the active brush, so each preset starts the sliders where its own design puts them. (For reference, the brush engine's base values are size 24.0, hardness 0.85, opacity 1.0, flow 1.0, and stabilization 0.35; the brush selected at first launch is Pencil (HB), which starts at size 8.0, hardness 0.9, opacity 1.0, flow 1.0, stabilizer 0.3.)

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1.0 to 2000.0 (logarithmic)Active brush valueBrush diameter in canvas pixels.
Hard0.0 to 1.0Active brush valueHardness: the opaque inner fraction of the dab before the edge softens. Lower is a softer rim. Greyed out for any brush that uses a sampled tip (see below), since that brush takes its edge from the tip image.
Opacity0.0 to 1.0Active brush valueThe per-stroke ceiling. Overlapping dabs build up only to this level and then stop.
Flow0.0 to 1.0Active brush valueThe per-dab deposit. Lower flow lays paint down more gradually within a single stroke.
ColourRGBCurrent brush colourThe paint colour, also editable from the Color panel.
EraseOn / offOffTransparent paint: when on, the brush erases instead of painting (like CSP's transparent colour). Click again to paint.
Tool Settings(button)n/aOpens the Tool Settings panel, where pressure curve, taper, jitter, tip shape, scatter, and texture live.

A Smart Shape checkbox is on the bar too (on by default): hold the pen still at the end of a stroke to snap it to a clean line, arc, ellipse, rectangle or polygon, and untick it to keep every stroke freehand. Blend mode and Stabilizer are not on the bar: they live on the Tool Settings panel's Ink and Correction pages, the Correction page also holding the stabilizer's delay radius and Tail Aggressiveness. At narrow widths Hardness, Flow, Smart Shape and Tool Settings move into the More popup; the thumbnail, Size, Opacity, Erase and the colour swatch stay on the bar.

Flow and Opacity are separate controls. Flow is the per-dab deposit: how much paint each stamp lays down, so overlapping passes within one stroke build up gradually toward full strength. Opacity is a ceiling on how solid the whole stroke can become; once a stroke reaches it, crossing your own stroke never pushes past it. A low Flow with a high Opacity gives an airbrush that builds slowly but can still reach full strength on repeated passes; a high Flow with a low Opacity lays paint instantly but caps the stroke at a fixed translucency.

Hardness greys out for sampled-tip brushes. The Hard slider only shapes the soft-to-hard edge of the built-in round tip. A brush whose tip comes from a sampled image takes its edge from that image, so the slider would do nothing and is disabled. Hovering the disabled slider explains this: "Hardness shapes the round tip's edge. This brush uses a sampled tip, so its edge comes from the tip image." Round-tip brushes keep Hardness live.

The far left of the bar shows a small live thumbnail of the active brush. Click it to open the brush picker.

The deeper brush parameters (taper, pressure curve, jitter, tip shape, scatter, texture, and more) are not on the bar; they live in the Tool Settings panel. The bar keeps only the controls you reach for constantly.

Blend modes

The stroke's own blend mode lives on the Tool Settings panel's Ink page, as Blending mode. It offers the same thirty modes a layer does, in this order: Normal, Multiply, Screen, Overlay, Darken, Lighten, Color Dodge, Color Burn, Linear Dodge (Add), Linear Burn, Hard Light, Soft Light, Difference, Exclusion, Hue, Saturation, Color, Luminosity, Subtract, Divide, Vivid Light, Linear Light, Pin Light, Hard Mix, Darker Color, Lighter Color, Dissolve, Grain Merge, Grain Extract, Hard Mix (Soft). The blend mode is applied once when the stroke commits. It is hidden for smudge brushes, since those deposit no colour of their own.

Live size change

Press [ to shrink the brush and ] to grow it. Each press steps the diameter by about 10 percent (with a 1 pixel floor), clamped to the same range as the Size slider. These keys work mid-stroke: the new size takes effect on the next dab, so you can taper a stroke by hand as you draw. The Size slider follows along automatically. Both keys are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Modifier keys

KeyEffect
Alt (hold)Temporary eyedropper. Press and drag to scrub-sample a colour from the composite; release Alt to return to painting. The choice is locked at pointer-down, so toggling Alt mid-stroke cannot hijack a stroke already in progress.

For the dedicated colour picker, see the Eyedropper.

Smart Shape snap

The Brush can clean up a freehand shape for you. Draw a rough circle, rectangle, or other recognizable shape, then hold the pointer still at the end of the stroke. After about 800 milliseconds of dwelling in place (within roughly 6 screen pixels, so the feel is the same at any zoom), Limner recognizes the shape and snaps the stroke to a clean version, dropping you into an on-canvas re-edit with handles. Strokes smaller than about 48 pixels on screen never snap, so hatching and small detail work stays freehand, and the gesture can be turned off entirely with the Smart Shape checkbox on the Brush options bar. The snap can fire two ways:

  • Mid-stroke, while you keep holding (a stationary tablet pen keeps emitting samples, so it triggers as you hold).
  • On release, as a fallback, if you held at the end (a mouse held still emits no samples, so this catches that case).

If the path is not a clean shape, the stroke commits as normal freehand paint. Smart Shape applies only to the Brush tool, not the Eraser, and never fires for a transparent-paint (Erase) stroke. Holding Shift while a recognized shape is active constrains it (for example, a circle locks to a perfect circle and a line locks to 15 degree increments). See Shapes for more on the shape re-edit handles.

Notes and special cases

  • Blend-folder brushes reroute the tool. Selecting a brush from the "Blend" folder (or any brush that carries the smudge flag, including the wet-mixing oils in the Painting folder) keeps the Brush tool selected but smears instead of depositing colour. The Erase toggle wins over this rerouting: with Erase on, any brush erases, Blend brushes included. See Smudge for that behaviour.
  • The Eraser shares this path. The Eraser is the Brush in erase mode on raster layers. You can also make any brush erase by turning on the Erase toggle in the options bar.
  • Locked layers. Painting on a locked layer is a no-op. See Layers.
  • Text layers. Trying to paint on a text layer prompts you to rasterize it first; the triggering stroke is dropped, and you paint after confirming.
  • Vector layers. On a vector layer, a Brush stroke is captured as an editable vector line at pen-up. See Vector mode and Vector editing.
  • Construction aids. When a ruler, guide, grid, or perspective snap is active, strokes rail onto it. See Construction aids. Symmetry repeats the stroke across the symmetry images; the symmetry controls live on the Symmetry tool's options bar (see Construction aids).

New in 0.9.0

  • Spacing takes care of itself. Dab spacing follows a square-root law from the brush size and the projected width of a flattened nib, so a tilted flat nib lays a continuous edge.
  • Pressure per tablet. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Pen Pressure keeps a calibrated curve for each tablet, and an unnamed pen never overwrites a named one.
  • The first dab follows the stroke. A directional tip starts pointing the way the line goes, curve following subdivides where a stroke bends, and lifting the pen no longer freezes the app.
  • Clone Stamp and Heal. Two new brushes on the Retouch slot; see Clone Stamp and Heal Tools.

See also

Eraser Tool

Default shortcut: E. All shortcuts are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

What it does

  • On a normal raster layer, the Eraser removes paint under the brush dab, leaving transparency behind. Strength controls how completely it clears, so a soft, low-Strength eraser fades pixels rather than wiping them out.
  • On a layer mask, the Eraser behaves like a normal raster erase, editing the mask itself.
  • On a vector layer, the Eraser switches to the geometric vector eraser, which cuts the vector lines themselves instead of clearing pixels. The exact behaviour depends on the active erase mode. See Vector layer erasing below.

The Brush tool can also erase. Turn on the Erase toggle on the Brush options bar (CSP-style transparent colour) and the active brush erases instead of painting. This lets any custom brush, with all its dynamics and texture, act as an eraser. See the Brush page and the brush library.

Eraser brush defaults

The Eraser carries its own brush parameter set, separate from the Brush tool, so changing the eraser does not disturb your painting brush.

SettingValue
Name"Eraser"
Size40.0
Hardness0.85

Other engine parameters fall back to the brush engine base (flow 1.0, stabilization 0.35).

Options bar

These controls appear on the contextual options bar while the Eraser is active.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1.0 to 2000.0 (logarithmic)40.0Eraser diameter in pixels.
Hard0.0 to 1.00.85Edge hardness. Lower values give a softer, feathered edge.
Strength0.0 to 1.01.0How fully each dab clears. This is the eraser's opacity: below 1.0 it only partially erases, so repeated passes fade pixels gradually.

Hard is on the bar only at full width; at narrow widths it moves into the More popup, leaving Size and Strength. The eraser's stabilizer lives on the Tool Settings panel's Correction page.

Modifiers

  • Alt: hold to temporarily switch to the Eyedropper and sample a colour, then release to return to erasing. (Useful when you want to check or pick up a colour mid-edit.)

Vector layer erasing

When the active layer is a vector layer (and you are not editing a mask), the Eraser becomes a geometric vector eraser. Instead of clearing pixels, it operates on the vector lines themselves. Three mode buttons appear on the options bar, and your choice is remembered.

Mode buttonWhat it does
Erase touched areasErases only where the eraser passes, splitting the line at that span.
Erase up to intersectionErases the touched part outward to the nearest crossing lines. Ideal for cleaning up overshot ink.
Erase whole lineOne touch deletes the entire line.

The default mode is Erase touched areas. The buttons appear in that order on the options bar, and your choice is remembered for the next vector erase.

For more on vector layers and how their lines are drawn and edited, see Vector mode.

Tips

  • Because the Eraser and Brush share one engine, you can build a custom eraser the same way you build a brush: pick a tip, set hardness and stabilization, and adjust Strength for partial clearing.
  • For a precise, line-art friendly eraser, raise Hard toward 1.0. For blending edges, lower it.
  • To erase with a textured or shaped brush, switch to the Brush tool and turn on its Erase toggle instead, so the brush's tip and dynamics carry over to the erase.

Smudge Tool

It lives in the same dab engine the Brush uses, so a soft, large tip blends broadly and a small, hard tip works in tight spots.

Under the hood a blender is a pigment carrier. It picks colour up over a 64-point sample of the area under the tip (the Sample radius), carries a finite load, and pulls paint inward as well as pushing it outward, so dragging from empty canvas into a shape draws the edge back with the pen. It deposits nothing of its own, every stroke starts clean, and a stroke reads only the tiles the brush touches, so there is no pause at 4K and above.

Where to find them

The tool ships in two places, and it behaves identically either way:

  • As the Blend tool on the tool strip (the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog and the command palette list it as Blend too). Its options bar carries the brush controls plus Sample all layers and Sample radius, which live nowhere else.
  • As library brushes in the Brush picker's Blend folder. Pick one and keep using the Brush tool; the stroke smears or softens instead of painting. See Brush library and presets.

Either way, the settings come from the active brush. To change size, hardness, flow, or stabilizer, edit the brush in the Tool Settings panel or pick a different Blend-folder brush.

Keyboard shortcuts

Smudge has no default keyboard shortcut. It appears in the Keyboard Shortcuts list and can be given a key of your own in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

What works on, and what does not

  • Smudge works on normal raster layers and layer masks.
  • It is blocked on vector layers. If you try, Limner shows a notice and does

nothing, because there is no pixel colour there to rework. Convert or rasterize the layer first.

  • It respects the active selection, symmetry, and the perspective ruler. With a

perspective ruler and snap on, strokes rail toward the vanishing points just like a brush stroke.

  • A locked layer cannot be smudged.

Smudge

Smudge picks up the colour under the tip at the start of the stroke and drags it along your path, mixing in colour it passes over as it goes. The result is the classic "wet fingertip" smear.

How it behaves:

  • Pressure drives the smear. Press hard and your starting colour carries

farther before it blends into what is underneath, like a loaded fingertip. A light touch blends gently and locally.

  • Flow sets the deposit strength. Higher Flow lays the carried colour down

more strongly per dab.

  • The smear carries a finite load. What the tip picked up runs out as it travels, the way real paint does, instead of feeding itself from its own trail.

instead of dying out after the first inch.

  • With symmetry on, each mirrored stroke carries its own colour, sampled from

under its own start point, rather than a shared average.

Smudge options

The dedicated Smudge tool reads these from its brush. The defaults below are the values of the built-in Smudge brush.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1.0 to 2000.040.0Diameter of the smear tip in pixels.
Hardness0.0 to 1.00.5Edge sharpness of the round tip. Lower is softer.
Flow0.0 to 1.00.6How strongly each dab deposits the carried colour.
Stabilizer0.0 to 0.950.4Smooths a shaky path so the smear curves cleanly. Lives on the Tool Settings panel's Correction page rather than the bar.
Sample all layersOn / offOffPicks the smear colour up from the flattened composite instead of the active layer alone. The smear still lands on the active layer.
Sample radius5 to 100 percent15How much of the tip the pickup reads its colour from, as a share of the tip radius: larger samples more ground and flickers less on texture, smaller follows the exact pixels under the centre.

Notes:

  • The deposit per dab combines pressure with Flow, so a light pen pressure

always smears more gently than a hard one at the same Flow.

  • On pen-up the final dab is laid down at a fixed strength so the stroke ends

cleanly instead of fading to nothing.

Tips

  • For a believable smear, keep Flow moderate and let pressure do the work. Full

Flow at full pressure drags colour a long way, which can look streaky.

  • The tool commits on pen-up and adds one stroke to the Session Stats count. See

the Stats panel.

New in 0.9.0

  • No stall on a large canvas. Starting a smudge stroke used to read the whole canvas first; it now reads only what the stroke touches.
  • Sample radius. The Blend slot's options bar carries Sample all layers and a Sample radius (5 to 100 percent, default 15) that sets how far the pickup looks around the dab, and the sampling now zooms with the brush.
  • Blending rebuilt around pigment. A blender carries a finite amount of the colour it picked up, pulls paint inward as well as pushing it outward, deposits nothing of its own, and starts every stroke clean. See Brushes.

both tools rail toward.

Clone Stamp and Heal Tools

Clone Stamp and Heal share the Retouch slot of the raster tool strip. Both paint with the full brush engine, so size, hardness, opacity, flow and every brush dynamic apply, and both take their paint from somewhere else on the canvas instead of from the colour panel.

Where to find them

Click the Retouch slot (below the Blend slot) to pick Clone Stamp; click it again, or double-click, for the flyout with Heal. Neither has a default hotkey, and both can be bound in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Neither tool works inside a layer mask: starting a stroke while a mask is the edit target is refused with a notice, and the mask is left alone.

Clone Stamp

Alt+click to aim the source, then paint: the pixels under the source point are copied under your brush, offset by the distance between the source and where you started painting. It is the tool for repeating a texture, patching a gap in a pattern, or moving a detail without redrawing it.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Alignedon / offonOn, the source keeps its offset from the brush across strokes, so several strokes continue the same copy. Off, every stroke starts again from the point you aimed.
Brush controlsas the Brush toolfrom the brushSize, hardness, opacity, flow and the brush picker, exactly as on the Brush Tool.

Heal

Heal aims the same way, with Alt+click, but blends the source's texture into the colour and lighting of the place you paint, so a patch disappears into its surroundings rather than sitting on top of them. Use it for blemishes, dust, seams and small distractions; use Clone Stamp when you want an exact copy.

Tips

  • Both tools always copy from the active layer, so the paper and the layers below never bake into the clone. Aim the source on the layer you mean to paint on.
  • A soft, low-flow brush hides the edge of a clone; a hard brush copies crisp detail.
  • Both tools respect the selection, symmetry and the rulers, so a cloned repeat can follow a perspective ruler.

Fill Bucket Tool

Default shortcut: Shift+G. Shortcuts are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

How it works

  1. Pick the color you want in the Color panel (see Color).
  2. Select the Fill Bucket, then click inside the region you want to fill.
  3. Limner samples the color under your click, grows outward to every touching pixel within the Tolerance range, and paints that area with the active color.

The fill is deferred for responsiveness: the click records the target pixel right where you pressed, and the actual flood, edge processing, and upload run once on the next frame. You still get exactly one fill per click, with identical results and a single undo step, but a click never freezes the app even on a large canvas.

By default the fill matches against the merged composite of all layers and paints onto the active layer alone (like Clip Studio Paint's default Refer other layers bucket): the fill respects line art kept on its own layer while the color lands on your flats layer. Untick Reference all layers to match against the active layer's own pixels instead.

Where it lands

  • Active layer: the normal case. The fill paints onto the layer you are working on.
  • Multiple selected layers: if more than one layer is selected, every selected non-background layer is filled, all folded into one undo step.
  • Layer mask: when you are editing a mask, the fill paints into the mask instead of the pixels (fill with black to hide, white to show). See Layers.

The active color you fill with is also added to the Color History strip in the Color panel.

Options

These controls appear in the options bar while the Fill Bucket is active.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Tolerance0 to 10045How different a neighboring pixel may be from the clicked color and still be filled. The scale is perceptual, so one step means the same visual distance in light and dark colors, and the useful band is spread across the whole rail. 0 fills only the exact color; 100 fills everything.
EraseOn / OffOffTransparent fill: clears the matched region to transparency instead of filling it with the active color. The same toggle as the Brush bar's Erase, so the two stay in step.
ContiguousOn / OffOnOn fills only the connected patch you clicked. Off fills every matching color anywhere on the layer, even across walls (non-contiguous fill).
Expand-20 to 20 px4After the flood, grows the filled area by this many pixels so flats tuck neatly under line art. A negative value shrinks the fill instead.
Expand modeUnder line, To darkest, EvenUnder lineOnly shown when Expand is positive. Under line follows the line's own shape in under it, as far as its centre, so the same setting works on a hairline and on a thick soft line. To darkest grows the full distance and then keeps only the darker margin. Even grows the same distance in every direction.
Close gap0 to 16 px3Treats gaps in the line art up to this width as if they were closed, so a fill seeded inside a not-quite-sealed shape stays inside. 0 turns gap closing off.
Reference all layersOn / OffOnMatches the fill region against every layer (the merged composite) instead of just the active layer. The paint still lands on the active layer.
Refer image borderOn / OffOnTreats the canvas edge as a line when closing gaps, so a region that opens onto the border still fills as enclosed. The fill itself always reaches flush to the edge; with Close gap at 0 this option has no effect.
SamplePoint, 3 × 3, 5 × 5PointThe size of the square the seed color is averaged over, so a click that lands one pixel inside an anti-aliased ramp does not anchor the flood to a blend that exists nowhere else. The Magic Wand reads the same setting.
Anti-aliasingNone, Weak, Middle, StrongNoneFeathers the fill boundary inward so the edge is not stair-stepped. None gives a hard binary edge; Weak, Middle, and Strong feather progressively wider (about 1, 2, and 3 pixels). The feather is inward only, so the color never bleeds past the region.
Soft edgeOn / OffOnBlends the fill into anti-aliased lines instead of stopping at the first pixel that does not match. Turn it off for a hard edge.
Gradient fillOn / OffOffFills with the active gradient ramp (mapped left to right across the filled area) instead of a flat color. Edit the ramp with the Gradient tool.

Notes on the options

  • Tolerance is the single most useful dial. If a fill leaks across a soft edge, lower it. If a fill leaves a halo of unfilled pixels around your lines, raise it (or use Expand).
  • Expand with Under line is the standard flatting combination, and it is what ships: the flat climbs under anti-aliased ink to the line's own ridge so there is no gap, and it can never cross a line into the region beyond, however thin the line is.
  • Reference all layers (on by default) is what makes flatting work out of the box when your line art is on one layer and you are filling on another: match against the visible drawing, but keep the color on the flats layer. Untick it to match only the active layer's own pixels. If a visible layer is flagged as a Reference layer, the fill matches against that layer's lines instead, regardless of this option.
  • Gradient fill reuses whatever ramp the Gradient tool is set to, so set up your ramp there first.

Symmetry

When a symmetry ruler is active, the Fill Bucket also fills from the mirrored copies of your clicked point, so a symmetric region fills symmetrically. The whole set of fills folds into a single undo step. See Construction aids for setting up symmetry rulers.

Limitations

  • Vector layers: the Fill Bucket is blocked on vector layers, because they hold strokes rather than filled regions (a flood would be wiped by the next re-render). Limner shows a notice if you try. Use vector fills in Vector mode instead.
  • Locked layers: filling does nothing on a locked layer.

New in 0.9.0

  • Colour matched the way your eye does. The bucket compares colours perceptually, so a tolerance of 20 means the same visual distance in light and dark colours.
  • Sample size. Point, 3 by 3 or 5 by 5 sampling for the seed colour, as on the Magic Wand.
  • Enclose and Fill. Edit ▸ Enclose and Fill fills every closed gap inside a rough lasso; see Selections.

See also

  • Color - choosing the active color and the Color History strip.
  • Gradient tool - editing the ramp used by Gradient fill.
  • Construction aids - symmetry rulers that drive symmetric fills.
  • Layers - filling masks and multiple selected layers.

Colorize Tool

Colorize shares the Fill Bucket's slot in the tool strip (press and hold the slot, or click its small triangle) and has no keyboard shortcut. Pick the raster layer that holds your line art, choose a color, and draw a short stroke inside each region: the color lands on a new layer directly under the lines, named after the line layer with "color", and fills each region up to its lines.

The hints stay on that color layer as strokes (drawn over the canvas while the tool is active), and the color is solved again whenever you add or delete a hint or the line art changes: draw another line on the line layer and the color follows it, delete a hint and its region goes clear. A hint cannot be moved or reshaped once drawn; to change one, Alt-click it to delete it and draw it again.

Options

ControlDefaultWhat it does
Width12 pxHow wide the next hint is drawn, in canvas pixels. A hint only needs to touch its region; width matters when two hints compete for a region.
Clear hintoffThe next hint leaves its region transparent instead of coloring it.
Lines stop coloronThe color fills up to a solid line and not past it, so a region without a hint stays clear. Off, every hint spreads until it meets another hint's color (the classic watershed), and a region you want clear needs a Clear hint.
Drop leaksoffClears the areas two hints reach only by crossing a line and then contest out in the open, at the percentage shown (50% by default: an area whose edge touches the other hint's color more than it touches ink). Mostly useful with Lines stop color off.
Delete lastn/aRemoves the hint drawn last and solves again.
Clear hintsn/aRemoves every hint; the color layer goes clear.

Alt-click a hint to delete just that one. Every hint edit is one undo step, and dragging the Drop leaks percentage is one undo step too, solved once when you let go.

A gap in the lines lets color through: with a hint on each side, the leak is a few pixels beside the gap on the side whose hint is farther from it (draw the hint near the gap, or close the gap on the line layer). Anti-aliased edges and faint scanner noise do not stop the color, and neither do semi-transparent light strokes (a 50% white stroke is paper, not a line); a line at a quarter of full ink or darker does.

The color layer

The color layer is a generated layer, like a fill layer: its pixels are solved from the hints, so the brush and the bucket do not paint on it. Paint on a layer above it, or bake it into ordinary pixels with Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer or Merge Down, which drops the hints. A locked color layer refuses hint edits ("Layer is locked": unlock the color layer to change its hints), but it still follows its line layer when the lines change. The color also follows lines that a layer's live effects redraw.

It follows one line layer. If that layer is deleted, merged away or flattened, the color layer keeps the colors it shows as an ordinary raster layer, the status bar says "1 color layer unlinked", and one Undo brings back the line layer and every hint. Photoshop, SVG and OpenRaster exports get the flat color; the hints stay in the Limner document (the export notice names "Colorize hints"), which then needs this build or newer to open.

Where Colorize is unavailable

  • Animation. Colorize solves one drawing, not a frame timeline, so in Animation the tool refuses to draw, delete or clear hints with "Colorize is unavailable in Animation". Existing hints still show. Switch to Illustration to edit them; leaving Animation for any workspace solves the color layers again.
  • Not enough memory. Before each solve, Limner checks that it fits in the memory the device can safely give it (about 8 bytes for every canvas pixel). A solve that would not fit is skipped with "Colorize needs more memory", which names the size, instead of risking the app being closed. On desktop computers every canvas Limner can create fits; the check matters on an iPad with little memory free.

Gradient Tool

Default shortcut: G (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts).

What it does

  • Drag to fill with a multi-stop color and opacity ramp.
  • Choose from 8 built-in presets or build your own in the Gradient editor.
  • Pick the shape (Linear, Radial, Reflected, Conical, Diamond), reverse the ramp, and turn on dithering to hide banding.
  • Save your own gradients as presets and remove them later.

The preview is drawn through the real compositor, so it appears at the active layer's depth, blend mode, and selection clip while you drag. Release to commit.

Gradients track the active paint color: the default ramp blends the current color into transparent. See Color for picking and managing colors.

Note
The Gradient tool paints on raster (pixel) layers only. It is blocked on vector layers, where it shows a notice instead of painting.

Options bar

When the Gradient tool is active, the tool options bar shows a compact ramp preview plus a couple of quick controls. Click the ramp preview to open the full Gradient editor.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Ramp previewn/an/aShows the current gradient. Click it to open (or close) the Gradient editor.
ShapeLinear, Radial, Reflected, Conical, DiamondLinearHow the ramp is mapped across your drag.
Reverseon / offoffMirrors the ramp so the end color appears at the start of the drag.

The Dither option lives in the Gradient editor (see below).

The Gradient editor

Click the ramp preview in the options bar to open the Gradient editor in the Tool Settings panel. It holds the presets, the editable stop bar, the selected stop's color, opacity, and position controls, and the shape options.

Presets

The top row holds the 8 built-in presets, followed by any presets you have saved, followed by a Save button. Click a preset swatch to load its colors into the current gradient. Loading a preset replaces the stops but leaves your shape, Reverse, and Dither settings as they are.

The 8 built-in presets:

PresetWhat it is
Color to clearThe active paint color blending into transparent. This is the tool's default ramp.
Black to whiteSolid black to solid white.
SunsetDeep violet through warm red and orange to a pale gold.
SkyDeep blue through mid blue to a light haze.
NeonHot pink through electric violet to cyan.
RainbowSix-stop spectrum from red through to pink.
GoldA metallic-style ramp: dark gold, highlight, and back to dark gold.
Fade to blackTransparent black fading to opaque black.

Hover a built-in swatch to see its name.

Adding, moving, and deleting stops

The stop bar shows the ramp with one triangular marker per stop. A gradient always keeps at least two stops and can hold up to 16.

  • Add a stop: click an empty spot on the bar. The new stop samples the ramp's current color at that position (so it is invisible until you recolor it).
  • Move a stop: drag its marker. A stop is clamped between its neighbors so the order is preserved.
  • Select a stop: click its marker. The selected marker carries the accent-colored outline, and its controls appear below the bar.
  • Delete a stop: select it, then click Delete. Delete is disabled when only two stops remain.

Per-stop color, opacity, and position

With a stop selected, the controls below the bar edit just that stop.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Color swatchfull sRGB color pickern/aSets the stop's own color. Picking a color here unbinds the stop from the active paint color.
Main coloron / offon for the default ramp's stopsWhen on, the stop follows the active paint color instead of a fixed color.
Pickbuttonn/aArms color picking: click the canvas (or Alt-scrub) to set the selected stop's color, or click a reference image. Click again to disarm.
Deleten/an/aRemoves the selected stop (a gradient keeps at least two).
Opacity0% to 100%per stopThe stop's opacity.
Position0% to 100%per stopWhere the stop sits along the ramp.

When Main color is on, the stop tracks the color picker, so the gradient updates as you change the active color. The default Color to clear ramp uses Main color on both stops, which is why it always blends the current color into transparent.

Shape, Reverse, and Dither

Below the separator at the bottom of the editor:

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ShapeLinear, Radial, Reflected, Conical, DiamondLinearHow the ramp is mapped across your drag (see Shapes below).
Reverseon / offoffMirrors the ramp so the end color appears at the start of the drag.
Ditheron / offonAdds fine noise so long, soft gradients do not show banding.

Shapes

The five shapes all use the same start-to-end drag:

ShapeWhat it does
LinearRamp runs along the drag line.
RadialRings around the start point; the drag length is the radius.
ReflectedThe linear ramp mirrored on both sides of the start point.
ConicalSweeps the ramp by angle around the start point (Photoshop's "Angle").
DiamondConcentric diamonds around the start point.

Saving and removing custom presets

  • Save the current gradient: click the Save button at the end of the preset row. The current gradient (its stops, shape, reverse, and dither) is added as a new preset and saved to your settings.
  • Remove a saved preset: right-click a saved preset swatch and choose Remove preset, or click the saved preset and use the Delete button. Built-in presets cannot be removed.

Saved presets persist across sessions in your settings file.

Tips

  • Hold the current color as one stop and transparent as the other to paint a soft glow or vignette.
  • Turn on Dither for long, subtle ramps (skies, soft backgrounds) where 8-bit banding would otherwise show.
  • Use Reverse to flip a gradient without re-dragging.
  • Color - picking and managing the active paint color the gradient can follow.
  • Layers - the Gradient tool paints onto the active raster layer at its blend mode and depth.
  • Selections - an active selection clips the gradient fill.

Rectangle, Ellipse, and Line Tools

  • Rectangle and Ellipse lay down a solid figure (filled or just an outline) in the current paint colour.
  • Line is drawn with the active brush, so a pencil line looks like pencil and an inked line looks like ink. After you release, the line drops into an on-canvas editing state where you can nudge either end before committing. Curve is the same gesture with a bend: drag out the chord, then pull any of its four points, which all sit on the curve itself, so the handle you hold is the ink.

On a vector layer, Rectangle and Ellipse behave differently: instead of pixels they create an editable closed vector stroke. See the vector mode notes below.

Choosing a tool

ToolDefault shortcutWhat it draws
RectangleUA rectangle through the two drag corners
EllipseShift+UAn ellipse inscribed in the drag rectangle
Line(none)A straight line drawn with the active brush
Curve(none)A curved line drawn with the active brush, bent by four on-curve points

The Line and Curve tools ship without a default key. All four are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Drawing a rectangle or ellipse

  1. Pick the Rectangle or Ellipse tool.
  2. Set the paint colour. Both tools deposit the current paint colour at full opacity, and the colour is added to the Color History strip when you start the drag.
  3. Drag from one corner to the opposite corner. Rectangle draws the box through those two corners. Ellipse fits an ellipse inside that box.
  4. Release to commit onto the active layer.

A live preview follows your drag and updates once per frame, so it stays smooth even on large canvases. The figure is selection-clipped, so if you have an active selection the shape is masked to it.

Notes:

  • An ellipse is only drawn once it is at least about 1 pixel across in each direction. A tiny drag draws nothing.
  • A figure dragged entirely off-canvas draws nothing.

Rectangle and Ellipse options

These appear in the tool options bar when Rectangle or Ellipse is active. The same controls, plus an Opacity slider, also sit at the top of the Tool Settings panel while a shape tool is chosen; either surface drives the same values.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Filledon / offtrue (on)When on, fills the whole figure. When off, draws only an outline. A small caption reads "(unchecked = outline)".
Size1.0 to 200.0 (logarithmic), in canvas pixels8.0Outline thickness. Shown only when Filled is off.

The Size control is the same value the Line tool uses, so changing it for one affects the other.

Drawing a line

  1. Pick the Line tool.
  2. Pick the brush you want the line drawn with (the line carries that brush's tip, texture, and grit), and set the paint colour.
  3. Drag from the start point to the end point.
  4. Release. If the line is at least 3 pixels long it enters on-canvas re-editing (below). A shorter line is discarded.

The line is rendered with the active brush at a constant width set by the Size control, rather than as a flat fill.

Constraining and railing the angle

  • Shift constrains the line to 15 degree steps (0, 15, 30, 45, and so on) measured from the start point.
  • When a perspective ruler is in use with Snap on, the Line tool instead rails toward the matching vanishing point. In that case Shift's 15 degree constraint does not apply. The Curve tool's opening drag rails and constrains exactly like the Line tool. Rectangle, Ellipse, and Gradient stay free axis drags and are not affected by perspective railing. See Construction Aids for rulers and vanishing points.

Re-editing the line before you commit

After you release a line of 3 pixels or more, it does not commit immediately. Instead it floats as an editable preview with handles on each endpoint:

  • Drag either endpoint to reposition it. Hold Shift while dragging an endpoint to constrain that end to 15 degree steps.
  • A rotation handle sits above the line; drag it to rotate the whole line.
  • Enter (or tap off the line, away from the handles) commits the line onto the active layer.
  • Esc cancels and leaves the layer untouched.
  • Switching tools also commits the line.

Line options

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1.0 to 200.0 (logarithmic), in canvas pixels8.0The brush diameter the line is drawn at.

A caption in the bar reads "Drawn with the active brush; Shift constrains the angle." With the Curve tool it reads "Drag out the line, then drag its points to bend it. Enter commits, Esc cancels."

On a vector layer

When the active layer is a vector layer, the shape tools change behaviour:

  • Rectangle and Ellipse create an editable closed vector stroke (an outline) drawn with the active brush, rather than rasterized pixels. This matches the convention that figures on vector layers are outline strokes. If Filled is on, the shape is still drawn unfilled and Limner prints a notice that vector layers hold outlines. After committing, you can reshape it with the vector editing tools.
  • Line and Curve still drop into the same on-canvas re-edit; on a vector layer the committed figure becomes an editable stroke.

For more on working with vector strokes, see Vector Mode.

Tips and gotchas

  • All three tools fold their result with Normal blending. They do not use a brush's per-brush ink blend mode, even when the active brush has one set.
  • Rectangle and Ellipse paint the current colour at full opacity. To make a softer or semi-transparent figure, lower the layer opacity after committing, or use the Brush tool instead.
  • The Line tool is the right choice when you want a straight stroke that still looks like your brush. The Rectangle and Ellipse outline mode gives you a crisp, even-width border in a flat colour.
  • These tools also respect the active selection as a clip, so you can confine a figure to a masked region.

Text Tool

At a glance

Tool nameText
Default shortcutT
Works onRaster layers (creates a re-editable text layer)
Commit resultPixels are baked onto the text layer; the text stays re-editable until you rasterize it

How text works in Limner

When you place text, Limner creates a text layer. The layer stores the words and all their styling (font, size, alignment, colour, position, rotation), and it generates its pixels from that stored data. Because the styling is the source of truth, you can click the text again later and re-edit everything without losing crispness: the glyphs are re-rasterized at the new size, not stretched.

Fonts come from your installed system fonts. Limner scans your fonts folder on a background thread when it starts, so the very first time you reach for the Text tool the list may still be filling in. If you click before fonts finish loading, nothing happens yet (Limner is still building the list); just try again in a moment. Missing fonts after opening a document are listed after the system font scan: a document whose text uses a family this machine does not have raises a Fonts unavailable notice naming it. Saved raster pixels stay unchanged until you edit that text; while you edit, the text previews in an installed fallback, confirming can change the layout, and Limner keeps the missing family name unless you choose another font. After installing the original font, restart Limner and reopen the document before editing or exporting changed text. If no system fonts are found at all, the panel shows "No system fonts were found, so text can't be placed."

Placing new text

  1. Select the Text tool (press T or pick it from the tool strip).
  2. Click on the canvas where you want the text. A text box appears and the text editor opens in the Tool Settings panel. A click always starts single-line point text; to make the words wrap, drag the grip on the right edge of the box, or tick Wrap text in the panel and set the width there.
  3. Type into the text box at the top of the panel, then set the font, size, colour, and other options below.
  4. Click Confirm to commit the text (or Cancel to discard it).

A new text layer is named automatically from the text you typed. The text colour of a brand new text block starts from your current brush colour, so the text matches whatever you were just painting with. See color.md for how the brush colour is chosen.

If you confirm with the text box empty (or only whitespace), nothing is placed. Limner treats an empty confirm the same as a cancel.

Editing existing text

With the Text tool active, click directly on an existing text layer's box to re-open it for editing. The panel re-loads that layer's words and styling, and you can change anything. Clicking off the box confirms the current edit; clicking on a different text layer confirms the current one and opens the next.

Switching to another tool also finishes the current edit: it is confirmed if it has text, or cancelled if it is empty.

Note
A locked text layer cannot be opened for editing: clicking one says "This layer is locked. Unlock it to edit its text." Unlock it in the Layers panel first (see Layers). Transform, Mesh Warp and Liquefy are refused on a text layer, with an explanation: a text layer rebuilds its pixels from the text, so a deformation baked into them would be lost the next time you edit the words. Move, scale, and rotate with the Text tool's own box, or run Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Text first.

Moving, scaling, and rotating on the canvas

While you are editing, the text box shows handles directly on the canvas. Drag them to reposition the block:

  • Move: drag inside the box.
  • Scale: drag any of the four corner handles. Scaling changes the font size (so the text stays crisp), not the pixel resolution, and the wrap width and any outline scale by the same factor, so a resized block keeps its shape instead of rewrapping. Size is clamped to the 4 px to 1024 px range while dragging the box.
  • Rotate: drag the rotate handle that sits just off the box. A fifth grip on the right edge of the box sets the wrap width; on point text it is what turns the block into a wrapping box.

The "Drag the on-canvas box to move, scale, or rotate." hint at the bottom of the panel is a reminder of this.

The text editor

The text editor is drawn in the Tool Settings panel, the way the panel follows the active tool. Edit the fields, watch the live preview update on the canvas, then Confirm or Cancel.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Text boxn/aemptyThe multi-line text body (3 rows tall). Hint text reads "Type your text…". Press Enter for a new line.
FontAll installed system familiesThe family you last used (the first family in the list until you pick one)Picks the font family from your installed fonts.
Style: Bon / offoffBold. Falls back to the regular face if the family has no bold face.
Style: Ion / offoffItalic. Falls back to the regular face if the family has no italic face.
Style: Uon / offoffUnderline. Draws a bar just below the baseline of each line.
Size4.0 to 1024.0 px72.0 pxFont size in pixels (logarithmic slider). Dragging a corner of the on-canvas box drives the same value over the same range.
Letter spacing-20.0 to 80.0 px0.0 pxExtra space between glyphs (tracking). Negative values tighten the spacing.
Line spacing0.5 to 3.01.0Line-height multiplier (leading). 1.0 is the font's natural line height. Shown with a "×" suffix.
Wrap textoff, or 16 to 8192 px (logarithmic)off (point text)Turn it on to break lines to fit a box. The width is the same measure as the grip on the right edge of the on-canvas box.
Outlineoff, or 0.5 to 128.0 px (logarithmic) with its own colouroffDraws a band behind the letters, under the fill. It starts white at 3 px, and it scales with the text.
AlignLeft, Center, Right, JustifyLeftHorizontal alignment of multi-line text. Four icon buttons.
ColoursRGB colour[20, 20, 20] (overridden to the brush colour for new text)The text colour.
Confirmn/an/aCommits the text. Enabled only when the text box is not empty.
Canceln/an/aDiscards the edit.

While you are editing, a small floating toolbar on the canvas also offers Confirm and Cancel, so you do not have to reach back to the panel.

Styling part of the text

The editor's controls set the style of the whole layer. To style only some characters, select them in the editor's text box (drag, or Shift with the arrow keys) and use the Text tool's options bar at the top of the window: B and I toggle bold and italic over the selection, the color swatch recolors it, and the size field resizes it. The bar reads the style of the first selected character, so a toggle flips what you see. Plain gives the selected characters the layer's own style back. The controls are grayed out until characters are selected, and the hover says so.

A styled run keeps its place as you type: characters typed inside a bold word are bold, and a run after an insertion moves with the text. Runs of different sizes share one baseline. A run's size is its own: changing the editor's Size afterwards changes only the characters without a size of their own, and Plain gives a run the layer's size back. The styling is saved with the document and reopens editable; a Photoshop or SVG export writes the layer's one style and names the loss in the export notice.

Vector text objects (the Type tool in Vector mode) style the same way: select characters in the words box of the Character settings (in the Properties panel or the Typography panel), or in the words while typing them on the canvas, and use the Type tool's options bar (B, I, size and Plain; a text object's color is its fill, so there is no swatch). The outlines update as you go and the runs save with the document.

Characters the font does not have

When the layer's font has no glyph for a character (Japanese text in a Latin font, an emoji, a symbol), Limner draws that character from another installed font that has it, at the layer's size and color, instead of an empty box. The rest of the text stays in the font you chose. The same applies to vector text objects. The substitute is picked from the fonts on this machine, so the same document can show a different substitute elsewhere; install the font you want and pick it for the layer to make it explicit.

Alignment options

The four Align buttons map to these behaviors:

  • Left: every line starts at the left edge of the block.
  • Center: every line is centered within the block.
  • Right: every line ends at the right edge of the block.
  • Justify: inter-word spacing is stretched so every line except the last fills the block width. A last line, or any line with no spaces, stays left-aligned (the standard typographic behavior).

Committing and undo

Clicking Confirm bakes the rasterized text into the layer and stores the re-editable data, all as a single undo step. Editing existing text and confirming is also one undo step that records the change from the old text to the new.

Rasterizing a text layer

When you want to paint over the text with a brush, treat it as plain pixels, or simply lock in the look, flatten it with Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Text. This drops the re-editable text data so the layer becomes an ordinary raster layer (the pixels are already there, so nothing visibly changes). It is a single undo step, and Limner commits any in-progress edit first. After rasterizing, the text is no longer editable as text. The menu entry's hover reads "Flatten the active text layer to plain pixels (no longer editable)."

Note
Rasterize Text only acts on a text layer that is unlocked. If the active layer is not a text layer, or it is locked, the command does nothing. Unlock the layer in the Layers panel first if needed.

Tips and limits

  • The live preview on the canvas is pixel-identical to the committed result, so what you see while editing is exactly what you get.
  • Very large blocks have a hard cap: if a block would need to rasterize larger than 16384 px on a side, Limner skips it and draws nothing (this only happens with extreme size or pasted text).
  • Font discovery follows each platform: Windows enumerates the Windows Fonts folder, and macOS and iPadOS walk the system and per-user font roots, including their subfolders.

See also

  • Layers - how layers, locking, and layer order work.
  • Color - choosing the brush colour that seeds new text.
  • transform-move.md - free transform and Layer Move for moving committed pixels.

New in 0.9.0

  • Real typesetting. Text is shaped with OpenType features: ligatures, joining scripts such as Arabic and Hebrew, and right-to-left runs; kerning is read from the font's GPOS table and line spacing matches browsers, InDesign and Krita.
  • Old documents do not move. Kerning and line spacing are recorded per text layer, so reopening an older document lays its text out by the old rules; new text uses the new ones.
  • Style part of the text. Select characters and set bold, italic, size or color on them alone from the Text tool's options bar; the runs save with the document and reopen editable. See Styling part of the text.
  • Missing characters come from another font. A character the layer's font lacks is drawn from another installed font that has it, instead of an empty box.
  • Small fixes. Ctrl+Enter reliably finishes an edit.
  • In the Vector workspace the Type tool sets point, area and on-path text objects and edits them on the canvas; see Vector Editing and Output.
  • Text that wraps in a box. Drag out a box with the Text tool instead of clicking, and your words wrap inside it. Resize the box and the text reflows to fit, with the edge you are not dragging staying exactly where it was. Click and type still places single-line point text, exactly as before.
  • A wrap width you can set exactly. The width grip on the right edge of the box and the wrap-width control in the Tool Settings panel are the same measure, so you can drag it by eye or type an exact value.
  • Justify. Alignment gains Justify, which stretches the spaces on every line except the last so the paragraph fills the box.
  • Text outline. A text layer can carry an outline with its own colour and thickness, starting at white and 3 px. It is the standard look for dialogue over art, it stays exact where the text meets the canvas edge, and the fill inside the glyph is left intact.
  • Scaling keeps the proportions. Dragging a corner of the text frame scales the type and the wrap width by the same factor, so a resized block keeps its shape instead of rewrapping into a different one.
  • A text layer is named from its text. New text layers take their name from what you typed, and the name follows the text when you edit it.
  • Transform is refused, not silently destructive. A text layer rebuilds its pixels from the text, so a transform baked into it would be lost the next time you edit. Limner now explains that instead of quietly discarding your editable text.

Transform and Layer Move

Transform

The Transform tool (default shortcut Ctrl+T) lifts the selected pixels of every eligible layer into a free transform.

With nothing selected, Transform selects the whole canvas and lifts the active layer, the way Photoshop's Ctrl+T does on a layer. It does nothing only when a transform is already running, or when the pixels cannot be lifted. On a graphic layer it hands you the Vector workspace's Selection tool instead, and if the only thing selected is a text layer it explains why it will not lift it. If any selected layer (other than the paper base) is locked, the whole transform is cancelled before it starts.

What it lifts

  • The selected, non-transparent pixels of every selected layer, except the paper base, vector and graphic layers, fill and adjustment layers, text layers, and any layer the current animation frame shows through a transform keyframe. Each of those rebuilds its pixels from data of its own, so a transform baked into them would be discarded.
  • The base paper layer (index 0) is always excluded.
  • Vector layers are skipped. They have their own transform path through the Object tool. When the only selected layer is a vector layer, Transform switches you to the Object tool with that layer selected instead.
  • When more than one layer is selected, the handles wrap the union of all the lifted content, and every layer is previewed and committed together.

Lifting erases the pixels from their original spot, clears the marching ants, and floats the content above the canvas so you can reposition it freely. The lift and the eventual commit fold into a single undo step.

Moving, scaling, and rotating

The free transform draws a bounding box with handles:

  • Move: drag anywhere inside the box.
  • Modifiers: while scaling, the opposite corner stays put by default and Alt scales about the centre instead (press or release Alt in the middle of a drag and the anchor changes at once); while rotating, Shift snaps to 15 degree stops.
  • Scale: drag any of the four corner handles.
  • Rotate: drag the rotate handle, which sits just off the box.

The handle grab tolerance is 14 window pixels. This is measured on screen rather than in canvas pixels, so handles stay equally easy to grab whether you are zoomed in or out.

Scale factors are clamped away from zero on each axis (a factor smaller than 0.05 snaps to 0.05), so you cannot collapse the content to nothing by accident.

Constraining aspect ratio

Hold Shift while dragging a corner to scale uniformly and keep the box proportions. You can also leave the constraint on permanently with the Lock toggle on the floating toolbar (see below); Shift acts as a live override on top of it. Uniform scaling drives both axes by the larger relative change and preserves any flip signs.

Modes and numeric fields

The tool options bar carries four modes. Free is the affine box (scale from the corners, rotate from the handle, move inside); Distort drags each corner freely; Perspective mirrors a corner's diagonal opposite through the centre; Skew slides a corner's edge parallel. Beside them sit five fields for exact values: W and H as percentages, Angle in degrees, and X and Y as pixel offsets. The three projective modes edit the four corners directly, so they have no single scale or angle and the fields are hidden rather than showing a value that means nothing.

The floating toolbar

While a transform is active, a small floating toolbar appears near the box:

ControlWhat it does
ConfirmBakes the transformed pixels back onto each origin layer and ends the transform.
CancelDiscards the transform, restoring every lifted layer to its original position.
Flip HMirrors the floating content horizontally.
Flip VMirrors the floating content vertically.
LockToggles the sticky aspect-ratio lock while scaling. Hover text: "Lock aspect ratio while scaling (or hold Shift)". Default off.

Aspect lock control

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Lockon / offoffKeeps the box proportions while you scale from a corner. Shift overrides it live.

Confirm versus Cancel

  • Confirm bakes the transformed pixels back onto each layer they came from. The whole lift-and-commit sequence is one undo step.
  • Cancel restores the lifted pixels exactly as they were, byte for byte, including the graded coverage of a feathered selection, and discards the lift so the undo stack stays clean.

A hidden source layer still transforms and commits (so it moves along with a multi-layer selection), but it is left out of the live preview.

Re-editing a transform (retained source)

Confirm keeps more than the pixels it bakes. Each transformed layer remembers the pixels it lifted, the pixels that were under the placed result, and the box's position, scale, rotation and mode. Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Edit Transform puts the original pixels back and re-opens the box exactly where you left it, so a second adjustment resamples the original once instead of resampling an already resampled result: rotate by 45 degrees, confirm, edit the transform back to 0 and confirm again, and the layer is the original again. Cancel in a re-opened session keeps the previous result.

The way back exists only while the layer's pixels are still that result. Paint over the transformed area, run a filter on the layer, merge it or resize the canvas, and Edit Transform reports that the transform stays as pixels (a merge drops the record, undoably). Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Rasterize Transform lets a record go on purpose; the pixels do not change. A record counts against the document's memory readout and, like an embedded smart object, is not kept past 256 MiB (the status line says so, and the transform is still applied). The record is saved with the document (which then needs this build or newer) and re-opens after a relaunch; PSD, SVG and OpenRaster exports get the transformed pixels only, and the export notice names "Re-editable transforms" as what stays in the Limner document. The same applies to a committed Mesh Warp: Edit Transform brings its lattice back with every node where it was.

Layer Move

The Layer Move tool (default shortcut V) is the quick way to reposition an entire layer. It selects the whole canvas and lifts the complete active layer into the same free transform described above.

Layer Move is ignored in two cases:

  • The active layer is the base paper layer (index 0).
  • The active layer is locked.

In every other respect it behaves exactly like Transform: drag inside to move, drag a corner to scale, drag the rotate handle to rotate, hold Shift (or use the Lock toggle) to constrain aspect, and Confirm, Cancel, or Flip from the floating toolbar. Because Layer Move first selects the whole canvas, there is no need to make a selection first.

Reaching Free Transform from the menu

You can also start a transform from the menu: Edit ▸ Free Transform (also in the command palette). This runs the same Transform action as the Ctrl+T shortcut: with a selection it lifts the selected pixels, and with none it transforms the whole active layer. One difference: a transform started from the menu or the palette hands you back the tool you were using when you confirm or cancel it, while the Ctrl+T key selects the Transform tool and stays on it. A Free Transform that is refused (on a vector layer, a locked or generated layer, or with nothing to lift) changes nothing, so a later transform never returns to a tool from that earlier attempt. Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Edit Transform on a retained Mesh Warp likewise returns to the tool it was opened from when you confirm.

Notes

  • A live text edit is baked first before either tool opens its transform, so unconfirmed text is committed rather than lost.
  • Both default shortcuts (Ctrl+T for Transform, V for Layer Move) are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.
  • Selections for making the selection that Transform lifts.
  • Layers for layer locking, the paper base, and the active layer.

New in 0.9.0

  • Alt anchoring is live. Holding or releasing Alt in the middle of a drag switches between scaling from the centre and from the opposite edge.
  • Feathered selections lift exactly. Free Transform and Mesh Warp lift a feathered selection at its exact coverage, and a mixed selection of raster and text layers no longer erases the text pixels.
  • Safe mid-transform. Hiding or reordering a layer while a transform is live no longer makes the content vanish.
  • Transform by the numbers. Free Transform gains numeric fields for exact position, scale, and rotation, Shift constrains a drag, and rotation snaps at the common angles.
  • Text layers are protected. Transforming a text layer used to destroy its editability silently. It is now refused with an explanation of what to do instead.
  • Transforms you can go back into. A committed transform or Mesh Warp keeps its source, so Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Edit Transform reopens it on the original pixels. See Re-editing a transform.

Mesh Warp Tool

Use it for organic reshaping where a straight scale or rotate is too rigid: curving a banner, fitting a label onto a tilted surface, adjusting a pose, or correcting perspective on hand-drawn line art.

On-screen label: "Mesh Warp" (this is the tool palette button label).

Where it fits

  • For a straight move, scale, rotate, or flip, use the Transform / Move tool. Mesh Warp is for free-form deformation, not affine transforms.
  • For brush-driven push, pinch, bloat, and twirl with no visible grid, use the Liquefy tool. Liquefy commits each stroke on its own as you lift the pen; Mesh Warp keeps the whole warp open until you Confirm or Cancel.

Default shortcut

Mesh Warp has no default keyboard shortcut. You can assign one in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

How it works

Selecting the Mesh Warp tool starts a warp session right away. There is no click-to-begin step.

  1. Limner lifts the active layer's non-transparent pixels into a floating copy and clears them from the layer underneath. An active selection clips what gets lifted (see below); once the pixels are lifted, the selection is dropped and the grid becomes the editing surface.
  2. A grid of control points appears over the lifted pixels, at the density set in the options bar (5x5 unless you change it).
  3. Drag any control point. The nearest point to your press is grabbed, and dragging it deforms the surrounding pixels with a live preview.
  4. Use the floating toolbar to Confirm, Cancel, or Reset.

What gets lifted

  • If there is an active selection, only the selected pixels are lifted and the grid frames the selection bounds.
  • If there is no selection, the whole layer is lifted and the grid frames the bounding box of the drawn content, so the handles sit around the artwork rather than the entire canvas.
  • Only non-transparent pixels are lifted. If the active layer has no pixels in range, the session does not start and Limner says "The selected area has no pixels to warp on this layer."

The control grid

The mesh is a square lattice of control points at the density you chose: 3x3 (9 points), 5x5 (25 points, the default), 7x7 (49) or 9x9 (81). The points start in a regular grid that exactly matches the lifted pixels. Dragging a point bends the pixels in the cells that touch it, leaving the rest in place. There are no size or strength settings: the grid and its density are the control.

To grab a point, click within about 16 screen pixels of it. The closest point inside that range is selected, so you do not have to be pixel-perfect.

Tool options bar

The tool options bar carries one control, Grid, plus a one-line reminder.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Grid3x3, 5x5, 7x7, 9x95x5How many control points the next mesh gets. 3x3 bends the whole shape, 9x9 gives local detail with more points to manage. It is disabled while a warp is live, since changing the density would rebuild the lattice and throw away the warp you have made; it applies to the next mesh once you confirm or cancel this one.

The reminder reads: Drag the grid points to warp; Confirm / Cancel / Reset from the floating toolbar.

Note
Drag the grid points to warp; Confirm / Cancel / Reset from the floating toolbar.

Floating toolbar (during a warp)

While a warp is in progress, a small toolbar floats below the artwork.

ControlWhat it does
ConfirmBakes the deformed pixels back onto the source layer as a single undo step, then ends the session.
CancelResets the grid to its starting shape, restores the original pixels, and ends the session with no change.
ResetSnaps every control point back to its starting position so you can begin the warp again, without leaving the session.

Reset appears only in Mesh Warp. The matching toolbar is a Mesh Warp feature: Liquefy has no toolbar at all and commits per stroke. Cancel restores the lifted pixels exactly, including the graded coverage of a feathered selection.

Committing and undo

  • The whole operation (lifting the pixels, then committing the warped result) folds into one undo step. A single Undo after Confirm restores the layer to how it looked before you started.
  • Confirm and Cancel only touch the tiles the grid covers, so the edit stays fast and the undo entry stays small.
  • Reset does not end the session and does not create its own undo step. It just returns the grid to identity so you can keep working.

Limits and notes

  • Raster layers only. On a vector layer the tool is blocked with the on-screen notice "Mesh is not available on a vector layer. Rasterize the layer to use it." (vector pixels are regenerated, so a warp would be wiped). The notice offers a Rasterize Layer button.
  • The base paper layer (the bottom layer) cannot be warped. Choosing it puts "Mesh Warp: the paper base cannot be warped" on the status line; pick a layer above it.
  • A locked layer cannot be warped. Unlock it first. Fill and adjustment layers are refused too, since their pixels are regenerated, and a text layer is refused with "A text layer rebuilds its pixels from the text, so a warp baked into it would be lost the next time you edit the text. Use Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Text first." See Layers for locking.
  • Only one warp or transform session can run at a time. Finish or cancel the current one before starting another.
  • Switching to another tool commits the in-progress warp. Coming back to Mesh Warp then lifts the layer again into a fresh session. (Re-clicking Mesh Warp while a warp is already running does nothing; the current session stays active.)
  • A committed warp keeps its source: Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Edit Transform re-opens the lattice on the original pixels with every node where it was, and Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Rasterize Transform lets that go. See Re-editing a transform.

See also

Liquefy Tool

Liquefy is a close relative of the Mesh Warp tool. Mesh Warp lifts the layer onto a grid of draggable points, 3x3 up to 9x9, that you confirm or cancel as a session. Liquefy is a direct brush instead: no session, no grid, no Confirm button. You just paint deformation, stroke by stroke, with a smooth falloff at the brush edge.

When to reach for it

  • Reshape an outline or a blob of colour by dragging.
  • Slim, widen, or swell a region with Pinch and Expand.
  • Add a swirl, a curl, or a sense of motion with Twirl.
  • Make small, painterly corrections that would be fiddly with selections.

For straight, structured deformation with visible handles (like a CSP mesh transform), use Mesh Warp instead.

How it works

  1. Select the Liquefy tool. Selecting it changes nothing on its own, and a tap with no drag changes nothing either: no history entry, no modified flag.
  2. Pick a Mode in the tool-options bar (Push, Pinch, Expand, or Twirl), and set Size and Strength. The same settings appear in Tool Settings, and the two stay in step.
  3. Drag on the canvas. The stroke deforms the pixels live under your brush, with a smooth falloff that fades the effect to nothing at the brush edge. Pinch, Expand, and Twirl keep accumulating while you hold the pen still.
  4. Lift the pen. The stroke commits on its own as one undo step; one Ctrl+Z restores everything that stroke moved. Liquefy needs no selection and will not run with one: clear the selection first, or Limner says "Clear the pixel selection before using Liquefy. Selection-clipped Liquefy is not available yet." If more than one raster layer is selected, they all deform together, and one undo restores them all.

Liquefy works on raster layer pixels only. It is refused, with a message saying why, on a layer mask, on the bottom paper layer, on a locked layer, on vector and graphic layers, on fill and adjustment layers, and on text layers. Each of those either has no pixels of its own or regenerates them, so a warp baked in would be wiped.

The four modes

Choose a mode with the segmented buttons at the left of the tool-options bar. The default mode is Push.

ModeWhat it does
PushForward-warp. Drags pixels along the direction of your stroke. This is the workhorse mode for nudging shapes around.
PinchPulls pixels in toward the centre of the brush, shrinking the area under the cursor.
ExpandPushes pixels out away from the brush centre, swelling the area under the cursor.
TwirlSwirls pixels around the brush centre.

A Reverse toggle inverts whichever mode is active: with Reverse on, Pinch expands, Expand pinches, and Twirl swirls the other way. On desktop, holding Alt flips Reverse temporarily while you drag. Pen pressure modulates the effect: a lighter touch warps less, a firmer touch warps more.

Options bar

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Mode (Push / Pinch / Expand / Twirl)four buttonsPushSelects which deformation each brush dab performs (see the table above).
Size12.0 to 1024.096.0Brush radius in canvas pixels. The slider is logarithmic so small sizes are easy to dial in. Larger values move broader areas of the layer at once.
Strength0.0 to 1.00.5How strongly each dab displaces the pixels. Lower is gentle and precise; higher is aggressive.
Reverseon / offoffInverts whichever mode is active: Pinch expands, Expand pinches, Twirl swirls the other way, and Push drags backwards. On desktop, holding Alt flips it for as long as you hold.

A Help button in the bar (and a caption in Tool Settings) reminds you: "Pinch, Expand, and Twirl repeat while held. On desktop, Alt temporarily flips Reverse."

Notes on the ranges:

  • Strength is held to the 0.0 to 1.0 range.
  • Size, Strength, Mode, and Reverse are shared with Tool Settings: change them in either place and the other follows.

Committing and undo

There is no Liquefy session and no floating toolbar: every stroke commits by itself the moment you lift the pen, as one entry in the undo history.

  • Undo (Ctrl+Z) restores everything the last stroke moved, across every layer it touched.
  • To discard an in-progress stroke, undo it after lifting; there is nothing to cancel or confirm.
  • Mesh Warp keeps its Confirm / Cancel toolbar; that workflow is a Mesh Warp feature, not a Liquefy one.

Because each stroke stands alone, you can switch tools, run commands, or save at any time without losing or baking anything unexpectedly.

Keyboard shortcut

Liquefy has no default keyboard shortcut. You can assign one in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

The only modifier the tool itself uses is Alt, which temporarily flips the Reverse toggle while you drag (desktop only).

Tips

  • Start with a low Strength and build up the deformation in passes. It is easier to add more than to undo a heavy push.
  • Match the Size to the feature you are sculpting: a large brush for broad shape changes, a small brush for fine corrections.
  • Liquefy does not work through a selection yet, so clear the selection before you start. To protect part of the artwork, put the region you want to sculpt on its own layer.
  • If you do not see any effect, check that you are on a raster layer above the paper base and that the layer actually has pixels where you are dragging.

See also

Crop Tool

On-screen label: "Crop". Its hover reads "Crop: Drag out the crop, then drag its edges and corners. Enter applies, Esc cancels". Applying resizes the canvas through the same step Image ▸ Canvas Size… uses, so every layer keeps its pixels and moves with the crop, and the whole crop is one undo step.

Where to find it

  • Tool strip: Crop has a key of its own, after the Mesh Warp / Liquefy key and before the construction-aid key. See The Interface.
  • Shortcut: C selects it in the Illustration and Animation workspaces. Rebind it as "Tool: Crop" in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.
  • Vector workspace: there is no Crop tool there, and C picks the Scissors. Use Canvas Size in the command palette (Ctrl+K) to change the canvas instead.

Using the crop box

  1. Select Crop. The box appears around the whole canvas at once, with eight handles (the four corners and the middle of each edge) and rule-of-thirds guides. The pointer is a crosshair.
  2. Shape the box. Drag a handle to move that corner or edge (a handle drag keeps the box at least 8 pixels wide and tall), drag inside the box to move it without resizing it, or drag on the canvas outside the box to draw a new box from scratch.
  3. Apply the crop with Enter, or with Apply on the small floating toolbar that sits just below the box or on the tool options bar.
  4. Or cancel with Esc, or Cancel on either toolbar. The box snaps back to the whole canvas and the Crop tool stays selected.

After applying, the box re-arms around the new canvas, so you can crop again straight away.

What applying does

  • The canvas takes the box's size and position. Width and height are rounded to whole pixels and then down to an even number, within 16 to 16384 pixels (8192 on iPad), the same limits as the New Document and Canvas Size dialogs.
  • Every layer, layer mask, text layer, vector object, saved selection channel, and animation frame moves with the crop. Nothing is resampled, and the document's DPI stays the same.
  • The box may reach past the canvas edge. That part becomes new canvas: it is transparent on every layer except the bottom one (normally the paper), whose edge pixels repeat outward to fill it.

Tool options bar

ControlWhat it does
ApplyCrops the canvas to the box (the same as Enter).
CancelResets the box to the whole canvas (the same as Esc).

The floating toolbar under the box carries the same two buttons. Their hovers read "Apply the crop (Enter)" and "Reset the crop box (Esc)".

Keys

KeyWhat it does
CSelects the Crop tool (Illustration and Animation).
EnterApplies the crop.
EscResets the box to the whole canvas.
Ctrl+ZBefore you apply: resets the box, like Esc. After you apply: undoes the crop.

Enter, Esc, and Ctrl+Z act on the crop only once the box has been changed. While it still covers the whole canvas, they do what they do with any other tool. On a Mac, use Cmd+Z.

Undo

A crop is one undo step: Ctrl+Z puts back the previous canvas size and every layer's pixels, and Ctrl+Shift+Z redoes it. While the Crop tool is selected, an undo or redo of a crop, Canvas Size, Image Size, or Rotate Canvas re-arms the box around the canvas it leaves behind.

When an unapplied box is dropped

Only Enter and Apply crop the document. An unapplied box is discarded, never applied, when you:

  • switch to another tool;
  • save (Save or Save As);
  • switch to another document tab, or create, open, or import a document;
  • close the document or quit Limner.

Coming back to a document with the Crop tool still selected shows a fresh box around that document's own canvas. A box drawn on one document never carries over to another, even when the two are different sizes.

Crop to Selection

Image ▸ Crop to Selection crops the canvas to the bounding box of the active selection in one step, with no box to adjust. It works from any tool, applies the same way as the Crop tool, and is one undo step. The row is unavailable until you have a selection. It is also in the command palette.

Canvas Size and Image Size

  • Image ▸ Canvas Size… does the same thing by numbers: set the new width and height and choose an Anchor for where the old canvas sits. Like Crop, it never resamples.
  • Image ▸ Image Size… is different: it scales the artwork itself (or changes only the print resolution), so the pixels are resampled.
  • To crop only an exported image and leave the document as it is, use Crop to in File ▸ Export As… instead. See Crop and aspect presets.

Books

Every page in a Book shares the Book's canvas size, so a single page cannot be cropped. You can select the Crop tool and drag a box on a page, but Apply (or Enter) is refused with "Book page size is fixed": "Every page in a Book uses the Book's shared canvas size. Close the Book to crop a standalone document." The box is removed. Image Size, Canvas Size, and Crop to Selection are unavailable while a Book is open. See Book.

Limits and notes

  • If the document has artboards (made in the Vector workspace) that the new canvas would cut, the crop is refused with "Canvas resize would cut an artboard". Resize or move those artboards first.
  • If the new size would push a layer's live effects past Limner's safe memory limit, the crop is refused with "Canvas resize is too large for live effects".

Eyedropper Tool

How it works

Select the Eyedropper, then click a pixel on the canvas. With Sample all layers on, which is how it ships, Limner samples the composite color at that point, the blended result of every visible layer exactly as it appears on screen, and sets it as your brush color; it does not matter which layer is active, you pick what your eye sees. Turn Sample all layers off and the pick reads only the active layer instead.

The sample is read from the up-to-date, flushed composite, so the color is always correct. If you paint a stroke and immediately pick from it, you get the true painted color, never a stale or partial value. Internally, Limner answers from a cached composite when nothing has changed since the last read, and otherwise reads back just the single clicked pixel rather than the whole canvas, so picking stays instant even on large documents.

Click, or drag, to sample. A click sets the color under the tip, and dragging scrubs the color as you move. What the sample reads is the square set by the Sample control, centered on the pixel under the cursor.

Options

The Eyedropper's tool options bar carries three controls:

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
SamplePoint, 3 × 3, 5 × 5, 11 × 11PointThe square the pick reads, Photoshop's Sample Size presets. Any other radius shows as Custom.
Radius0 to 300 px0The numeric form of Sample: 0 picks a single pixel, 1 averages a 3 × 3 square, 2 a 5 × 5, and 5 an 11 × 11. Other values up to 300 px average a wider square and show as Custom.
Sample all layerson / offonOn, the pick reads the visible composite, the blended result of every visible layer. Off, it reads only the active layer, so you can lift a color out from under something painted over it.

Hold Alt to pick without switching tools

You do not have to leave your brush to grab a color. While almost any paint tool is active, hold Alt and the cursor temporarily becomes the Eyedropper. Press to pick, and you can keep the button down and scrub across the canvas to preview colors as you move; the brush color follows the cursor until you release. The moment you let go of Alt, your previous tool is back exactly as it was, with no extra clicks.

For speed during an Alt scrub, Limner takes one snapshot of the composite when you press, then samples from that snapshot as you move, so dragging across a big canvas stays smooth.

Alt acts as the temporary eyedropper for the painting tools (Brush, Eraser, and similar). It does not do this for the selection tools, the Magic Wand, Transform, Crop, Layer Move, Mesh Warp, Liquefy, the Eyedropper tool itself, Clone Stamp and Heal, or any Vector mode tool, because Alt already has another meaning for those (it subtracts from a selection, and it aims the source for Clone Stamp and Heal).

Picking from the Reference board

When the Eyedropper tool is active and the Reference board is open (in its dock tab or as a pop-out window), you can sample colors straight from your reference images. Click any image on the board and Limner reads the pixel under the cursor into the brush color, without selecting or moving the image, so picking a color never disturbs your board layout. Over a reference image, the cursor shows a crosshair to confirm you are in pick mode.

Cursor

Over the canvas the Eyedropper shows a crosshair, so you keep an exact aim point while you sample. It never hides the cursor the way the Brush and Eraser can. The same crosshair appears over reference images when you pick from the Reference board.

Keyboard shortcut

ActionDefault key
Select the Eyedropper toolI
Temporary eyedropper (while a paint tool is active)Hold Alt

The tool shortcut is rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts. The Alt hold behavior is a fixed modifier, not a separate binding.

Tool shortcuts apply in Illustration mode. In Vector mode the bare letter keys select the vector tools instead.

New in 0.9.0

  • Radius and Sample all layers. A sampling Radius from 0 to 300 px averages the colour under the tip, and Sample all layers reads the composite instead of the active layer.
  • On iPad, hold a finger. Holding one finger on the artwork opens the colour loupe; see Limner on iPad.

See also

  • Color: the brush color, color history, and saved palettes that the Eyedropper feeds into.
  • Reference panel: importing and arranging reference images you can sample from.
  • Brush Tool: the tool you most often pair with Alt-pick while painting.

Working with your artwork

Layers

The Layers panel is one of the dockable panels (Window menu). For the full list of layer commands see the Layer menu. Layer masks and selections work hand in hand, so you may also want Selections. Editable line and shape layers are covered in Vector mode.

The stack, top to bottom

Layers paint on top of one another from the bottom up: the bottom layer is the background, and every layer above composites over what is beneath it. In the panel the order is reversed for reading: the top row is the topmost layer, the bottom row is the background.

Exactly one layer is active at a time. The active layer is the target of new brush strokes, fills, filters, and most single-layer commands. The active row is drawn as a solid accent block with dark text; any other layers that are part of a multi-selection get a faint accent wash.

Layer types

A layer is exactly one kind, decided by what data is attached to it.

TypeWhat it isHow it is made
Raster layerOrdinary pixels: the everyday painting surface.Add Layer (or it is auto-added, see below)
Paper / background layerThe bottom layer, named Paper. It is the document background and can be a solid colour or transparent.Created with the document
Text layerPixels generated from re-editable text. Stays editable until you rasterize it.Text tool
Vector layerBrush strokes that stay editable lines: you can move, reshape, re-width, and erase them to intersections. Carries a curve badge in the panel. Named Vector N.Layer ▸ New ▸ New Editable Stroke Layer (Limner Plus), or Vector Layer in the Layers panel's Add menu
Graphic layerVector-mode objects: retained Bezier paths. Named Graphic N. Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer turns it into a raster layer.Vector mode, Object Layers panel
Fill layerLive Solid Color or Gradient content generated from editable settings.Layer ▸ New ▸ New Fill Layer
Adjustment layerA live Brightness / Contrast, Levels, Curves, Color Balance, Hue / Saturation, Exposure, Black & White, Vibrance, Color Lookup, Photo Filter, Selective Color, Channel Mixer, Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, Sharpen, Median, Invert, Posterize, Threshold, or Gradient Map correction applied to the composite below.Layer ▸ New ▸ New Adjustment Layer
Clone layerA live copy of another raster layer at a whole-pixel offset: paint on the source and the clone follows.Layer ▸ New ▸ New Clone Layer

Fill, adjustment, clone and Colorize color layers are generated rather than painted: their pixels come from settings, from the layers below, or from another layer, so the brush does not paint on them. A fill layer (a solid color, a gradient, or a pattern brought in from a PSD) is named Fill N, and an adjustment layer, which transforms everything below it and owns no pixels, is named Adjustment N. Fill and adjustment layers also come from the arrow menu beside the panel's Add button. See Fill and adjustment layers and the Colorize Tool.

About the Paper layer

The bottom layer (index 0) is special and is named Paper rather than "Layer 1". It cannot be moved, grouped, or dragged into a folder, and nothing can be placed below it. The eraser leaves it alone.

If you start a stroke while the Paper layer is active, Limner automatically inserts a fresh transparent layer above it and paints there instead, so your paint always lands somewhere it can be erased. The console notes this with "auto-added a layer above the paper".

Blend modes

The blend mode controls how a layer's pixels combine with everything beneath it. Limner ships 30 blend modes. Blending runs in gamma (sRGB) space, so results match Clip Studio Paint, Photoshop, and Procreate.

The default blend mode for a new layer is Normal.

#Label
1Normal
2Multiply
3Screen
4Overlay
5Darken
6Lighten
7Color Dodge
8Color Burn
9Linear Dodge (Add)
10Linear Burn
11Hard Light
12Soft Light
13Difference
14Exclusion
15Hue
16Saturation
17Color
18Luminosity
19Subtract
20Divide
21Vivid Light
22Linear Light
23Pin Light
24Hard Mix
25Darker Color
26Lighter Color
27Dissolve
28Grain Merge
29Grain Extract
30Hard Mix (Soft)

Dissolve turns the layer's coverage into a per-pixel coin flip, so a half-opacity layer renders as a speckle of solid pixels rather than a translucent wash; the pattern holds still while you pan and zoom, and a Photoshop file's Dissolve layers import as themselves. Grain Merge, Grain Extract and Hard Mix (Soft) are the GIMP and Krita modes of the same names. Folders offer Pass Through as well, which lets their members blend with the layers below as if the folder were not there.

Setting the blend mode

  • Panel combo box: the blend-mode dropdown in the top strip of the Layers panel sets the active layer's mode.
  • Cycle: press Shift+B to step to the next mode (the console prints "blend mode: <name>"). It is moved off plain B so the brush keeps B. Shortcuts are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.
  • Folders have their own blend-mode combo (see Groups, below).

Opacity

Opacity is a layer-wide multiplier applied on top of each pixel's own transparency.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Opacity slider0.0 to 1.0 (shown as 0% to 100%)1.0 (100%)Fades the whole layer, from solid down to fully transparent.

The Opacity slider sits in the top strip of the panel and reads "Opacity NNN%". You can also nudge it with the keyboard: = raises opacity and - lowers it (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts).

Visibility

Each layer has an eye toggle on the far left of its row that shows or hides it without deleting anything. Hidden layers do not composite and are skipped by Merge Visible.

  • Click any row's eye to toggle that layer.
  • Press H to toggle the active layer's visibility.

A folder also has its own eye in the header. A layer is only visible on the canvas if both its own eye and its folder's eye are on.

Locks and the reference flag

The four toggles (lock, transparency lock, clip, reference) sit in the always-visible active-layer strip at the top of the panel, wrapping to fit narrow docks. On layer rows, any engaged state appears as a quiet accent badge; click the layer to make it active, then use the strip. Full lock, transparency lock, clip, and reference state are all saved with the document.

ControlPanel glyphWhat it does
Lock layerpadlock (closed when on, open when off)Blocks all edits to the layer: painting, fill, shapes, filters, transform, warp, move, reorder, regroup, and merging into or with it all become no-ops. You can still toggle visibility, select, rename, change blend or opacity, and delete it.
Lock transparencycheckerboardRestricts painting to pixels the layer already has: incoming brush coverage is multiplied by the existing alpha, so you can recolor shapes without spilling past their edges. Filters keep every pixel's alpha too: a blur recolors inside the shape and leaves its edges as they were, and Color to Alpha is refused ("Transparency is locked").
Clip to layer belowbend-down arrowMakes the layer visible only where the layer directly below it shows (a clipping mask), non-destructively: where that layer has pixels and its layer mask reveals them. A folder as the base clips through its folder mask the same way. Not available on the Paper layer.
Reference layercrosshairMarks this layer as the one the Fill bucket and Magic Wand read for their colour match and boundary (the paint still lands on the active layer). Only one reference layer can be set at a time, so turning one on clears any other.

Tooltips you will see on the active row:

  • Lock layer: "Lock layer: blocks painting, transforms, moving, and merging"
  • Lock transparency: "Lock transparency: paint only where the layer already has pixels"
  • Clip: "Clip to the layer below (mask to its shape)"
  • Reference: "Reference layer: Fill and Magic Wand read this layer's lines"

Layer masks

A layer mask is a non-destructive grayscale stencil attached to a layer. Where the mask is white the layer shows; where it is black the layer is hidden; gray is partial. A fresh mask is "reveal all" (everything visible) until you paint on it.

When a mask is the active edit target, your brush and eraser paint on the mask instead of the pixels: paint black to hide, white to show (the eraser hides). A color paints its lightness, the same while you draw and after: pure red hides about 70% and pure green about 40%. The panel shows the mask as a small grayscale thumbnail next to the layer thumbnail.

With the mask as the edit target, Edit ▸ Cut and Copy act on the mask: they copy the mask under the selection as a grayscale image (white where it shows the layer, black where it hides it), and Cut then hides that area on the mask in one undo step, leaving the layer's pixels untouched. Paste puts that image on a layer's pixels, not into a mask.

All mask commands live in the Layer menu's Mask submenu (see Menus). They no-op if the layer is locked.

CommandWhat it does
Add Layer MaskAttaches a reveal-all mask and makes it the edit target. Console: "layer mask: added (paint black to hide, white to show; eraser hides)".
Mask Outside SelectionBuilds a mask from the active selection that keeps the selected region visible and hides everything else. Needs a selection.
Mask SelectionBuilds a mask that hides the selected region. Needs a selection.
Vector Mask from SelectionTraces the selection's boundary into an editable vector mask; the selected region stays visible, including an island inside a hole (a dot inside a ring). Needs a selection.
Mask to SelectionLoads the active layer's mask as the selection, exactly as it is: the selection tools' Feather is not applied. Hold Shift to add it, Alt to subtract it. Needs a mask. Also on the action bar's mask menu.
Path to SelectionLoads the vector mask's path as the selection, without the mask's feather or density and without the selection tools' Feather. Needs a vector mask.
Apply Layer MaskBakes the mask permanently into the pixels (hidden areas become transparent) and removes the mask. One undo restores both. Console: "layer mask: applied to the layer's pixels".
Enable/Disable Layer MaskToggles the mask's effect on or off while keeping its pixels. One undo step. Console: "layer mask: enabled" / "disabled".
Delete Layer MaskRemoves the mask so its hidden pixels return. One undo step. Console: "layer mask: deleted".

The mask thumbnail in the panel

Clicking the mask thumbnail:

  • On the active layer, switches between editing the mask and editing the pixels.
  • On another layer, makes that layer active and targets its mask.

An accent ring around the thumbnail means the mask is the live edit target. A dimmed (struck-through) thumbnail means the mask is disabled. Tooltips:

  • Disabled: "Layer mask (disabled; Layer > Mask > Enable/Disable Layer Mask)"
  • Targeted: "Editing the MASK: paint black to hide, white to show; click to edit pixels again"
  • Default: "Layer mask: click to paint on the mask instead of the pixels"

Folder masks

A folder can carry a raster mask of its own, applied once to everything inside it, exactly as Photoshop applies a group mask. Right-click the folder header and choose Add Folder Mask to make one from the current selection; the same menu switches it off and on or deletes it. A folder mask survives undo, canvas resizing and rotation, applies to a Pass Through folder too (where it hides the folder, the layers below show as if the folder's members were not there), travels to and from PSD, and is applied to the folder's contents in OpenRaster and SVG exports. See Layer folders.

Groups (folders)

A folder collects a run of layers so you can move, hide, and blend them as a unit. Folders can nest inside other folders up to 8 levels deep, and a folder's members always stay together in the stack. A folder can also sit empty without being removed. See Layer folders for the full guide.

A folder composites its members into their own buffer first, then blends that result as one with the folder's own blend mode and opacity, so a folder behaves like a single layer relative to the rest of the stack. A Pass Through folder is the exception: its members blend straight into the layers below the folder, as if the folder were not there. When a Pass Through folder has a mask or is below 100% opacity, the mask and the opacity fade that effect, as in Photoshop, instead of turning it into an ordinary isolated folder.

New-folder defaults:

PropertyRangeDefault
NametextGroup N (next number)
Blend modePass Through plus all 30 layer modesNormal
Opacity0.0 to 1.01.0 (100%)
Visibleon / offon

Folder header controls

ControlWhat it does
CaretExpand or collapse the folder ("Expand / collapse folder").
EyeToggle folder visibility ("Toggle folder visibility").
Folder nameDouble-click to rename.
Blend mode comboFolder blend mode. Shown only when the folder holds the active layer.
Opacity sliderFolder opacity, 0.0 to 1.0, "Opacity NNN%". Shown only when the folder holds the active layer.

A faint accent wash on the header marks the folder that holds the active layer.

Making and dissolving folders

  • Group: choose Folder from selected layers on the arrow menu beside the Add button ("Group the checked layers into a folder"), or press Ctrl+G. An empty folder comes from Empty folder on the same arrow menu, New empty folder in the panel options menu, or Layer ▸ New ▸ New Folder (see Layer folders). Selected layers that are not already adjacent are first gathered together. The Paper layer is never included.
  • Ungroup: choose Dissolve active folder from the panel options menu at the right end of the action bar. It is only enabled when the active layer is in a folder. The layers stay in place, now ungrouped.

Ctrl+G groups the checked layers into a folder and Ctrl+Shift+G dissolves the active layer's folder. The same two chords group and ungroup objects in Vector mode, so the muscle memory carries across.

Layer effects

Layer effects are drop shadow, outer glow, inner shadow, color overlay, stroke, inner glow, gradient overlay and bevel. Limner keeps them live: each effect is rendered into its own layer beside the one that wears it (the drop shadows and the outer glow below it, the rest above it, in the same folder; a stroke or bevel goes above any layers clipped to it, so they keep it as their base), and the whole set stays editable.

Adding effects. Choose Layer ▸ Layer Effects… (also Layer Effects in the command palette, and Layer Effects… in a layer's right-click menu in the Layers panel) to open the Layer Effects window on that layer. A layer without effects opens on an empty list. Choose Add Effect and pick a kind: it starts at Photoshop's default settings and shows on the canvas at once, with its section open. A drop shadow, for example, starts black, Multiply, 75% opacity, 5 px away and 5 px soft, cast down and to the right; a stroke starts as a 3 px black outline outside the edge. A layer carries up to ten of each kind, but only one outer glow and one bevel. Remove Effect, under each effect's settings, takes that effect off (and only its own layer, so a mask you gave another effect's layer stays); remove every effect and the layer is a plain layer again, without an fx button. The window previews every change live and commits the whole session, added and removed effects included, with Apply (one undo step), or reverts it exactly with Cancel or Escape.

Editing effects. A layer that carries effects shows an italic fx button on its row in the Layers panel; click it, or choose Layer ▸ Layer Effects… with the layer active, to reopen the window. Paint on the layer and its effects follow.

Where effects are not available. The window is unavailable in Animation mode. A document with animation frames keeps editing the effects its layers already wear, but Add Effect and Remove Effect are grayed out there. The Vector workspace likewise edits the effects a layer arrives with (from its fx button) but starts none, and its Layer menu has no Layer Effects row. Unlock a locked layer first. An adjustment layer, the bottom (paper) layer, a Vector workspace layer and a layer that another layer's effects draw cannot take effects; the grayed-out row says why.

From Photoshop. Effects arrive with Photoshop documents and stay live. Effects Limner cannot draw (satin, the emboss styles, a pattern overlay, a gradient or pattern stroke) are named in the import notice, and the layer keeps its pixels; a pattern overlay cannot be added in Limner either. See File Formats for how effects travel back to PSD.

Reordering and grouping by drag

Drag any non-Paper layer row to move it. The drop position within the target row decides what happens:

Drop positionResult
Top third of a rowPlace the dragged layer above that row.
Bottom third of a rowPlace the dragged layer below that row.
Middle third of a rowGroup with that layer (make or join a folder), like dropping one layer onto another.
Onto a folder headerMove the dragged layer into that folder.
Empty space below the last rowPull the dragged layer out of its folder.

The Paper layer cannot be moved, and nothing can be dropped below it. A locked layer will not move. Limner draws an insertion line for a reorder and a whole-row outline when a drop would group.

Layer commands

These are the per-layer operations. Most are on the action bar at the bottom of the panel and also in the Layer menu. Default shortcuts are listed where they exist and are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

CommandShortcutWhat it does
Add LayerNInserts a fresh transparent layer above the active one and makes it active. Named "Layer N".
Add Layer BelownoneInserts a fresh transparent layer directly below the active one in the same folder scope. Also available from the panel's Add menu, Ctrl+click Add, the command palette, and shortcut settings.
New Fill LayernoneAdds an editable Solid Color or Gradient layer.
New Adjustment LayernoneAdds a live adjustment that affects the composite below it.
New Clone LayernoneAdds a live copy of the active raster layer above it. See Clone layers.
Duplicate LayerCtrl+JMakes a fully independent copy of the active layer directly above it, named "<name> copy". Pixels, mask, and any text or vector data are deep-copied, and a smart object's copy is a smart object too (Replace Contents and Export Original work on it).
New Editable Stroke LayernoneAdds an editable-stroke vector layer above the active one, named "Vector N". A Limner Plus feature; the Layers panel's Add menu lists the same command as Vector layer.
Delete LayerShift+DeleteRemoves the active layer. Refuses to delete the last remaining layer. Any in-progress stroke or transform is settled first.
Merge DownnoneBakes the active layer into the layer directly below it, keeping the lower layer's blend mode and opacity, then removes the active layer. Grayed out, with the reason on hover, on the bottom layer ("The bottom layer has nothing below it") or when either layer is locked, in the Layer menu, the Layers panel and the command palette alike.
Merge VisiblenoneFlattens every visible layer into the bottom-most visible one and removes the others; hidden layers are untouched. Needs at least two visible layers; no-op if any visible layer is locked. It is refused on a multi-frame animation, and refused when the visible layers sit in different folders (flatten within one folder, or ungroup them first).
Rasterize TextnoneFlattens the active text layer to plain pixels (no longer editable).
Rasterize Editable Stroke LayernoneBakes the active vector layer to plain pixels; its lines stop being editable objects. Enabled only on a vector layer.
Rasterize LayernoneConverts a fill, adjustment, clone, Colorize color or graphic layer to ordinary pixels, preserving its mask, opacity, clipping, name, and stack position. See Rasterize Layer.

Merging a vector layer rasterizes it (its stroke data is dropped, undoably), matching Clip Studio Paint.

Selecting layers

ActionHow
Select a layerClick its row, its thumbnail, or its name.
Add or remove from the multi-selectionCtrl+click the row, or use the per-row checkbox ("Select layer (checked layers move / transform together)").
Select a rangeShift+click another row.
RenameDouble-click the layer name.

The multi-selection lets Move, Transform, and merge act on every checked layer at once. The active layer is always part of the selection, and the last remaining selected layer cannot be unchecked.

Panel anatomy

The Layers panel has three regions, top to bottom.

  1. Top strip: an "Active" label with the active layer's name in bold, the blend-mode combo (all 30 modes), and the Opacity slider (0.0 to 1.0).
  2. Layer stack: a scrollable list, top layer first, with folder headers and indented members. A folder's members are joined by a vertical line in the indent gutter.
  3. Action bar: wrapping icon buttons. In order: the split Add button (its arrow menu holds Raster layer, Raster layer below, Vector layer, Duplicate layer, Solid colour fill, Gradient fill, an Adjustment layer submenu, Folder from selected layers, and Empty folder), the mask button, the Merge button, Delete, and the panel options menu (New empty folder, Dissolve active folder, Merge all visible layers, and the row size: Compact, Comfortable, or Large, remembered between sessions). Click Merge for Merge Down; Merge Visible is in the panel options menu, the Layer menu, and the command palette. Buttons disable when they do not apply (for example Delete is off with only one layer and Merge down is off on the bottom layer). With a folder selected, Delete targets the folder and its contents; see Layer folders.

Each layer row, left to right: the colour-label bar (if one is set, chosen from eight colours in the row menu and saved with the file), the eye toggle, the selection checkbox, the thumbnail (26 px at the default Comfortable row size, over a checkerboard so transparency reads), the mask thumbnail (if a mask exists), and the name. Any engaged state trails the name as quiet marks: an fx button for live effects, then lock, transparency lock, clip, reference, a curve badge on a vector layer, and a bucket badge on a fill layer. Right-click a layer or folder (long-press on touch) for the full per-layer menu: rename, duplicate, delete, merge, masks, colour label, and more.

New in 0.9.0

  • Four more blend modes. Dissolve, Grain Merge, Grain Extract and Hard Mix (Soft) bring the count to 30, on layers and folders alike.
  • Folder masks. A folder can carry a raster mask of its own, made from the selection through the folder's context menu.
  • The Merge button is Merge Down. Merge Visible moved to the Layer menu, so a held click can no longer flatten the document by accident.
  • Undo covers more. Disabling a layer mask is an undo step, canvas resize and crop keep every layer's locks, alpha lock and clip flag, and hiding or reordering a layer in the middle of a transform no longer loses the content.
  • Exact pixels. The transparency lock holds alpha exactly, Color Dodge and Color Burn are right at the white and black extremes, grey and feathered masks display the way they bake, and a magnified transparent edge no longer shows a dark fringe.
  • Better thumbnails. Layer thumbnails keep one-pixel marks, measure a text outline correctly, and average in linear light.
  • Layer effects you can add. Layer ▸ Layer Effects… adds a drop shadow, outer glow, inner shadow, color overlay, stroke, inner glow, gradient overlay or bevel, live on the canvas. See Layer effects.
  • Clone layers. A live copy of a raster layer at an offset follows every stroke on its source. See Clone layers.

Layer folders

This page covers creating, nesting, filling, emptying, and deleting folders. For what a folder does to compositing (its blend mode, opacity, and visibility applied to the group as one unit), see Layers.

Creating folders

There are several ways to make a folder, and each is a single undo step.

  • The New Folder button. Choose Empty folder from the arrow menu beside the Add button, New empty folder from the panel options menu at the right end of the action bar, or Layer ▸ New ▸ New Folder ("An empty folder at the top of the stack, to drag layers into"). You get an empty folder named Group N at the top of the panel, ready to drag layers into.
  • Folder from selected layers. Check the layers you want (the per-row checkboxes), then open the arrow menu beside the Add button and choose Folder from selected layers. Checked layers that are not adjacent are gathered together first, and the Paper layer is never included.
  • Drop one layer onto another. Drag a layer and release it on the middle of another layer's row: the pair becomes a new folder, or the dragged layer joins the target's existing folder.

Ctrl+G puts the checked layers in a new folder and Ctrl+Shift+G dissolves the active layer's folder. In Vector mode the same two chords group and ungroup objects instead.

Nesting by drag

Nesting is entirely drag and drop. Pick up a layer row by its grip, or a whole folder by its header, and the drop location decides what happens:

  • Onto a folder header: a dragged layer moves into that folder; a dragged folder becomes that folder's child, bringing everything inside it along.
  • Onto a row inside a folder: dropping at the top or bottom edge of a member row places the dragged item beside that member, inside the same folder. Use this to land in an exact spot instead of at the folder's mouth.
  • Below the list: dropping in the empty space under the last row pulls the dragged layer or folder out to the top level (see Moving layers out, below).

What the drop indicators mean

While you hover, the panel shows exactly what a release will do:

IndicatorWhat a release does
An insertion line with a dot at its start, inset to the hovered row's indentReorder: the dragged item lands as a sibling in that gap, at that row's nesting level (the inset shows you which level).
A highlight wash over the whole row (an accent fill plus outline)Drop inside: a layer joins that folder, a folder becomes its child. On a plain layer row's middle it means group with that layer.
A dimmed gray line or outlineRefused: the drop would nest a folder inside itself or pass the depth limit. Releasing flashes a short notice instead of silently doing nothing.

The depth limit

Folders nest up to 8 levels deep. A drag that would push past the cap shows the dimmed indicator, and releasing it anyway flashes a notice over the panel that fades after a couple of seconds:

Notice
That would nest the folder too deep.

Dropping a folder into itself or into one of its own descendants is refused the same way, with "You cannot nest a folder inside itself." In practice two or three levels keep a stack readable; the cap exists to keep files sane.

Empty folders persist

A folder does not dissolve itself when its last member leaves. Drag the last layer out and the folder stays, keeping its name, color label, blend settings, and place in the hierarchy.

  • Where it appears: an empty folder renders at the top of its scope: the top of the panel if it is top level, or the top of its parent folder's contents if nested.
  • Refilling it: drag any layer (or another folder) onto its header; the highlight wash confirms the drop will land inside.
  • It is a full folder: rename it (double-click the name), set its color, collapse it, drag it elsewhere, or nest other folders into it while it is still empty.
  • It is saved: empty folders persist in the file and come back on load, and they appear in the Animation mode timeline so the two views stay in step.

A folder now only goes away when you say so: dissolve it (ungroup, which keeps the layers), delete it with its contents, or undo its creation.

Selecting and deleting a whole folder

Click a folder's name, or any empty stretch of its header, to select the folder itself. The header lights up with a stronger accent wash and a border so it is clearly the target; clicking any layer clears the folder selection again.

  • Trash button: with a folder selected, the trash button in the action bar reads "Delete the selected folder and its contents" and removes the folder, every layer inside it, and all of its sub-folders.
  • Right-click menu: right-click the folder name (long-press on touch) and choose Delete folder and contents.
  • One undo step: either way, a single undo brings back the folder, its sub-folders, and every layer's pixels.

To remove only the folder shell and keep its layers, use Dissolve active folder in the panel options menu (the list button at the right end of the action bar). It is enabled while the active layer sits in a folder.

Moving layers out

  • Remove from folder (one level up): right-click a layer row and choose Remove from folder. The layer pops out exactly one level: nested in Folder A ▸ Folder B, it lands in Folder A; in a top-level folder, it becomes ungrouped.
  • Drag below the list (fully out): drop the layer in the empty space below the last row to leave every folder in one motion. The same drop pulls a whole nested folder to the top level. Anything already at the top level stays exactly where it is.
  • Reorder out: dropping at the edge of any row outside the folder also works, since a dropped layer always adopts the folder of the row it lands beside.

Add below or leave the folder scope. Layer ▸ New ▸ Add Layer Below inserts a raster layer directly beneath the active layer in its current folder scope. You can also choose Raster layer below from the panel's Add menu, Ctrl+click Add, use the command palette, or bind a shortcut. Clicking the empty panel area under the list exits the current folder scope without moving a layer, so the next ordinary Add Layer lands at the top level.

Merge without leaving the folder. Merge Down and Merge Visible accept eligible layers inside folders. Merge Visible needs every visible layer to sit in the same folder scope: a set that spans folders is refused rather than mis-composited, and it is unavailable on a multi-frame animation. The merge bakes each layer's own opacity while applying the folder's blend mode and opacity exactly once. Click the action bar's Merge button for Merge Down. Merge Visible is in the panel options menu, the Layer menu, and the command palette.

Folder appearance

  • The whole header is a drag grip. Press and move on the folder glyph, the name, or the empty stretch of the header to start dragging the folder; a plain click still selects it and a double-click still renames.
  • Color swatch: the small chip on the header sets a color label in one click: Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, Pink, or Gray. The label draws a slim bar along the row's left edge (the same cue layer rows use) and stays visible while the folder is collapsed. Pick the current color again to clear it; the same picker is on the right-click menu.
  • Per-level indentation: each nesting level steps its rows in one notch, and a folder's members are joined by a connector line in the indent gutter, so depth reads at a glance.
  • Blend and opacity: the folder's blend-mode combo and Folder Opacity slider appear under the header while the folder holds the active layer.
  • Mask glyph: a masked folder wears a half-circle beside its name, dimmed while the mask is disabled, so the gate is visible even when the folder is collapsed.
  • The timeline matches: in Animation mode, the timeline's layer column indents by the same folder depth as the panel, and empty folders appear there too, so the two views never disagree about structure.

Folder masks

A folder can carry a raster mask of its own, applied once to everything inside it, exactly as Photoshop applies a group mask. Right-click the folder header in the Layers panel and choose Add Folder Mask to make one from the current selection; once it has one the same menu offers Enable Folder Mask / Disable Folder Mask and Delete Folder Mask.

  • The mask applies to the folder's composite, so two overlapping members are masked once, not twice.
  • It applies to a Pass Through folder as well (folders imported from Photoshop default to Pass Through): where the mask hides the folder, the layers below show as if the folder's members were not there, and where it shows, the members' blend modes and adjustments still act on the layers below.
  • It survives undo, Image ▸ Canvas Size and Image ▸ Rotate Canvas, saves in the document, travels to and from PSD as a group mask, and is applied to the folder's contents in OpenRaster and SVG exports.
  • Deleting the folder and undoing brings the mask back with it.

Folders and older Limner versions

Every save writes the current document format, which needs Limner 0.9.0 or later to open, whether or not the document uses nested or empty folders. To share a working file with someone on an older Limner, send an exported image instead. See File formats.

  • Layers - the Layers panel, blend modes, opacity, masks, and how a folder composites as a single unit.
  • File formats - what each format version saves and which Limner builds can open it.

Fill and adjustment layers

You create both from the Layer menu (Layer ▸ New ▸ New Fill Layer for a fill, Layer ▸ New ▸ New Adjustment Layer for an adjustment) or from the arrow menu beside the Layers panel's Add button, which lists Solid colour fill, Gradient fill and the same Adjustment layer submenu. Each one lands directly above the active layer and becomes active itself, as one undo step.

What a non-destructive layer is

Most of Limner writes pixels. A brush stroke, a bucket fill, or Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Levels all change the active layer's pixels for good: undo can step back, but once you have moved on, the old pixels are gone. That is destructive editing, and it is the right default for painting.

A fill or adjustment layer works differently. It stores a recipe, not a result:

  • A fill layer generates its own content from its recipe (one color, or a gradient with its stops and shape). It owns real pixels, but they are regenerated from the recipe whenever you edit it, so the recipe is the thing you actually own.
  • An adjustment layer owns no pixels at all. It reads the picture composited below it, pushes it through its correction, and hands the result upward. Nothing below it is modified.

The practical payoff is the same for both: the picture below stays intact. Hide the layer and the change is gone. Drag it somewhere else in the stack and it affects a different set of layers. Delete it and your painting is exactly as it was. You can keep retuning a Curves adjustment a hundred times and the linework under it never degrades, because it was never rewritten.

Note
These layers are not the same as the one-shot dialogs in Image ▸ Adjustments. Those commit their result into the active layer's pixels and are done. See Filters and Adjustments for when a one-shot filter is the better tool.

Solid Color fill layers

Layer ▸ New ▸ New Fill Layer ▸ Solid Color adds a layer flooded with one color. It picks up the current paint color at the moment you create it, and it is named Fill 1, Fill 2, and so on.

Solid fills are the workhorse of flatting and grading: drop one over your art for an overall color cast, clip it to the layer below to recolor just that element, or mask it to shape the fill by hand. See Color for picking the paint color it starts from.

To edit it, select the layer. The active-layer strip at the top of the Layers panel grows a Fill row with a color swatch. Click the swatch, pick a new color, and the canvas updates as you pick.

Note
The swatch has no alpha, on purpose. The fill stays fully opaque and the layer's own Opacity slider (right above the swatch) handles fade. This is how Photoshop's Solid Color fill layer behaves, and it keeps one obvious control for "how strong is this", instead of two that multiply together confusingly.

In every other respect a fill layer is an ordinary layer. It takes a blend mode, an opacity, a mask, and a color label; you can reorder it, hide it, clip it, rename it, and drag it into a folder exactly like a raster layer.

Gradient fill layers

Layer ▸ New ▸ New Fill Layer ▸ Gradient adds a layer filled with an editable gradient. It starts as a horizontal linear ramp spanning the canvas, running from the current paint color to the same color at zero opacity.

Unlike the Gradient tool, whose default ramp follows the active paint color, a gradient fill layer's stops hold fixed colors. Once created, it is self-contained: changing your paint color later will not move it. Everything about the ramp is re-editable from the Layers panel instead.

Editing the stops

Select the gradient fill layer and the active-layer strip shows the stop bar: the ramp with one marker per stop. It behaves like the stop bar in the Gradient editor.

  • Add a stop: click an empty spot on the bar. The new stop samples the ramp's color at that position, so it is invisible until you recolor it.
  • Select a stop: click its marker. Its controls appear below the bar.
  • Move a stop: drag its marker along the bar. That is how you set a stop's position; a stop is clamped between its neighbors so the order holds.
  • Recolor a stop: click the color swatch below the bar.
  • Fade a stop: drag the Alpha slider, from 0% to 100%.
  • Delete a stop: select it and click the trash button. It is disabled when only two stops remain, because a gradient always keeps at least two.

Shape, Dither, and Reverse

Below the stop controls sit the same render options the Gradient tool uses:

ControlRangeWhat it does
ShapeLinear, Radial, Reflected, Conical, DiamondHow the ramp is mapped between the layer's two endpoints. See Gradient tool for what each shape looks like.
Ditheron / offAdds fine noise so a long, soft ramp does not show 8-bit banding. On by default for a new gradient fill layer.
Reverseon / offMirrors the ramp so the end color appears at the start.

The Direction buttons

A gradient fill layer's endpoints live in canvas coordinates, and the Direction row re-aims them across the whole canvas in one click: Horizontal (left to right), Vertical (top to bottom), or Diagonal (corner to corner). Hover a button to see which is which.

These three presets are the only way to change the angle at the moment. There are no draggable endpoint handles on the canvas yet, so an arbitrary angle is not reachable from a gradient fill layer. If you need one, drag it with the Gradient tool on a normal raster layer instead.

Pattern fill layers

A pattern fill arrives from a Photoshop document rather than being created in Limner: a PSD Pattern Fill layer imports live and tiles exactly as Photoshop tiles it. With one active, the strip's editor names the tile and its size and offers a Scale slider, an X and Y Offset, and Reset.

Adjustment layers

Layer ▸ New ▸ New Adjustment Layer opens a submenu of twenty corrections. Pick one and it is added above the active layer, named Adjustment 1, Adjustment 2, and so on.

An adjustment layer carries no pixels. It transforms the composite below it live on the GPU, so it costs almost nothing to leave one sitting on top of a painting for the whole job, and you can restack, retune, or throw it away at any point.

The twenty kinds

The editable kinds first, then the four one-shot transforms (Invert, Posterize, Threshold, Gradient Map), which the menu sets apart with a rule. The controls are the same widgets the matching filter dialog uses, so see Filters and Adjustments for what each one's sliders and graphs do.

KindWhat it does
Brightness / ContrastLifts or drops overall brightness and contrast. Starts at identity (no change).
LevelsRemaps input and output levels, per channel. Starts at identity.
CurvesA per-channel tone curve you shape by dragging control points. Starts at identity.
Color BalanceShifts color separately in the shadows, midtones, and highlights. Starts at identity.
Hue / SaturationRotates the hue wheel, scales saturation, and blends toward black or white, live. Starts at identity.
InvertInverts the colors below it. Has no settings, so it takes effect the moment you add it.
PosterizeCrushes the picture to a limited number of tone steps per channel.
ThresholdCuts everything to pure black or pure white at a luminance cutoff, starting at 0.5. This is the live twin of the Threshold filter.
Gradient MapRemaps the picture's luminance onto a gradient ramp, dark to light.
ExposureExposure, offset and gamma, the way a camera raw exposure slider works.
Black & WhiteA monochrome conversion with per-hue weights, so a red and a green of the same brightness can land on different greys.
VibranceBoosts the muted colours more than the already saturated ones, with a separate Saturation amount.
Color LookupApplies a colour lookup table (a .cube LUT) as a grade.
Photo FilterTints through a colour filter at a chosen density, warming or cooling the picture.
Selective ColorAdjusts the cyan, magenta, yellow and black balance inside each colour range (reds, yellows, greens, cyans, blues, magentas, whites, neutrals, blacks).
Channel MixerRebuilds each output channel from a mix of the input channels, with a monochrome option.
Gaussian BlurA live blur of everything beneath the layer, at a radius you can change any time; the filter of the same name bakes into pixels instead.
Motion BlurA live directional smear of everything beneath the layer, with Angle and Distance up to 128 px; the filter of the same name bakes into pixels instead.
SharpenA live unsharp mask under the layer, with Amount, Radius, Lightness only and Threshold; the filter of the same name bakes into pixels instead.
MedianA live noise-reducing median pass under the layer at radius 1 or 2; the filter of the same name bakes into pixels instead.
Note
Four of the entries are live filters rather than tonal corrections: Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, Sharpen and Median read the pixels around each point of the composite below them, with the same controls and results as the matching Filter menu entries (the live Median keeps the 50th percentile and stops at radius 2; the live Motion Blur stops at 128 pixels). One such layer previews live at a time, the lowest one outside any folder; the others take effect when the layer is rasterized.

The floating editor

Creating an adjustment layer opens its editor right away, in a movable window titled for the kind, for example Levels (adjustment layer). This is deliberate: Levels, Curves, Brightness / Contrast, and Color Balance all start at identity, so without the editor a new layer would look like nothing had happened.

The editor is a floating window rather than part of the Layers panel, so the layer list keeps its full height and stays clickable while you work. It follows your selection: click a different adjustment layer and the editor retargets to it; click an ordinary layer and it quietly steps aside. Close it whenever you like and reopen it with the Edit button that sits next to the kind's name in the active-layer strip.

The canvas updates live as you drag. A whole slider drag is one undo step, not one per frame, so a single Ctrl+Z takes you back to where the value was before you grabbed the slider. Painting below an adjustment updates through it every frame too, so you can ink underneath a Threshold layer and watch the result as you go.

Clone layers

Choose Layer ▸ New ▸ New Clone Layer (also in a raster layer's right-click menu) to add a live copy of the active raster layer directly above it. The clone shows the source's pixels and follows every edit to the source, stroke by stroke; paint on the source, not on the clone. Select the clone to set its Offset in the Layers panel (whole pixels, X and Y), and give it its own opacity, blend mode, clipping and mask, so one drawing can appear twice, shifted, tinted or masked differently. A clone cannot be cloned again; make another clone of the source instead. Clone layers are an Illustration feature: a document with a frame timeline cannot take one, and switching a document with clone layers to Animation asks you to break the links first.

Break Link (in the Layer menu, the row's right-click menu and the panel strip, or Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer) stops the clone following its source and keeps the pixels it shows as an ordinary raster layer. Deleting the source breaks every clone of it the same way, and undo restores source and links together. A file saved with a clone layer in it needs this version of Limner or newer (an older build refuses it, as with every newer file); break the link before sharing such a file with an older build. Exports keep the pixels, not the link.

Scope and masking

By default an adjustment layer affects everything below it in the stack, and a fill layer covers everything below it. Three controls narrow that down, and where you put the layer narrows it further.

Opacity, clipping, and masks

ControlWhat it does on a fill or adjustment layer
OpacityFades the effect. At 40% a Curves adjustment applies at 40% strength; a fill layer covers at 40%. The fade works the way it does for any layer, and in Photoshop: an Invert at 50% over black reads middle gray (128), and at 40% it reads 102.
ClipClips the layer to the coverage of the layer below it, so a fill or correction lands only on that layer's pixels. This is the usual way to grade a single character without touching the background. See Layers for clipping masks in general.
Layer maskAttach a raster mask (Layer ▸ Mask ▸ Add Layer Mask) and paint it to shape where the layer applies: black hides, white shows. See Layers for masks in general.

An adjustment layer is never a clip base: other layers cannot clip to it, because it has no coverage of its own to clip against. A fill layer, which does own pixels, can be a clip base like any raster layer.

An adjustment inside a folder

Scope follows the folder you put the layer in. An adjustment layer at the top level of the stack affects every visible layer below it. Drag that same adjustment into a folder and it affects only the layers below it inside that folder, and nothing outside it. That is the standard way to grade one group of art in isolation without clipping to a single layer.

Folders nest, and so does the scoping: an adjustment inside a folder inside a folder is scoped to its innermost folder. See Layers for how folders and nesting work.

No blend mode of its own

An adjustment layer has no blend mode of its own: it always applies as Normal, and the compositor blends its result over the picture below by opacity, clipping, and mask only. The blend mode combo still appears in the active-layer strip (it is shared by every layer kind) but it has no effect on an adjustment layer, so ignore it there. A Photoshop adjustment layer in another blend mode keeps that mode for saving back to PSD, and the import notice says it looks different in Limner. Fill layers, which composite like ordinary raster layers, honor their blend mode normally.

Painting on a fill or adjustment layer

You cannot paint on the body of a fill or adjustment layer (or of a clone or Colorize color layer), and this is deliberate rather than an oversight. Its pixels are generated from its recipe, so any stroke you made would be silently wiped the next time the recipe was re-evaluated (on the next color edit, or on a canvas resize). Rather than lose your work later, Limner declines now.

On a fill or adjustment layer, these do nothing to the layer's body:

  • Brush, eraser, smudge, and the other pixel tools
  • The bucket fill and the Gradient tool
  • Transform, move, and warp
  • The destructive filters and adjustments under Image ▸ Adjustments
  • Cut, delete, and paste onto the layer

They no-op quietly, the same way they do on a locked layer; the layer's badge in the Layers panel is the signal that it is a generated layer rather than a paintable one.

Note
The layer's mask is still fully paintable. That is the intended way to shape where a fill or adjustment lands: select the mask and paint it with any brush. Only the layer's own body is off limits.

Two things do rewrite a generated layer, and both are honest about it. Merge Down and Merge Visible into a fill layer rasterize the target first, as one undo step, because the merged result cannot be expressed as a fill recipe any more. And Rasterize Layer, below, converts on purpose.

Rasterize Layer

When you want to paint on a fill, adjustment, clone or Colorize color layer, bake it into an ordinary layer first. Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer, or right-click the layer's row in the Layers panel and choose Rasterize layer, converts it in place.

What you get back:

  • A fill layer bakes to exactly the pixels you were already seeing. The result is byte for byte what the fill was rendering, so nothing shifts visually.
  • An adjustment layer keeps the picture: it bakes what the canvas shows, through a Pass Through folder and over the page color, and sets the baked layer's blend mode to Normal.
  • A clone layer keeps the pixels it shows, the same as Break Link, and a Colorize color layer keeps its colors and drops its hints.
  • The layer's mask, opacity, clip flag, name, and position in the stack all carry over. Only the live recipe is dropped.
  • It is one undo step. Ctrl+Z brings the live layer straight back.

The same command works on a Vector workspace (graphic) layer: it keeps exactly the pixels the layer shows and drops its objects, so the Brush, filters and the other raster tools can work on it, and Undo brings the objects back. The Rasterize Layer button on the "not available on a vector layer" notice does the same.

Rasterizing an adjustment layer is refused, with a notice that says why, when the result would look different from the live layer:

  • a Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, Sharpen or Median layer that reaches transparent pixels (put an opaque layer or a page color under it first);
  • one of those layers that the canvas does not draw live (only the lowest one outside a folder of its own draws);
  • any adjustment that a clipped layer above it reads through, since the baked layer would become that layer's clipping base.

The menu item is grayed out unless the active layer is a fill, adjustment, clone, Colorize color or graphic layer and is unlocked; the grayed-out row says why.

Note
Rasterize Layer refuses while a transform, warp, crop, shape, or pen gesture is running, or while a filter preview is open. Those states hold pixels that are not committed yet, so a bake would capture something that does not match your artwork. Confirm or cancel the gesture first, then rasterize.

Current limitations

These are the rough edges we know about, so you are not caught out by them mid-job:

  • Mask strokes on an adjustment layer preview at pen-up. Painting an adjustment's mask works and commits correctly, but you see the result when you lift the pen rather than during the drag. Fill-layer masks are unaffected.
  • In Animation mode. Fill layers are not available there: New Fill Layer says so rather than doing nothing. Adjustment layers are: they own no pixels, so they sit outside the per-frame cel swap, apply to every frame, and can be created and retuned while animating, and Brightness / Contrast, Exposure, Hue / Saturation, Levels, Threshold and Posterize can be keyed on the timeline. Neither kind can be rasterized there, because only the current frame would be baked; a graphic layer cannot be rasterized in Animation or in any document with more than one frame, for the same reason. See Animation mode.
  • A canvas resize regenerates fills. Resizing or cropping the canvas re-renders every fill layer over the new bounds: a solid fill re-covers the whole canvas, and a gradient re-renders between its endpoints in the new canvas space. This is usually what you want, but a gradient will not keep its old proportions.
  • Fill content edits are not undoable yet. Changing a fill layer's color, stops, shape, or direction takes effect immediately but does not add an undo step, and it clears the redo stack. Creating and deleting the layer are undoable; recoloring it is not, so the way back is to set the value again.
  • No on-canvas gradient handles. A gradient fill layer's angle comes from the three Direction buttons only; there are no draggable endpoints on the canvas.

New in 0.9.0

  • Twenty adjustment kinds. Exposure, Black and White, Vibrance, Color Lookup, Photo Filter, Selective Color, Channel Mixer and live Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, Sharpen and Median join the original nine, and a Photoshop file's adjustment layers import live with their settings.
  • Clone layers. A live copy of a raster layer at an offset follows every stroke on its source. See Clone layers.
  • Rasterize keeps the picture. Rasterize Layer bakes what the canvas shows, refuses when the bake would differ from the live layer, and also works on clone, Colorize color and graphic layers.
  • In Animation mode too. Adjustment layers can be created and edited while animating and apply to every frame, and six of the kinds can be keyed on the timeline. Fill layers stay an Illustration and Vector feature.
  • Curves in floating point. Curves adjustment layers compose in floating point, so a master curve stacked on per-channel curves renders slightly differently, and more accurately, than before. Color Balance adjustment layers no longer carry a Preserve Lightness switch.
  • Layers - the stack, folders, masks, clipping, blend modes, and opacity these layers ride on.
  • Filters and Adjustments - the one-shot dialogs, and the controls each adjustment kind uses.
  • Gradient tool - dragging a gradient onto a raster layer, the ramp shapes, and the stop editor.
  • Color - the paint color a new fill layer starts from.
  • Menus - where the New and Rasterize submenus sit in the Layer menu.

Selections

Under the hood a selection is a coverage mask, not a crisp on/off region: edges are anti-aliased and an optional feather softens them further, so strokes and fills fade smoothly at the boundary. The marching ants you see trace the halfway point of that coverage.

The selection tools

All five selection tools live in the tool strip and share the same combine modes and Feather control in the tool options bar. The default keys are shown below and are all rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

ToolDefault keyWhat it does
Rect SelectMDrag out an axis-aligned rectangle through two corners (any order).
Ellipse SelectShift+MDrag out the ellipse inscribed in the rectangle through two corners.
LassoLTrace a freehand outline; the path fills as a polygon and commits on release.
Polygon SelectShift+LClick to drop straight-edge vertices; close by clicking the first point.
Magic WandWClick to select a contiguous patch of similar color.

Rect Select and Ellipse Select

Press and drag to rubber-band the shape, then release to commit. While you drag, the selection refreshes live (rebuilt once per frame, so even a fast drag stays smooth). Both shapes are anti-aliased.

Lasso

Hold and drag to trace a freehand outline. The path is sampled as you move and filled as a polygon, so concave and self-crossing shapes fill correctly. Release to commit. A path needs at least three points to become a selection.

Polygon Select

Each click drops one vertex and the live preview appears once you have placed three. To close the shape, click within 25 pixels of the first vertex (with at least three vertices placed). The tool options bar shows the hint "Click vertices; click the first point to close." A polygon can hold up to 2000 vertices.

Magic Wand

Click a pixel and the wand selects the connected region of similar color. It reads the visible composite, unless a Reference layer is set and visible, in which case that layer drives the color match. When a symmetry ruler is active, the wand also floods from each mirrored copy of the seed point, so a symmetric area selects symmetrically.

The wand shares the Fill tool's Contiguous and Refer image border settings (see Fill). The wand's own options bar shows Tolerance and the Sample Size combo (Point, 3 × 3, 5 × 5) it shares with the bucket, then the combine-mode buttons and Feather. Sample Size decides how big a patch under the cursor is averaged to pick the seed colour, so aiming inside an anti-aliased edge does not anchor the flood to a blend that exists nowhere else. A wand selection carries the same graded edge as a bucket fill, so a cutout no longer keeps a one-pixel rim of the old background.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Tolerance0 to 10045How different a colour can be from the pixel you click and still be selected. 0 selects only the exact colour, 100 selects everything. The comparison is perceptual, so the useful band is spread across the whole rail.
Contiguous (shared with Fill)on / offonOn: only the connected patch. Off: every matching pixel across the layer.
Refer image border (shared with Fill)on / offonOnly affects the Fill tool's gap closing; the wand floods plain (no gap closing), so this setting does not change wand selections.

Combine modes

Every new selection combines with the one already on the canvas in one of four ways. Pick the mode with the segmented buttons in the tool options bar, or hold a modifier key to override it for a single gesture.

ModeModifier keyWhat it does
Replace(none)The new shape becomes the selection. This is the default.
AddShiftUnions the new shape with the existing selection.
SubtractAlt or CtrlCuts the new shape out of the existing selection.
IntersectShift+AltKeeps only the overlap of the new shape and the existing selection.

The tool options bar shows the same reminder: "Shift adds · Alt/Ctrl subtracts · Shift+Alt intersects".

A few things worth knowing:

  • The mode is locked in at the moment a gesture starts. Releasing a modifier mid-drag does not change the result.
  • For selection tools Alt means Subtract, not the temporary eyedropper that Alt triggers for the paint tools.
  • A no-drag click (or a lasso tap with no real path) deselects, but only in Replace mode. In Add, Subtract, or Intersect mode that same click does nothing, so you cannot lose your selection by accident.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ModeReplace / Add / Subtract / IntersectReplaceHow a new shape combines with the current selection.

Feather

Feather softens the edge of the next selection you draw. It blurs the freshly rasterized shape before it combines, fading the boundary over roughly twice the feather radius. It does not retroactively soften a selection you already have.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Feather0.0 to 250.0 px (logarithmic slider)0.0Softens the next selection's edge by this many pixels.

The slider is logarithmic and runs from 0 to 250 pixels, and it keeps its decimals, so 1.5 px is distinct from 1 and 2. The tooltip reads "Soften the next selection's edge by this many pixels."

Feather applies to the selections you draw and to the Magic Wand. Commands that load an existing shape load it exactly, without the Feather: Select ▸ Selection from Layer, Layer ▸ Mask ▸ Mask to Selection and Path to Selection, and Load Selection.

The floating selection toolbar

Once you have an active selection, a small toolbar floats just below it (pinned to the selection's bottom-center). It collects the most common selection actions in one place. It only appears after a selection is finished, so it never flashes mid-drag.

ButtonEnabled whenWhat it does
Transforma selection is activeLifts the selection into a Free Transform. See Transform and Move.
Copya selection is activeCopies the selected pixels to the clipboard (Ctrl+C). With several layers selected, Copy takes every selected layer and Paste rebuilds them as that many layers.
Cutlayer above the paper layerCopies the selection to the clipboard and erases it from the layer (Ctrl+X).
Pastethe clipboard holds an imagePastes onto the active layer in place (Ctrl+Shift+V).
Paste Newthe clipboard holds an imagePastes onto a new layer in place (Ctrl+V).
Expanda selection is activeGrows the selection outward by a set number of pixels; opens the same amount dialog as Select ▸ Modify ▸ Expand.
Contracta selection is activeShrinks the selection inward by a set number of pixels.
Delete Inlayer above the paper layerErases the pixels inside the selection.
Delete Outlayer above the paper layerErases the pixels outside the selection.
Inverta selection is activeSwaps selected and unselected.
Deselecta selection is activeClears the selection.

The Cut, Delete In, and Delete Out buttons stay disabled on the base paper layer (the bottom layer is never erased).

Copy, cut, and paste

Copy puts your selection on the system clipboard as well, so it pastes into other programs, and paste brings an image copied elsewhere straight into your document. The two paste commands differ only in where the pixels land.

CommandDefault shortcutWhat it does
CopyCtrl+CCopies the selected pixels to the clipboard. The source is untouched and no new layer is made. With a layer mask as the edit target, it copies the mask instead, as a grayscale image.
CutCtrl+XCopies the selection to the clipboard and erases it from the active layer in one undo step. With a layer mask as the edit target, it copies the mask as a grayscale image and hides that area on the mask instead, leaving the pixels untouched (see Layer masks).
Paste (onto active layer)Ctrl+Shift+VDrops the clipboard onto the active layer at its original position.
Paste as new layerCtrl+VDrops the clipboard onto a fresh layer named "Pasted", in place.

Notes:

  • Ctrl+V pastes as a new layer (the usual copy-and-paste workflow, matching Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint). Ctrl+Shift+V pastes in place onto the current layer when you want it merged in.
  • Copy and Cut copy only the pixels that are both inside the selection and not transparent.
  • Cut and pasting onto the active layer are blocked on vector layers and on the locked paper layer. Pasting onto either of those falls back to a new layer.

Invert and Deselect

Both commands sit on the floating toolbar and in the Select menu (see Menus). Deselect is Ctrl+D and Invert is Ctrl+Shift+I by default, and both are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts. Select ▸ Reselect (Ctrl+Shift+D) brings back the selection you just dropped; it works without a prior selection and is greyed out until something has been deselected. Select ▸ Selection from Layer selects exactly the active layer's pixels, needs no prior selection, ships unbound, and takes Shift to add and Alt to subtract. Select ▸ Modify holds Expand, Contract, Border and Feather, each with an amount dialog, and Edit ▸ Fill Selection with Foreground (Ctrl+comma) fills the selection with the foreground colour, soft edges kept.

  • Invert (Select ▸ Invert): flips the mask so the selected and unselected regions swap.
  • Deselect (Select ▸ Deselect): clears the selection and any in-progress drag.

Delete Inside and Delete Outside

These erase pixels relative to the selection, on every selected non-paper layer, folded into one undo step.

  • Delete Inside (Edit ▸ Delete Inside): erases the pixels inside the selection.
  • Delete Outside (Edit ▸ Delete Outside): erases everything outside the selection.

Both skip the locked paper layer and vector layers, and both leave the selection itself in place. They are also on the floating toolbar as Delete In and Delete Out, enabled only when the active layer sits above the paper layer. There is no default shortcut for either.

Quick Mask

Select ▸ Quick Mask shows the selection as a translucent red overlay you can paint on with any brush, the way Photoshop's Quick Mask works. Paint to protect, erase to select, use a soft brush for a soft edge, then switch Quick Mask off and the overlay becomes the selection again. It is the quickest way to hand-shape a selection that no marquee tool draws well.

Enclose and Fill

Edit ▸ Enclose and Fill fills the areas the selection encloses, the way Clip Studio Paint's Enclose and Fill does: draw a rough lasso around a region of line art and every closed gap inside it is filled with the foreground colour, while regions that open to the outside are left alone. Large enclosures are budgeted rather than refused, so a lasso around a whole page still finishes. Edit ▸ Fill Selection with Foreground fills the plain selection instead.

Masks and selections

The Layer menu's Mask submenu converts between masks and selections in both directions. Mask to Selection loads the active layer's mask as a selection, Path to Selection loads its vector mask, and Vector Mask from Selection turns the current selection outline into a vector mask on the active layer, a path you can keep editing point by point. See Layers.

Free Transform of a selection

To scale, rotate, or move the selected pixels, start a Free Transform:

  • Edit ▸ Free Transform, or
  • the Transform button on the floating toolbar, or
  • the Transform tool (Ctrl+T).

This hands off to the Transform subsystem. See Transform and Move for handles, aspect lock, flip, and confirm or cancel.

  • Menus for the full Select and Edit menus.
  • Transform and Move for transforming a selection.
  • Fill for the Contiguous and Refer image border settings the Magic Wand shares.
  • Layers for using a selection to build a layer mask.
  • Named selection channels for saving a selection with the document and loading it back later.

New in 0.9.0

  • Quick Mask. Paint the selection as a red overlay with any brush; see above.
  • Enclose and Fill, and Fill Selection with Foreground. Two new Edit commands for filling line art.
  • Masks both ways. Mask to Selection, Path to Selection and Vector Mask from Selection under Layer ▸ Mask.
  • The floating toolbar gains Expand and Contract beside Invert, and Feather keeps its decimals, so 1.5 px is distinct from 1 and 2.
  • Calmer marching ants. The outline animates at a slower, zoom-independent cadence, and a rotated or diagonal selection draws dotted instead of as a solid line.
  • Magic Wand edges. The wand grades its edges the way a bucket fill does and no longer leaks paint outside its selection.
  • Reselect. Bring back the selection you just dropped, instead of redrawing it. It greys out in the menu when there is nothing to restore.
  • Select Layer’s Shape. Select exactly the pixels a layer holds, which is the fastest way to mask to existing artwork.

Named selection channels

All four channel commands live in their own group at the bottom of the Select menu. Save is available whenever a selection is active; the other three stay greyed out until the document has at least one saved channel.

What a channel is

A channel is a snapshot of the selection mask: the per-pixel coverage, soft edges included, exactly as it stood the moment you saved. It belongs to the document, not the app, so it is written into the file when you save and is still there when you reopen the piece next week. Each document keeps its own channel list.

A saved channel is invisible until you load it. It does not tint the canvas, add a layer, or change any pixels; it simply waits in the Select menu. There is no dedicated channels panel: the four menu commands are the whole interface.

CommandWhat it doesAvailable when
Save Selection…Snapshots the current selection into a new channel on the document. Undoable.A selection is active
Load SelectionPick a channel, then one of four combine modes, to fold it back into the live selection.The document has at least one channel
Rename Saved SelectionPick a channel to open the rename prompt. Not undoable.The document has at least one channel
Delete Saved SelectionPick a channel to remove it from the document. Undoable.The document has at least one channel

Saving a selection as a channel

Make a selection with any selection tool (or any combination of them), then choose Select ▸ Save Selection…. The command is greyed out until a document is open and a selection is active. The live selection is untouched by the save; you keep working with it as if nothing happened.

New channels are named Channel 1, Channel 2, and so on. The numbering always picks one past the highest number in use and never reuses a name a delete freed up, so two channels can never end up sharing a default name. If you plan to keep several, rename them right away so the load menu stays readable.

Saving is undoable: Ctrl+Z removes the channel again, and redo brings it back. The snapshot is frozen at save time, so changing the selection afterwards does not update the channel. Save again if you want the new shape; you get a second channel and the first is preserved.

Loading a channel

Choose Select ▸ Load Selection, pick a channel by name, then pick how it should combine with whatever is selected right now. The four modes mirror the combine modes of the selection tools (see Selections).

The four load modes

ModeWhat it does
Replace SelectionThe channel becomes the selection. Whatever was selected before is dropped.
Add to SelectionUnions the channel with the current selection.
Subtract from SelectionCuts the channel's area out of the current selection.
Intersect with SelectionKeeps only the overlap of the channel and the current selection.

With no selection active, Replace and Add both simply select the channel. Subtract and Intersect against an empty selection produce an empty result, so those two are only useful when something is already selected.

A load behaves like finishing a selection gesture: it is one undo step (undo restores the selection you had before), and the floating selection toolbar appears beneath the result, ready for Transform, Copy, and the rest.

Softness comes back exactly as saved

The mask is stored with its anti-aliasing and any feather baked in, and loading bypasses the Feather value in the tool options bar entirely. The channel comes back exactly as saved: a hard-edged channel stays hard even with Feather set to 40, and a feathered channel is not softened a second time. To soften a loaded channel, load it first, then use Select ▸ Modify ▸ Feather.

Renaming and deleting channels

Rename a channel

Choose Select ▸ Rename Saved Selection and pick the channel. A small Rename Channel prompt opens with the current name pre-filled: type the new name and press Enter (or click Rename). Esc or Cancel discards the change, and a blank name is refused (the Rename button stays disabled until you type something).

Renaming is the one channel command that is not undoable: Ctrl+Z will not bring the old name back, so double-check before you commit. It does mark the document as modified, so a rename-only change is still picked up by the next save.

Delete a channel

Choose Select ▸ Delete Saved Selection and pick the channel. It disappears from all three channel submenus immediately. Deleting is undoable: Ctrl+Z restores the channel, mask and all, in its old spot in the list. Deleting a channel never touches the live selection or any layer.

Channels and canvas changes

A channel remembers the canvas size it was saved at. If the canvas has been resized or cropped since, loading fits the stored mask to the current canvas rather than stretching it: the two are lined up at the top left corner, any saved area that now falls outside the canvas is cropped away, and any canvas area beyond the saved size loads as unselected. Your selection stays pixel-aligned with the artwork instead of drifting or scaling.

Image ▸ Rotate Canvas is different: a quarter turn, a half turn or a flip moves every saved channel by an exact pixel map along with the artwork, so a channel stays on its subject rather than being re-fitted at load time.

The fit happens at load time only; the stored channel itself is never rewritten. Shrink the canvas, load the channel, then enlarge the canvas again, and the full saved mask is once more available.

Good to know

  • Channels never touch your pixels. Saving, loading, renaming, and deleting only ever affect the selection mask and the channel list; no layer content changes.
  • The channel commands stand down while the document is mid-gesture: during a live transform, warp, crop, text, or shape gesture, or while a filter preview is open, they quietly do nothing. Finish or cancel the gesture, then run the command again.
  • Channels are per document. Each open document keeps its own list, and there is no command to copy a channel from one document to another.
Note
Channels are saved inside the document, and a file saved by 0.9.0 needs Limner 0.9.0 or later to open. If the document's channels would pass the working memory budget, a save is refused with a message naming the reason rather than silently dropping the snapshot. See File formats.
  • Selections - drawing selections, the combine modes, and Feather.
  • Menus - the full Select menu and the rest of the menu bar.
  • File formats - format versions and what older versions of Limner can open.

Color

Working color space and imported profiles

Limner edits 8-bit sRGB documents. When a PNG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, BMP V5, TIFF, or PSD contains a supported embedded RGB ICC profile, Limner converts its pixels to sRGB during document import and tells you which source profile was converted. The original file is not changed. Untagged images are assumed to be sRGB, including PSD files explicitly marked "intentionally untagged." Calibrated or unknown BMP V4/V5 color metadata is refused rather than guessed. PNG cICP is accepted only when it describes full-range sRGB; other cICP color spaces and PNG HDR mastering/light-level metadata are also refused.

Limner does not currently offer Display P3 or other wide-gamut document spaces, HDR editing, 16-bit-per-channel editing, or CMYK/Lab document editing. A supported Display P3 image can be imported, but it becomes an 8-bit sRGB document. A malformed or unsupported profile, or a profile-tagged high-bit-depth image, is refused with an explanation instead of being imported with incorrect colors.

Soft proofing

View ▸ Proofing ▸ Soft Proof (Ctrl+Y) simulates a chosen press profile on screen, so colors preview the way they print: saturated colors a press cannot reproduce pull into its gamut, while in-gamut colors and neutrals barely move (the simulation is relative colorimetric with black point compensation). The proof is display-only. The document pixels never change, the eyedropper still picks the true document color, and every export is byte-identical with the proof on or off. The canvas stays fully interactive while proofing, including live brush strokes.

View ▸ Proofing ▸ Proof Setup chooses the profile, filed the way Photoshop files its proof conditions: the submenu lists the press profiles installed with Limner (GRACoL2013_CRPC6, SWOP2006_Coated3v2, and ISO Coated v2 300%) first, then any CMYK profiles found in the operating system's color directory, each shown by its embedded profile name with a checkmark on the active one. Picking one applies immediately. "Custom" at the top of the submenu opens a dialog with the same list plus "Load profile", which opens any .icc or .icm file and is the recommended route: your print provider's own profile is the most accurate proofing target for that provider. Only CMYK press profiles are accepted; a monitor or working-space RGB profile is refused with an explanation. Picks and the Soft proof toggle apply live in the dialog; OK keeps them, while Cancel, Esc, or the window close button restores the profile and the toggle the dialog opened with. The chosen profile is remembered across sessions; the Soft Proof toggle itself always starts off, so a session never opens onto a silently color-shifted canvas.

CMYK export

File ▸ Export As… with CMYK TIFF chosen flattens the canvas over white, converts it to CMYK through the press profile chosen in Proof Setup (relative colorimetric with black point compensation), and writes an 8-bit CMYK TIFF with that profile embedded, ready for a print workflow. The exported separation matches what Soft Proof showed on screen. If no press profile has been chosen yet, the export opens Proof Setup instead of guessing.

One brush color, plus a history

Limner keeps an active brush colour and a background colour, shown as the foreground and background pair at the top of the Color panel: X swaps them and D restores black over white, on every platform. Every color you actually paint with is also added to the Color History strip, so your recent colors are always one tap away. See Color History below.

In Vector mode the same picker edits the Fill or Stroke color of the selected object instead of the brush color (see Vector mode in the picker).

Layout at a glance

The Color tab is laid out top to bottom:

  1. Target selector (Vector mode only)
  2. The foreground and background pair beside the Harmony selector (raster modes only): X swaps them and D resets to black over white
  3. HSV color wheel
  4. Harmony swatches (only when a harmony is active)
  5. Exact / hex entry plus the RGB / HEX readout
  6. Channel sliders (choose a color space, then drag the channels)
  7. The CMYK profile caption (only with the CMYK sliders showing, naming the press profile the numbers convert through)
  8. Color History
  9. Palette section

The HSV color wheel

The wheel is the primary picker. It has two parts:

  • The outer hue ring sets the hue. Click or drag around the ring to rotate to a new hue.
  • The inner square sets saturation (left to right, 0 to full) and value (top to bottom, full to dark).

The region you grab (ring or square) is locked when you start a drag, so a stroke that begins on the ring stays on the ring and a drag in the square never jumps to the hue ring. A click works the same as a quick drag.

The wheel remembers the hue and saturation you set even when you drag the square all the way to black or to grey, so you do not lose your chosen hue when you darken or desaturate a color. Setting a color from somewhere else (a swatch, the hex field, a slider) reseeds the wheel from that color.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Hue ring0 to 360 degreesseeded from the current colorSets the hue.
Saturation (square, left to right)0 to 1seeded from the current colorSets saturation.
Value (square, top to bottom)1 to 0seeded from the current colorSets brightness. Top is brightest, bottom is black.

Color harmony

A harmony mode overlays the wheel with the partner hues of your current color and offers them as one-tap swatches. With a harmony on, the ring darkens everywhere except a lit window at the base hue and at each partner, and each partner shows as a pickable dot inside its window. Partner dots take your current color's saturation and value, so they read as variations of the same tone rather than pure bright hues. Clicking a partner dot snaps the base hue exactly to it at full saturation and value, ready to be re-toned in the square.

Choose a mode from the Harmony selector. The choice persists for the session.

Harmony optionWhat it shows
OffA plain HSV picker with no partner markers.
ComplementaryThe opposite hue (180 degrees away), one partner.
TriadicThe two hues 120 degrees on either side, two partners.
AnalogousThe two hues 30 degrees on either side, two partners. The lit area is a single continuous arc across the adjacent hues.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Harmony selectorOff, Complementary, Triadic, AnalogousOffChooses the harmony overlay on the wheel.

Harmony swatches

When a harmony is active, a row of swatches appears below the wheel: first your current color (hover label "Current"), then one swatch per partner (hover label is the harmony name, for example "Triadic"). Click any of them to make it the active color.

Exact and hex entry

For precise input, the Exact button opens a popup with per-channel sliders and a hex field. Below it, a read-only readout always shows the current color as decimal RGB and as a 6-digit uppercase hex value:

RGB  128  64  32
HEX  #804020

The hex readout has no alpha channel.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Exact button0 to 255 per channelcurrent colorOpens an RGB / hex popup for precise entry.
RGB / HEX readoutn/acurrent colorRead-only display of the current color in decimal RGB and uppercase hex.

Channel sliders

The slider strips let you edit the color one channel at a time. Pick a color space from the Sliders selector, then drag the channels. The chosen space persists for the session.

Color spaceChannels and ranges
RGBR, G, B, each 0 to 255
HSVH 0 to 360, S 0 to 100, V 0 to 100
HLSH 0 to 360, L 0 to 100, S 0 to 100
CMYKC, M, Y, K, each 0 to 100
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Sliders (space selector)RGB, HSV, HLS, CMYKRGBChooses which channels the sliders edit.

Notes:

  • The HSV, HLS, and CMYK sliders remember the working channels across frames, so dragging a value to a grey or black does not throw away the hue. Setting the color from the wheel, a swatch, or the hex field reseeds them.
  • With a press profile chosen in View ▸ Proofing ▸ Proof Setup, the CMYK sliders convert through that profile, so the numbers are real ink percentages for that press; the caption under the sliders names the profile in effect. With no profile chosen they fall back to a simple formula, and the caption says so.

Color History

Every color you actually paint with lands in the History strip, most recent first. Click any swatch to make it active again. Until you have painted anything, the strip shows the hint "Colors you paint with appear here."

History records a color when it is committed to paint (a brush, shape, or fill stroke), not while you scrub the picker, so dragging the wheel never floods the list. Erasing and transparent strokes do not record (there is no color to keep). The shape tools and the Fill bucket also skip history when they are editing a layer mask. Identical colors are not duplicated: an existing entry moves to the front instead. The strip holds up to 24 colors.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
History swatchesup to 24 entries, most recent firstemptyOne-tap recall of colors you have painted with.

Palettes

The Palette section is for the colors you want to keep on hand: named, saved swatch sets that survive across sessions (they are stored in your settings and saved on every change).

Managing palettes

The header row has a palette selector and four icon buttons. A new install starts with a palette called Basics: a five-step grey ramp plus the six primaries and secondaries, yours to edit or delete. If you do delete every palette the selector reads "No palettes yet" and only the new-palette and import buttons remain.

ControlDefaultWhat it does
Palette selectoractive paletteSwitches between your saved palettes.
New palette (plus icon)n/aCreates a new palette named "Palette N" and makes it active. Hover: "New palette".
Import (download icon)n/aLoads a GIMP palette file (.gpl) as a new palette. Hover: "Import GIMP palette (.gpl)".
Rename (pencil icon)n/aOpens an inline editor. Press Enter or click away to commit, Esc to cancel. Empty names are ignored. Hover: "Rename palette".
Delete (trash icon)n/aDeletes the current palette. Hover: "Delete palette".

The rename and delete buttons appear only once at least one palette exists.

Adding and removing swatches

The swatch grid shows the active palette's colors as 22 by 22 squares, followed by a plus tile.

  • Single click a swatch to select that color.
  • Right-click a swatch for a menu: "Set to current color" replaces it with the current brush color, and "Remove" deletes it.
  • The trailing plus tile adds the current color to the palette. Hover: "Add current color to palette".
  • On a touch screen, double-tap a swatch to arm it. An X badge appears on its corner (hover: "Remove this color"); tap the badge to delete the swatch. Any press elsewhere disarms it.
ControlWhat it does
Swatch (single click)Selects that color.
Swatch (right-click) ▸ Set to current colorReplaces the swatch with the current brush color.
Swatch (right-click) ▸ RemoveRemoves the swatch.
Swatch (double-tap)Arms the swatch with an X badge for touch removal.
Plus tileAdds the current color to the active palette.

Vector mode: Fill and Stroke

In Vector mode the Color tab gains a Target row at the top with Fill and Stroke choices. The picker then edits whichever target is selected for the current object (or the default for new objects when nothing is selected). The wheel, sliders, hex field, history, and palettes all work the same; they just write to the object's Fill or Stroke color, with full opacity.

ControlWhat it does
Target: FillThe picker edits the object's fill color.
Target: StrokeThe picker edits the object's stroke color.

The Eyedropper

The Eyedropper samples a color straight from your canvas. Its tool-options bar holds Sample (Point, 3 × 3, 5 × 5 or 11 × 11), Radius, and Sample all layers. With Sample all layers on (the default) it samples the composite, meaning all visible layers blended together; off, it samples only the active layer.

  • Default shortcut: I (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts).
  • Click, or drag, to sample. Dragging scrubs the color under the cursor as you move.

For full details, see the Eyedropper tool page.

Hold Alt to sample temporarily

While using most paint tools, hold Alt to borrow the eyedropper without switching tools: press or drag to pick a color, then release Alt to return to your tool. The decision is locked at the moment you press, so toggling Alt in the middle of a stroke cannot hijack a stroke already underway.

Alt-sampling is available for painting tools but is excluded for the selection tools (Rect Select, Ellipse Select, Lasso, Polygon Select), the Magic Wand, Transform, Crop, Layer Move, Mesh Warp, Liquefy, Clone Stamp, Heal, and the Eyedropper itself, where Alt already has another meaning (for example, Alt subtracts from a selection, and on Clone Stamp and Heal it aims the source).

Sampling from the reference board

When the Eyedropper is active and the reference board (the image board or its pop-out) is open, clicking an image samples that image's pixel directly into the brush color instead of selecting or moving the image. The cursor shows a crosshair over the board. See the Reference panel.

Reference layer

A reference layer is a different idea from the reference board. It is a normal layer you flag so that the Fill bucket and the Magic Wand read its pixels for color matching and boundary detection instead of the active layer or the composite. This is the classic "use the lineart layer as my fill guide" workflow: keep your line work on a reference layer, fill on a separate color layer, and the fill follows the lines.

  • The paint still lands on the active layer. Only the color-match source changes.
  • Only one reference layer is honored at a time (the first visible flagged layer). Setting a new one clears any other.
  • The reference flag is saved in the document, so a reopened file keeps it.

Turning it on

In the Layers panel the reference toggle is the crosshair segment of the active-layer strip at the top of the panel; it lights to the accent colour when on. Hover text: "Reference layer: Fill and Magic Wand read this layer's lines". Any row that is flagged wears a quiet crosshair mark after its name (hover: "Reference layer (toggle in the active-layer strip)"), and the row's right-click menu carries the same toggle.

ControlDefaultWhat it does
Active-layer strip: Reference toggle (crosshair)offFlags the layer so Fill and Magic Wand match against it.

The Fill tool has a separate "Reference all layers" checkbox (default on). It is not the same as a reference layer. When on, Fill matches color against the whole composite (every visible layer) rather than the active or reference layer. See Fill and Selections for how the Magic Wand uses the same sources.

Defaults summary

SettingDefault
Harmony modeOff
Slider color spaceRGB
Color History capacity24 colors
Color History contentsempty
Eyedropper shortcutI
Eyedropper Radius0 px (the single pixel under the cursor)
Eyedropper Sample all layerson (the visible composite)
Background colourwhite, with black as the foreground (D resets both)
Reference layer flag (per layer)off
Fill "Reference all layers"on

New in 0.9.0

  • A foreground and background pair. The panel shows both, X swaps them and D restores the defaults; in Vector mode the same keys work the Fill and Stroke stack.
  • Eyedropper controls. The Eyedropper has a sampling Radius (0 to 300 px, averaged) and a Sample all layers switch, and the Color panel imports GIMP .gpl palettes.
  • Sixteen-bit compositing. The compositor accumulates layers in 16-bit float and dithers the final 8-bit picture, so gradients stay smooth and exact black and white survive export.
  • A starter palette. A new install begins with a usable set of swatches instead of an empty palette.

Brushes: Library and Picker

This page is about choosing and managing brushes. For the meaning of each individual setting, see the Tool Settings panel. For how the Brush tool itself behaves on the canvas, see the Brush tool.

The brush engine in brief

A brush is a parameter set the stamp engine reads as you draw. A few terms are worth knowing up front, because they recur throughout the picker and the settings:

  • Tip: the shape of one stamp. A brush either uses the built-in procedural round dab or a grayscale image you import.
  • Opacity: the per-stroke ceiling. Overlapping dabs build up only to this level, then stop. Applied once when the stroke commits.
  • Flow: the per-dab deposit. Lower flow lays paint down more gradually within a single stroke.
  • Spacing: the gap between stamps, measured as a fraction of the tip diameter. Limner's default of 0.08 (8 percent) reads as a continuous ribbon rather than visible dots.

The largest diameter any brush can reach is 2000 canvas pixels, the upper bound on every Size slider. Most brushes paint colour. The pure blenders in the Blend folder deposit no colour of their own; they smear what is already on the canvas. The wet oils in Painting (and the wet-mix brushes in Blend) do both: they smear the canvas while they lay down the drawing colour. Picking any of these keeps the Brush tool selected; the engine simply routes the stroke through the smudge path.

The three brush tabs

Brushes live across three dock tabs:

TabWhat it is for
BrushThe picker: choose a brush, search, and organise folders.
Tool SettingsEdit every setting on the active brush. See Tool Settings.
Create BrushThe guided and advanced brush-builder. Covered below.

The Tool Settings panel docks on the left by default. All three are also reachable from the Window menu.

The Brush picker

The Brush tab is styled after Procreate's Library: a slim vertical rail of folders down the left side, beside a responsive grid of stroke-preview thumbnails for the active folder. The active brush is highlighted with a faint accent wash.

Top controls

ControlWhat it does
New brushOpens the Create Brush wizard to build a brush from scratch. The button is always available.
Import…Imports a Photoshop .abr brush file or a Limner .lbrush preset as new tips. The button is always available.
New folderCreates an empty folder. Drag brushes onto it in the rail to fill it.
Search fieldFilters the whole library by name, folder and imported pack: a space means AND, "!word" excludes, "#folder" and "@pack" narrow the search, and quotes match an exact phrase. Hint text reads "Search brushes".
Clear searchThe X button beside the field, enabled only while a search is typed.

How the body adapts

The grid rearranges itself to fit the panel:

  • While searching, every folder collapses into one flat result grid across the whole library, headed by a count like "5 results". This jumps you straight to a brush by name.
  • With a single folder (for example a fresh install with only the built-ins), the rail is hidden and the grid fills the panel.
  • With several folders and a wide enough panel (104 px folder rail plus a usable grid, so at least 224 px total), you get the folder rail beside the grid.
  • With several folders but a narrow panel (under 224 px), the rail collapses into a folder dropdown above a full-width grid.

The grid itself is responsive: it fits as many columns as the width allows (around a 148 px target cell), and collapses to a single column when very narrow.

Working with folders

Folders are derived from each brush's category. The built-in "Basic" group leads, imported .abr sets follow in import order, and your own empty folders appear after that. Folder organisation is remembered by name across sessions. The list follows the tool: picking Brush, Pen, Pencil, or Airbrush moves the rail to that tool's family (Painting, Inking, Pencils, Airbrush) and brings back the brush you last used with it, with Tool Settings following along. Smudge shows the Blend folder and nothing else; every other tool hides Blend and shows only paint brushes. Browsing to another folder stays put until you change tools again.

  • Select a folder: click its row in the rail (or pick it from the dropdown). Each row shows the folder name and its brush count.
  • Move a brush: drag a brush's grip handle (the dotted handle at the bottom of its cell) onto a folder row in the rail. The grip is the only drag source, so a tap on the thumbnail or name reliably selects the brush instead of picking it up.
  • Rename a folder (your own folders only): click the pencil button, type, then press Enter or click away. Press Escape to cancel.
  • Delete a folder (your own folders only): click the trash button. Its brushes return to the Basic folder rather than being deleted.

A brush cell

Each cell is a wide stroke-preview thumbnail with the brush name below it. Click or tap either the thumbnail or the name to select that brush. Picking a brush while the Eraser is active also switches back to the Brush tool. Picking one while Smudge is active stays on Smudge and sets that tool's brush.

Right-click a cell for its menu:

Menu itemWhat it does
DuplicateMakes an editable copy of the brush.
Reset SettingsRestores the brush to its initial settings.
Export as .abr...Saves this single brush as a Photoshop .abr file.
Save as Limner Preset…Saves this brush as a lossless Limner preset (.lbrush). The tip, dynamics, category and imported pack all travel.
DeleteRemoves the brush. Only available for brushes you imported or created, never the built-ins.

Deleting a user brush asks for confirmation first ("Delete this brush?"). Built-in presets are protected: they show no trash button and cannot be deleted or renamed in place. To customise one, duplicate it first.

The built-in library

Limner ships 52 brushes across six folders. The built-ins are regenerated at every launch and are never written to disk, so editing one only changes a saved override (see On-disk format below). The full list:

Pencils

Pencil (HB), Pencil (2B), Pencil (Hard 2H), Mechanical Pencil, Charcoal, Sketch (light), Soft Pencil (6B). Graphite and charcoal marks that bite the paper, most with a procedural paper tooth.

Inking

G-Pen, Mapping Pen, Fineliner, Ink Brush, Dip Pen, Tapered Pen, Marker, Real G-Pen, Turnip Pen, Felt Pen, Sumi Ink Brush, Dry Ink, Light Ink. Pressure-driven line art with entry and exit tapers and post-correction for clean curves. Mapping Pen and Fineliner use aliased (crisp) edges for fine line and screentone work.

Painting

Round (soft), Round (hard), Bristle, Flat / Chisel, Oil / Impasto, Watercolor, Oil (Perceptual), Gouache, Acrylic Flat, Watercolor Wash. From clean round tips to bristle and chisel shapes. Several of the oils, gouache, and washes carry wet-mixing settings, so they smear and blend colour as you drag.

Airbrush

Airbrush (soft), Airbrush (hard), Spray, Splatter, Spray Can, Droplet, Toner Spray. Soft gradual build-up plus scatter-and-count sprays for particles and spatter.

Texture

Chalk, Pastel (soft), Crayon, Stipple, Grunge. Rough, broken marks on toothy surfaces, including a large grunge stamp.

Blend

Smudge, Soft Blend, Strong Smear, Wet Mix, Wet Blend, Bristle Smudge, Grainy Smudge, Chalk Smudge, Perceptual Wet Mix, Palette Knife. These deposit no colour of their own; they smear what is already on the canvas, with varying amounts of paint pickup and colour stretch, and the pigment a stroke picks up runs out as it travels.

Creating and editing brushes

The Create Brush wizard

Open it with New brush in the picker, or the Create Brush tab. The header reads "Create a brush", with a Guided / Advanced switch on the right. While you build, the draft IS the active painting brush, so the canvas doubles as a test pad (Ctrl+Z erases your test doodles), and a live stroke ribbon shows the brush updating with every change.

Guided mode walks five steps:

  1. Type: pick one of eight starting archetypes. Each is a card with a real stroke preview: Plain round, Inking pen, Pencil, Paint brush, Airbrush, Spray / spatter, Chalk & charcoal, and Blender. Re-picking a type restarts the draft fresh.
  2. Tip: choose the round tip or import an image, then set hardness (round) or invert and flip (image), and roundness.
  3. Pen: set size, whether pressure changes the size (with a Soft / Steady / Firm response and a draggable curve), whether pressure changes the ink amount, and the stroke ends (Blunt, Tapered, or Long taper).
  4. Character: stroke body (Smooth / Normal / Grainy / Dotted spacing), paper grain, scatter, and colour life (per-stamp colour jitter).
  5. Name: name the brush (default "My Brush") and choose a folder. New brushes default into the "Created Brushes" folder, which appears once the first brush lands there.

Each step shows footer buttons for Cancel, Back, Next, and finally Create brush.

Advanced mode skips the wizard. Pick a starting point (any archetype, or "Current brush" to copy the selected library brush), then edit the full nine-page settings editor on the draft, name it, and create it.

Editing an existing brush

Select a brush, then open the Tool Settings panel. Its editor has nine pages in a left rail: Basic, Tip shape, Ink, Color, Stroke, Texture, Dual brush, Taper, and Correction. A live stroke ribbon at the top regenerates on every change using the real stamp engine, so what you see is exactly what you will paint. The Basic page gathers the most-used controls (size, hardness, opacity and flow, blending mode, brush type, and the stabilizer with its delay radius) in one place; the same controls also appear on their detailed pages.

The full meaning, range, and default of every control on those nine pages is documented in Tool Settings.

Importing and exporting Photoshop .abr

Limner reads and writes the .abr brush format, so brushes travel between Limner, Photoshop, Clip Studio Paint, Krita, and GIMP.

Import

Click Import… in the picker. Limner reads ABR versions 1, 2, 6, 7, and 10, and extracts the sampled (bitmap-backed) brushes; computed or purely parametric brushes are skipped. Where the file carries them, spacing, diameter, hardness, scatter, texture, dual tip, and colour dynamics are mapped onto the new brush. Imported brushes land in a folder named after the file, with category "Imported" if the file gives no name.

Export

Two routes:

  • One brush: right-click its cell and choose Export as .abr....
  • A whole folder: right-click the folder row in the rail and choose Export folder as .abr....

Exports are written as ABR version 2, the flat sampled format every major app imports. That format has no slots for dynamics, texture, or colour, so what travels is the tip bitmap, the name, and the spacing; the receiving app supplies its own dynamics, exactly as it would for any classic .abr.

On-disk format (brushes.dat)

Your imported and created brushes, plus any edits you make to the built-in presets, are saved to brushes.dat in Limner's config folder (%APPDATA%/Limner, alongside settings.toml). The current on-disk version is 21. Imported .abr records are keyed by pack and name, so the same brush name from two different packs stays distinct. On macOS and iPad the same files live under Application Support.

A few details worth knowing:

  • The built-in presets themselves are not stored. They are regenerated at launch, and only your edits to them ("overrides", keyed by name) are saved over the factory list.
  • Folder organisation is not stored in brushes.dat. It lives in the app settings and is re-applied by brush name.
  • The format is versioned and migrates older files forward. A file from an older version still loads; a file from a newer version than this build understands is ignored rather than risked.

See also

Tool Settings Panel

For choosing, organizing, importing, and creating brushes, see Brushes. For painting with the result, see the Brush tool.

Opening the panel

Tool Settings is one of the three brush dock tabs, labeled Tool Settings (it was called Brush Settings before it learned to follow the tool). By default it docks on the left side of the window. The same editor is also embedded in the Advanced mode of the Create Brush wizard (see Brushes).

The whole panel is mouse and pen driven. There are no dedicated keyboard shortcuts in this panel itself, though the global brush-size keys still apply: ] grows the brush and [ shrinks it (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts).

Anatomy

The panel has three parts, top to bottom:

  1. Header. An icon plus the brush name. For your own brushes, double-click

the name to rename it in place. Built-in presets cannot be renamed (the name shows the hint "Built-in preset; duplicate it to rename"). The header also carries verbs, right-aligned:

  • Reset (counter-clockwise arrow): "Restore initial settings". Built-in

presets return to their shipped values; your own brushes return to their last-saved state.

  • Delete (trash): shown only for your own brushes, not built-ins.
  • New (wand, accent color): opens the Create Brush wizard.

When the Eraser tool is active, the header instead shows "Eraser" with no library verbs, because the eraser carries its own parameter set. (The Smudge tool shows its selected Blend-folder brush here, editable like any other brush.) While the Create Brush wizard has a draft going, it shows "New brush (draft)". What the panel shows follows the tool. The brush-driven tools (the paint brushes, Eraser, Blend, Clone Stamp and Heal) show the deep per-brush editor described on this page. With Rectangle, Ellipse, Line or Curve active, that tool's Filled, Width and Opacity controls sit above the editor, and a line or curve is stamped with the active brush. With Gradient active the panel becomes the Gradient editor: presets, the stop bar, the selected stop's color and opacity, and the shape. With Text active it becomes the text editor while a text is placed or edited. With Liquefy active the whole panel becomes the Liquefy editor: Mode (Push, Pinch, Expand, Twirl), Size (12.0 to 1024.0, logarithmic, default 96.0), Strength (0.0 to 1.0, default 0.5) and Reverse, the same four values as the tool options bar, each surface an exact mirror of the other; the controls are disabled during a stroke, with the note "Finish the current contact to change Liquefy settings." Every other tool shows its full parameter list, or a one-line hint of its gesture when it has no parameters (Pan, Zoom).

  1. Live stroke ribbon. A preview rendered by the real stamp engine, with

every setting applied. It regenerates on any change, so edits read instantly. Hover text: "Live preview: the actual engine, every setting applied".

  1. Category rail plus the selected page. A narrow rail of nine categories on

the left; the chosen category's controls on the right.

The nine category pages

The rail lists these categories in stroke-pipeline order, with the most-used controls gathered first:

Basic, Tip shape, Ink, Color, Stroke, Texture, Dual brush, Taper, Correction.

The Basic page is an additive view: each control on it is the same widget that appears on its detailed page, emitting the same action, so editing on either surface stays in sync. There is no duplicated state.

All defaults below come from Brush::default() in src/brush.rs. Built-in presets override these per preset.

Basic

The everyday controls in one place: Size, Hardness, Opacity, Flow, Blending mode, Brush type, and the Stabilizer with its delay radius.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1.0 to 2000.0 px (logarithmic)24.0Tip diameter at full pressure, in canvas pixels.
Hardness0.0 to 1.00.85Edge softness of the round tip (0 = soft, 1 = crisp). Hidden when an image tip is loaded, since its softness is baked into the bitmap.
Opacity0.0 to 1.01.0Stroke opacity ceiling. Crossing your own stroke never exceeds it.
Flow0.0 to 1.01.0Per-dab paint deposit. Builds up within a stroke.
Blending modethe 30 layer blend modesNormalHow the finished stroke combines with what is already on the layer (see Ink, below). Greyed out for Smudge brushes.
Brush typePaint / SmudgePaintPaint deposits color; Smudge drags the colors already on the canvas (a pure blender: it deposits nothing of its own). Dragging a brush into the picker's Blend folder sets Smudge automatically. The old Blur type is retired; a saved Blur brush loads as a Smudge brush.
Stabilizer0.0 to 0.950.35Smooths hand shake along the path. Backs off automatically on fast strokes.
Delay0 to 64 px0A dead zone around the brush tip: the line only moves once the pen leaves this circle, so shake smaller than it is removed exactly and a parked pen ends the line dead where it stopped. 0 is off.

Opacity and Flow are independent. Flow sets the per-dab deposit, so overlapping passes build up within a single stroke; Opacity is the ceiling that buildup cannot exceed. Lower Flow paints more gradually; lower Opacity caps the whole stroke at a fixed solidity.

Hardness applies only to the round tip. When an image tip is loaded its softness comes from the bitmap, so the Basic page hides the Hardness slider (and the Tip shape page replaces it with the image-tip toggles). On the Brush tool options bar the same control is greyed out rather than hidden for a sampled-tip brush, with a hover that explains why.

The Size and Flow sliders each have a small pulse-glyph dynamics button beside them, opening the dynamics popover (see Dynamics popover). The button lights up in the accent color when any pen-driven source is active.

Tip shape

Controls the shape and orientation of the tip.

Shape source

Two choices, "Round" and "Image...":

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ShapeRound / ImageRoundRound uses the procedural round (or elliptical) tip. Image makes any PNG or JPEG the tip: transparency is the shape if present, else dark marks paint.

When an image tip is loaded, the panel reports its pixel size and shows five toggles instead of the Hardness slider:

ControlDefaultWhat it does
InvertoffPaint the holes (for white-on-black source images). Baked into the bitmap.
Flip HoffMirror the tip horizontally. Baked into the bitmap.
Flip VoffMirror the tip vertically. Baked into the bitmap.
Random HoffMirror each stamp horizontally at random.
Random VoffMirror each stamp vertically at random.

When the tip is Round, a Hardness slider appears here instead (same range and default as on the Basic page: 0.0 to 1.0, default 0.85).

Multi-tip set (Repeat method)

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Add tips to set(button)noneAdd one or more tip images. Each dab then picks one at random (a multi-tip brush). You can select several files at once.
Clear set (N)(button)shown when extras existRemove all extra tips.
RepeatRandom / CycleRandomHow the tip set is chosen per dab. Random gives a varied scatter; Cycle steps strictly in order (tip, then each extra, repeating) for a regular pattern. Shown only once there are extra tips.

Shape and orientation

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Roundness0.05 to 1.01.01 = round; lower flattens the tip into an ellipse (calligraphic). Has a dynamics button.
DirectionStroke / Pen tilt / FixedStrokeWhat the tip faces. Stroke rotates the tip to follow the stroke; Pen tilt orients it by pen lean (falling back to stroke direction without tilt data); Fixed holds one orientation set by the Angle slider.
Angle-180 to 180 degrees0A fixed rotation added on top of the direction (a held nib bevel).
Angle jitter0.0 to 1.00.0Random per-dab rotation (1 = plus or minus 180 degrees). Breaks texture repetition.
Anti-aliasingNone (0.0) / Weak (0.5) / Middle (1.0) / Strong (1.5)WeakEdge softness of the tip rim, as a pixel band. None gives crisp aliased pixels (screentone or pixel work); Strong gives a 1.5 px feather.
Size on screenon / offoffKeep a constant on-screen brush size as the canvas zooms (size is read as screen pixels, not canvas pixels).

Note: the stored anti-aliasing value is a pixel band, but the control shows the four CSP-style named levels. If the stored value does not match one exactly, the control falls back to displaying "Weak".

Ink

The per-brush blend mode plus paint deposit and wet mixing. This page repeats Opacity, Flow, Blending mode, and Brush type from Basic, then adds the type-specific mixing controls.

Blending mode

The per-brush "Ink" blend mode controls how the finished stroke composites onto the active layer's existing pixels. It uses the same blend math as a per-layer blend mode but is independent of it, and it applies only to Paint brushes.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Blending modeall 30 layer blend modes, Dissolve includedNormalNormal paints over; Multiply darkens, Screen lightens, and so on. Greyed out for Smudge brushes.

Color mixing (Smudge brushes)

These wet-mixing controls appear only when the brush type is Smudge. With every value at its default the brush behaves as a classic smudge (no drawing color mixed in). A blender carries a finite amount of the color it picks up, so a long smear runs out the way real paint does instead of feeding itself from its own trail, and per-dab strength is normalized for spacing, so a stroke builds toward the Flow you set rather than saturating instantly on a closely spaced tip.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Amount of paint0% to 100%0%How much of your drawing color each dab deposits, blended into the picked-up ground. 0% = classic smudge.
Density of paint0% to 100%0%Opacity of the wet deposit. 0% = the classic deposit strength.
Color stretch0% to 100%0%How far the carried color stretches before it converges to the live ground. 0% = classic per-dab pickup.
MixingStandard / PerceptualStandardColor space for the mix. Standard is a linear sRGB blend; Perceptual is a pigment-like Lab blend that also unlocks Brightness.
Brightness-100% to +100%0%Brightness correction on the mix. Shown only in Perceptual mode.

Color mixing never appears for a plain Paint brush, which has no ground to mix with.

Color

Per-dab and per-stroke color jitter. Each group has Hue, Saturation, and Brightness sliders, shown as percentages.

Per-stamp jitter

Every stamp of the tip shifts the color, so foliage, spatter, and particle brushes feel alive. Hue at 100% means anywhere on the wheel.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Hue0% to 100%0%Per-stamp hue shift (100% = plus or minus 180 degrees).
Saturation0% to 100%0%Per-stamp saturation shift.
Brightness0% to 100%0%Per-stamp brightness shift.

Per-stroke jitter

Each new stroke starts at a shifted color, then stays consistent for the rest of that stroke.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Hue0% to 100%0%Per-stroke hue shift.
Saturation0% to 100%0%Per-stroke saturation shift.
Brightness0% to 100%0%Per-stroke brightness shift.

Stroke

Spacing, overlap behavior, and spray/scatter.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Ribbonon / offoffLay the tip image stretched and tiled along the stroke (length = the tip repeated, width = across) instead of stamping it, for ribbons, chains, and tape. Spacing and scatter do not apply when on. Shown only when there is an image tip or extra tips.
Auto spacingon / offoffScale each tip axis with the square root of its size, so one setting stays sensible from a 4 px liner to a 400 px wash, and a flattened tip spaces its marks by its real projected width. Replaces the Spacing slider while it is on.
Auto coefficient0.25 to 2.01.0Lower values place denser dabs; higher values leave a wider gap. Shown only while Auto spacing is on.
Spacing1% to 100% (logarithmic)8%Gap between stamps as a fraction of tip size. Low reads as a solid ribbon; high reads as dotted. Shown only while Auto spacing is off.
Darken overlapon / offoffWhere stamps overlap, keep the strongest dab (flat, no buildup) instead of letting overlap darken.

Spray

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Scatter0.0 to 1.00.0Random dab offset as a fraction of tip size.
Count1 to 161Dabs per spacing step; fills a scattered stroke. Enabled only when Scatter is above 0.
Particle size0.05 to 1.01.0Size of each scattered speck, as a fraction of the brush size. Enabled only when Scatter is above 0.
Deviation0.0 to 1.00.0Clusters specks toward the stroke centre (0 = even spread). Enabled only when Scatter is above 0.

Texture

A procedural paper grain plus an optional imported texture pattern.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Paper grain0.0 to 1.00.0Procedural canvas tooth multiplied into every dab: grit that survives overlap (pencil and chalk feel), no image needed.
Import image...(button)nonePick a PNG or JPEG as the paper texture. It tiles across the canvas and composes into every stroke.
Clear (trash)(button)shown when loadedRemove the texture pattern.

When a texture pattern is loaded, these controls appear:

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Scale25% to 800% (logarithmic)per loaded patternCanvas pixels per pattern texel: how large the paper grain reads.
Depth0% to 100%per loaded patternHow strongly the pattern's dark points block paint.
Brightness-1.0 to 1.0per loaded patternBrightens or darkens the pattern.
Contrast-1.0 to 1.0per loaded patternRaises or lowers the pattern contrast about mid-grey.
Invert patternon / offper loaded patternSwap which parts of the pattern receive paint.
ModeMultiply / Subtract / HeightMultiplyMultiply: texture always shows through. Subtract: light strokes break up completely (dry chalk). Height: paint fills the texture as you build up, eventually burying it.
Rotation0 to 360 degrees0Rotate the texture pattern (it stays registered to the canvas).

An imported .abr set's texture lands in this slot.

Dual brush

A second tip that masks every stamp of the main tip: texture inside the shape, like Photoshop's Dual Brush. It reuses the same grain controls as Texture, but the wording targets the second tip and the texture-only controls (Scale, Mode, Rotation) are omitted.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Import image...(button)nonePick a PNG or JPEG as the second tip. It masks every stamp of the main tip in the stamp's own frame.
Clear (trash)(button)shown when loadedRemove the second tip.
Depth0% to 100%per loaded patternHow strongly the second tip's dark points block paint.
Brightness-1.0 to 1.0per loaded patternBrightens or darkens the second tip.
Contrast-1.0 to 1.0per loaded patternRaises or lowers the second tip's contrast.
Invert patternon / offper loaded patternSwap which parts of the second tip receive paint.

An imported .abr set's dual tip lands in this slot.

Taper

The entry and exit taper lengths (CSP "Starting and ending").

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Start0 to 100 px0The stroke begins at a point and ramps to full size over this length.
End0 to 100 px0A fast pen lift extends the stroke up to this length while it thins to a needle. Flicks end pointy; deliberate stops stay blunt.

Correction

The stabilizer and its delay radius, the speed coupling, tail aggressiveness, and the pen-up post-correction.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Stabilizer0.0 to 0.950.35Smooths hand shake along the path; the line always catches up to the pen at lift. (Same control as on the Basic page.)
Delay0 to 64 px0A dead zone around the brush tip: the line only moves once the pen leaves this circle, so tremor smaller than it is removed exactly and a stroke stops dead where you stop. 0 is off.
Adjust by speedOff / Reduce when fast / Increase when slowReduce when fastHow the stabilizer's strength tracks stroke speed. Reduce when fast keeps quick lines responsive; Increase when slow holds very slow lines extra steady; Off is constant.
Tail aggressiveness0.0 to 1.00.0While pen pressure falls, reduce the pull from older thick samples so a tapered flick follows its newest path and keeps its point. 0 keeps the classic stabilizer.
Post correct0.0 to 1.00.0At pen-up the stroke's path is simplified and re-fitted, then redrawn along the cleaned curve, so the line snaps clean on release. 0 = off.
CurveSpline / BezierSplineSpline re-fits through the cleaned points; Bezier rounds them into a smoother, more designed curve.
Post correct by speedon / offoffScale the post-correction strength with stroke speed (faster = more).

Dynamics popover

Each dynamizable slider (Size, Flow, and Roundness) carries a small pulse-glyph button. It lights up in the accent color when any pen-driven source is active, and its hover text summarizes which sources are driving the value. Clicking it opens the dynamics popover, the per-parameter mapping of pen input to the value's strength.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
By pen pressureon / offper parameterDrive the value with pen pressure, through the response curve.
Curve(draggable curve, shown when pressure is on)linearThe pressure response curve. See Response curve editor.
Curve (gamma)0.25 to 3.01.0 (linear)A quick gamma slider, shown while the curve is still a simple gamma. 1 = linear; higher keeps light pressure low (G-pen feel); lower responds early.
Reset curve to linear(button)shown when the curve is point-editedDrop the drawn points and return to a straight response.
Minimum0% to 100%per parameterThe value at zero pressure (0% lets it vanish). This slider owns the output floor.
Speed0.0 to 1.00.0How much stroke speed thins or lightens the value. The hover wording is per parameter (for example, fast strokes thin the size or deposit less ink).
Tilt0.0 to 1.00.0How much pen lean changes the value (for example, a flat pen paints broader).
Random0.0 to 1.00.0Per-stamp jitter on the value.

Defaults per parameter, from Brush::default():

  • Size dynamics: pressure on, linear curve, Minimum 10%.
  • Flow dynamics: pressure on, linear curve, Minimum 0%.
  • Roundness dynamics: all sources off.

Response curve editor

The popover's curve editor maps pressure (0 to 1) to a factor (0 to 1). The two endpoints are pinned at (0, 0) and (1, 1); the Minimum slider, not the curve, owns the output floor.

  • Drag an interior point to move it.
  • Click empty space to add a point (up to 8 points total).
  • Double-click a point to remove it. Dropping back to two points returns the

curve to a straight linear response.

A gamma curve converts to draggable points on its first edit, seeded from its own shape so nothing jumps.

New in 0.9.0

  • Automatic spacing. Spacing follows a square-root law from the size, and a flattened nib measures its projected width, so the edge of a tilted flat brush stays continuous.
  • Tail Aggressiveness. A control on the Correction page sets how firmly a stroke's taper is pulled in at its end.
  • A stabiliser that can hold still. The stabiliser's Delay radius lets the pen move inside a small circle before the line follows, so a held pen draws nothing until you mean it.
  • Small and flat brushes. Brushes under 5 px no longer pulse light and dark, very small brushes lay a line instead of beads (down to 0.5 px), and a flat nib's long edges are no longer ragged.
  • Symmetry mirrors the tip. A handed or shaped tip is genuinely mirrored across the symmetry axis.
  • Not pixel-identical. Because curve following, small dabs and close spacing changed, the same gesture does not produce the same pixels as earlier builds. Existing artwork is untouched.

See also

  • Brushes: choosing, organizing, importing, and creating brushes.
  • Brush tool: painting with the active brush.

Filters and Adjustments

This page covers Image ▸ Adjustments in menu order (Brightness / Contrast, Levels, Curves, Hue / Saturation, Color Balance, Invert, Posterize, Threshold, Halftone, Gradient Map, Color to Alpha), then the Filter menu in menu order (Gaussian Blur, Lens Blur, Motion Blur, Sharpen, Median, Emboss, Edge Detect), and finally Image ▸ Rotate Canvas.

See also: Menus for where these sit in the menu bar, and Layers for active layers, selections, and masks. Every adjustment on this page commits into the active layer's pixels; for the re-editable version that leaves the artwork below untouched, see Fill and adjustment layers.

How filters work (read this first)

All eighteen filters share one dialog and one workflow, so once you know one you know them all. Judge a preview at the zoom that matters: at 200 percent and above the canvas draws pixels as pixels, with no smoothing, so fine detail reads true. View ▸ Proofing ▸ Soft Proof is display-only and never changes what a filter writes.

The live-preview dialog

  • One movable, non-dimming window. The dialog is a floating window titled for the filter you opened, not a dimming modal. The artwork behind it stays at true brightness, and you can drag the window off your art to judge the preview clearly. It first appears top-centre, clear of the canvas, and remembers wherever you drag it.
  • Live preview on any change. The moment you move a slider or handle, the active layer updates so you see the result in place. Filters whose default already changes the image (Invert, Posterize, Threshold, Gradient Map) preview the instant you open them, before you touch anything.
  • Apply / Cancel. The bottom row has Apply (bold) and Cancel. Apply commits the result as a single undo step (one press of undo removes the whole adjustment). Cancel reverts the layer to exactly how it looked before you opened the dialog.
  • Closing also cancels. The title-bar close button and the Esc key both cancel, exactly like the Cancel button.
  • Painting is paused. While a filter dialog is open, drawing on the canvas is blocked so a stray stroke cannot corrupt the preview. Switching documents closes the dialog.

What a filter acts on

  • The active layer, clipped to the selection. Adjustments edit the active layer's own pixels, not the merged composite. If a selection is active, only pixels inside it change. Feathered or anti-aliased selection edges blend the adjustment by coverage, so the transition is smooth instead of a hard stair-step.
  • Layer masks. If you are editing a layer's mask (rather than its pixels), the filter acts on the mask's coverage instead of the colour. This lets you use Levels to tighten a mask edge or Gaussian Blur to feather one.
  • Vector layers must be rasterized first. Filters write pixels, and a vector layer's pixels are generated from its paths. Running a filter on a vector layer (when you are not editing its mask) shows a notice and refuses. Rasterize the layer first, then filter it. See Layers.
  • Fill, adjustment and Colorize color layers are generated. Their pixels come from their settings, so a filter cannot change them. Choosing a filter on one closes the dialog with a notice that says so (for example "Filtering is not available on a fill layer") and where to go instead: Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer, or the layer's mask if it has one.
  • Lock Transparency holds. On a layer with transparency locked, a filter keeps every pixel's alpha: a blur recolors inside the shape and leaves its edges exactly as they were, and thin or faint paint keeps its color. Color to Alpha, whose whole result is transparency, is refused there with "Transparency is locked".
  • Locked layers are skipped. Preview and commit do nothing on a locked layer.
  • On iPad, memory is checked first. A filter whose working copies would not fit in the memory the iPad can safely give it is refused with "Not enough memory for this filter", which names the amount needed, instead of risking the app being closed.

The histogram behind Levels and Curves

Both Levels and Curves draw a 256-bin histogram of the active layer's tones behind their main widget, so you can place handles and points against the real distribution of lights and darks. Levels draws the layer's luma (transparent pixels are skipped). Curves draws the luma while you edit the composite RGB curve and switches to that channel's own histogram the moment you pick Red, Green, or Blue. While you are editing a layer mask, the histogram shows the mask's own values instead, and Levels Auto works from them. While it is being computed, the widget shows a brief "computing histogram" placeholder.

  • Every filter and adjustment is greyed out until a document is open. The colour and tone adjustments live under Image ▸ Adjustments; the Filter menu holds Repeat Last Filter and then the spatial filters in three groups: blurs (Gaussian Blur, Lens Blur, Motion Blur), sharpening and noise (Sharpen, Median), and stylize (Emboss, Edge Detect). Both menus carry the reminder "Acts on the active layer (or the selection)."
  • Only Repeat Last Filter has a default chord, Ctrl+Alt+F (Cmd+Option+F on a Mac): it re-applies the last committed filter with the same settings, and is greyed out until one has run. The individual filters ship unbound, and as with all commands you can assign your own in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.
  • Items with options end in an ellipsis. Invert has no options, so it carries none.

Hue / Saturation

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Hue / Saturation

Shifts the hue, intensity, and brightness of the layer's colours all at once. It rotates the hue wheel, scales saturation, and blends each pixel toward black or white. Useful for recolouring, warming or cooling an image, or knocking colours back. With all three sliders at 0 it does nothing.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Hue °-180.0 to 180.00.0Rotates every colour around the hue wheel by this many degrees.
Saturation-1.0 to 1.00.0-1 fully desaturates to grey, +1 doubles saturation.
Lightness-1.0 to 1.00.0Blends toward black (negative) or toward white (positive).

Note: Lightness is asymmetric. Positive values lift colours toward white, negative values pull them toward black. Alpha is preserved.

Levels

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Levels

Remaps the tonal range: pick the input black and white points to set contrast, slide the midpoint to brighten or darken the midtones (gamma), and pick output black and white points to limit the final range. The main control is the histogram with five draggable handles, just like Photoshop.

The same five values are also available as precise sliders in the collapsible Numeric values section. A Log scale checkbox switches the histogram to log heights (so a single stray pixel stays on the floor instead of lifting into noise); Auto clips 0.6 per cent from each end of red, green and blue independently and prints the ranges it chose under the row, so you can see and repeat what it did (it is greyed out until the histogram has finished computing); and Reset restores the defaults.

Handles on the histogram

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Input black handle (black triangle)0 to 1, must stay below input white0.0Tones at or below this become pure black.
Input white handle (white triangle)0 to 1, must stay above input black1.0Tones at or above this become pure white.
Gamma midpoint handle (grey triangle)gamma 0.1 to 9.991.0Brightens or darkens the midtones without moving the endpoints.
Output black handle (black triangle)0 to 1, must stay below output white0.0Raises the darkest output value (lifts blacks).
Output white handle (white triangle)0 to 1, must stay above output black1.0Lowers the brightest output value (caps whites).

Numeric values (collapsible)

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Input black0.0 to 1.00.0Numeric twin of the input black handle.
Input white0.0 to 1.01.0Numeric twin of the input white handle.
Gamma0.1 to 9.99 (logarithmic)1.0Numeric midtone gamma; above 1 brightens, below 1 darkens.
Output black0.0 to 1.00.0Numeric twin of the output black handle.
Output white0.0 to 1.01.0Numeric twin of the output white handle.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Log scaleon / offoffDraws the histogram with logarithmic bar heights.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores all five Levels values to their defaults.

Tips:

  • Double-click a handle to reset just that endpoint.
  • The grab radius is about 9 px, so you do not have to land exactly on the triangle.
  • The current transfer curve is drawn over the histogram, with an output black-to-white gradient bar below the input handles.
  • The dialog keeps input white above input black automatically, so the range can never collapse.

Curves

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Curves

The most flexible tonal tool. Drag a curve to map input tones to output tones with full control. Edit the composite RGB curve to adjust overall brightness and contrast, or switch to Red, Green, or Blue to shift colour balance per channel. Per-channel and master edits stack the way Photoshop's do.

The curve uses overshoot-free monotone-cubic interpolation, so adding a steep point will not introduce wiggles in the shadows or highlights.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ChannelRGB / Red / Green / BlueRGBSelects which curve you are editing.
Reset channelbuttonn/aResets the active channel's curve to the diagonal.
Reset allbuttonn/aResets all four curves to the diagonal.
Control pointsx and y from 0 to 1endpoints (0,0) and (1,1)Drag to reshape the curve.

Editing the curve

  • Add a point: click empty space on the graph (up to 16 points per channel; a click too close to an existing point is ignored).
  • Move a point: drag it. The two endpoints keep their fixed x (0 or 1) and only move vertically; interior points stay between their neighbours.
  • Remove a point: drag it off the top or bottom edge, right-click it, or double-click it. The two endpoints cannot be removed, and a curve always keeps at least two points.

The active channel's curve is drawn bright; any non-identity inactive channels are drawn faint behind it. Channel colours follow their names (RGB is grey, plus red, green, and blue).

Color Balance

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Color Balance

Push colours toward warm or cool poles separately in the shadows, midtones, and highlights. Each tonal range has three bipolar sliders along the cyan to red, magenta to green, and yellow to blue axes. Positive values push toward the warm pole (red, green, or blue). The smooth tonal weighting crossfades the three ranges without banding.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Shadows: Cyan to Red-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the dark tones along the cyan/red axis.
Shadows: Magenta to Green-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the dark tones along the magenta/green axis.
Shadows: Yellow to Blue-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the dark tones along the yellow/blue axis.
Midtones: Cyan to Red-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the midtones along the cyan/red axis.
Midtones: Magenta to Green-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the midtones along the magenta/green axis.
Midtones: Yellow to Blue-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the midtones along the yellow/blue axis.
Highlights: Cyan to Red-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the bright tones along the cyan/red axis.
Highlights: Magenta to Green-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the bright tones along the magenta/green axis.
Highlights: Yellow to Blue-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts the bright tones along the yellow/blue axis.
Preserve lightnesson / offonRe-tones each pixel back to its original lightness, so the balance changes hue without brightening or darkening.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores all nine axes and the Preserve lightness default.

The on-screen axis labels read "Cyan ↔ Red", "Magenta ↔ Green", and "Yellow ↔ Blue", grouped under "Shadows", "Midtones", and "Highlights".

Gradient Map

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Gradient Map

Recolours the image by its tonal value: each pixel's perceptual luminance is mapped to a colour along an editable gradient, so shadows take the left-end colour and highlights take the right. The default black-to-white gradient desaturates to luminance, which is why a Gradient Map always changes the image and never reports itself as a no-op.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
PresetB/W, Sepia, Duotone, Heat, Cyanotype(bar stays editable)Loads a starting gradient. Your current Reverse state is kept.
Gradient stopsposition 0 to 1, up to 8 stopsblack at 0, white at 1Drag handles under the bar to move stops.
Stop coloursRGB colourselected stop's colourSets the colour of the selected stop.
Remove stopbutton (enabled with more than 2 stops)n/aRemoves the selected stop.
Reverseon / offoffMirrors the mapping so highlights take the left colour.

Presets:

PresetGradient
B/Wblack to white
Sepiadark brown through tan to cream
Duotonedeep indigo through magenta to warm yellow
Heatblack through dark red and orange to pale yellow
Cyanotypedeep blue to pale cyan

Tips:

  • Click the bar to add a stop. It samples the existing gradient, so it is invisible until you drag it or recolour it.
  • Drag a stop handle to move it; stops stay between their neighbours.
  • The help line reads "Click the bar to add a stop · drag a stop to move it."
  • The bar always shows the raw stop layout; Reverse only flips how tones are mapped onto it, so a handle always sits under the colour it controls.

Gaussian Blur

Filter ▸ Gaussian Blur

Softens the layer with a true Gaussian blur. It blurs in premultiplied space so transparent areas do not bleed dark or coloured haloes into your artwork, and edges clamp (replicate the border pixel). The radius is the Gaussian sigma in pixels.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Radius (px)0.0 to 100.04.0Blur amount (Gaussian sigma). Below 0.5 it does nothing.

Notes:

  • The live preview uses a fast downsampled proxy so a large radius on a big canvas stays interactive; the committed result always uses the exact full-resolution blur. The proxy is sized so the preview matches the result at small radii too.
  • Blur is the one filter that moves alpha, so it can soften edges. With a feathered selection, its edge mixes alpha too.
  • Unlike the other filters, blur reads neighbouring rows, so even with a selection active it runs over the whole canvas and only writes inside the selection (giving a continuous blur right up to the selection edge).

Brightness / Contrast

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Brightness / Contrast

A quick, familiar pair of sliders. Brightness adds an even tonal lift or drop; Contrast steepens or flattens the tones around mid-grey. At the extreme, contrast -1 collapses everything to a uniform grey.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Brightness-1.0 to 1.00.0Shifts every tone up or down.
Contrast-1.0 to 1.00.0Steepens (positive) or flattens (negative) tones around mid-grey.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores both sliders to 0.

Invert

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Invert

Inverts every colour: each channel becomes 255 minus itself. Alpha is left unchanged. There are no options, so this item has no ellipsis. The dialog shows a short description plus Apply and Cancel, and previews immediately on open. Invert always changes the image, so it is never treated as a no-op.

Posterize

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Posterize

Reduces each channel to a small number of evenly spaced tones for a banded, screen-printed look. The darkest tone stays pure black and the lightest stays pure white, so the full contrast range is kept.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Tones2 to 646Number of output tones per channel.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores the default of 6 tones.

Threshold

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Threshold

Forces every pixel to pure black or pure white by a single brightness threshold. Pixels at or above the cutoff become white; below it, black. Useful for cleaning up line art or making a quick high-contrast mask. Threshold always changes the image, so it is never treated as a no-op.

This is the same operation as the Threshold adjustment layer (Layer ▸ New ▸ New Adjustment Layer). The menu entry here bakes the result into the layer; the adjustment layer stays live and can be re-edited or removed later. It was called Binarize in earlier releases.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Threshold0.0 to 1.00.5Brightness cutoff: at or above becomes white, below becomes black.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores the default threshold of 0.5.

Halftone

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Halftone turns continuous tone into a screen of dots, the way print and screentone do. Frequency is set in lines per inch against the document's resolution, with an angle and a dot shape, and the result previews live like every other adjustment.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Frequency (lpi)10 to 20085Lines per inch against the document's resolution. 60 is coarse newsprint, 85 a standard comic screen, 133 fine magazine work. A caption under the slider says what that works out to in pixels per dot.
Angle0 to 90 degrees45Screen rotation. 45 degrees is the traditional single-colour angle.
Density0.25 to 2.01.0Dot gain: pushes every dot bigger or smaller at the same tone.
ShapeRound, Square, LineRoundThe dot the screen lays down.
Resetbuttonn/aRestores every Halftone value.

Sharpen

Filter ▸ Sharpen is an unsharp mask: it subtracts a blurred copy of the layer from itself, so edges gain local contrast without the whole picture lifting. Amount sets the strength, Radius the size of the local neighborhood, Lightness only sharpens brightness edges without color rims, and Threshold skips changes below a level so flat areas stay untouched. The same controls drive the live Sharpen adjustment layer.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Amount0.0 to 4.01.0How strongly the edge contrast is pushed. 0 does nothing.
Radius (px)0.5 to 20.02.0The blur radius the mask is built from: small for fine detail, large for broad shape.
Lightness onlyon / offoffSharpens the brightness edges only and leaves color alone, so a hue edge grows no colored rim.
Threshold0 to 2550Skips changes below this level, so flat areas stay untouched. 0 sharpens every pixel.

Lens Blur

Filter ▸ Lens Blur blurs through a real aperture shape, so highlights bloom into bright discs instead of smearing into grey. Use it for depth-of-field looks; Gaussian Blur remains the neutral softening blur.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Radius (px)1 to 1008The aperture disc's radius: how far a bright speck spreads.

Motion Blur

Filter ▸ Motion Blur smears along a chosen angle and distance, for speed lines, movement and streaked light.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Angle0 to 180 degrees0The direction of the smear.
Distance (px)2 to 20020How far the smear reaches.

Median

Filter ▸ Median replaces each pixel with the median of its neighbourhood, or with a chosen percentile, which removes speckle and scan noise while keeping edges crisp. It is the usual cleanup for a scanned page before Threshold.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Radius (px)1 to 1003The disc of neighbours each pixel is ranked against.
Percentile0.0 to 100.050.0Which rank to keep. 50 is the median and despeckles; 0 keeps the darkest neighbour and thickens ink; 100 keeps the lightest and thins it.

Emboss

Filter ▸ Emboss turns the layer into a relief lit from a chosen angle, for stamped and carved textures.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Light angle0 to 360 degrees135Where the light falls.
Strength0.1 to 4.01.0How deep the relief cuts.

Edge Detect

Filter ▸ Edge Detect keeps only the edges of the layer, which pulls line work out of a painting or a photo.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Invert (dark lines on white)on / offoffOff gives light edges on black, the raw Sobel gradient; on flips it to dark lines on white, the usable line-art form.

Color to Alpha

Image ▸ Adjustments ▸ Color to Alpha turns a chosen colour transparent, GIMP style: pixels near that colour become see-through in proportion to how close they are, so a white paper background lifts off a scanned drawing while the ink stays solid and the anti-aliased edges keep their partial coverage.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Colourany sRGB colourwhiteThe colour dissolved into transparency.
Transparency threshold0.0 to 1.00.0Pixels at or below this raw alpha become fully transparent.
Opacity threshold0.0 to 1.01.0Pixels at or above this raw alpha keep full opacity.

Rotate Canvas

Image ▸ Rotate Canvas turns or mirrors the whole document, every layer, mask and selection with it, without resampling: Rotate 90 Clockwise, Rotate 90 Counterclockwise, Rotate 180, Flip Horizontal and Flip Vertical. The 90 degree turns are disabled in a Book, because they would swap the page dimensions. View ▸ Mirror only mirrors the view; this changes the pixels.

New in 0.9.0

  • More filters. Lens Blur, Motion Blur, Median, Emboss and Edge Detect join Gaussian Blur and Sharpen under Filter, and Color to Alpha joins the adjustments.
  • Rotate Canvas. Image ▸ Rotate Canvas turns or flips the whole document without resampling.
  • Levels and Curves. Levels gains an Auto button, and the Curves histogram follows the channel you are editing.
  • Nearest at 200 percent. The display switches to nearest sampling at 2x zoom and above, so hard pixel edges stay hard while you judge a filter.
  • Halftone. A Halftone filter under Image ▸ Adjustments renders print-style dot shading.
  • Threshold is called Threshold. The filter previously named Binarize now uses the name every other painting app uses, including everywhere Help refers to it.
  • Levels opens on every document. The Levels editor could sit on "computing histogram..." forever on some documents.

Vector mode

Vector Mode and Tools

Vector mode is Limner's Illustrator-style workspace for drawing editable shapes. Instead of painting pixels, you build resolution-independent paths (cubic Bezier curves) with fills and strokes, then keep editing the points, the colours and the line weight forever without losing quality. It is a workspace of its own, built the way Illustrator is built: its own File, Edit, Layer, Object, Path, Type, Select, View, Window and Help menus, a tool strip in Illustrator's order with section captions, a Properties panel that follows what you select, and the standard keys. This page covers entering Vector mode and every tool on the Vector strip.

For editing what you have drawn (appearance, anchors, transforms, booleans, groups, symbols, text, artboards, guides, export) see Vector Editing and Output. For how vector layers sit in the document, see Layers. For tracing a picture into vector art, see Vectorize Layer. Vector mode is a Limner Plus feature, free with a beta key on the desktop and unlocked on iPad during the beta.

Entering Vector mode

The workspace switcher sits at the right end of the menu bar: click Vector, or press Ctrl+Shift+M to cycle the workspaces. The Home screen's Vector quick start (2048 × 2048 px) and File ▸ New Vector Document... start a Vector document directly; New Document offers the same page presets in px, pt or mm.

Switching an Illustration document into Vector mode asks what you mean: Switch this document re-lenses the same document (your raster layers stay exactly as they are), New Vector document starts a fresh Vector document and leaves this one untouched, and Cancel stays put. Tick "Don't ask again when switching workspace mode" to make it immediate. Workspace is set per document.

What changes when you switch

  • The menu bar. Image and Filter give way to Object, Path and Type, a Layer menu joins the bar after Edit, and the other menus gain their Vector items. Every command keeps the same name, shortcut and availability wherever you reach it: a menu, the command palette (Ctrl+K), a right-click on the canvas, or the shortcut editor. See Menus Reference.
  • The tool strip swaps to the Vector strip below, with Select, Shapes, Draw, Modify, Type, View and Color captions (View ▸ Show ▸ Tool Strip Captions) and a Fill-over-Stroke stack at its foot.
  • The panels swap to the Vector set: the Properties hub, and Stroke, Appearance, Align, Typography, Symbols, Pathfinder, All Vector Tools, Artboards and Export Sets, Advanced Authoring, Object Layers, Swatches and Gradient, plus the shared Layers, Color and Reference panels. Window ▸ Vector Workspaces offers three presets: Vector Essentials, Node Editing and Lettering.
  • The page. A new Vector document has no Paper layer; its page colour is a property of the document, set in the Properties panel's Document section (presets, None for a transparent page, or the full picker). Illustration documents that switch keep their Paper layer.

What does not change: switching never converts your layer stack. Raster layers stay raster, graphic layers stay vector, and the layer keys and hotkeys of the raster workspace give way to the Vector letter keys below.

The Vector tool strip

The strip follows Illustrator's order in seven captioned sections. A slot with more than one tool shows a small corner triangle: the first click selects the tool shown, a second click (or a double-click) opens the flyout. Window ▸ Customize Vector Toolbar (the All Vector Tools panel) regroups the strip. Every tool's options bar carries the Fill and Stroke swatches and the stroke width (W, 0 to 4096 px) beside the tool's own controls, and the status bar names the modifiers of the tool in hand.

SectionSlotTools
Select1Selection (V), Object Lasso (Q)
Select2Direct Select (A)
Shapes3Rectangle (M), Ellipse (L), Polygon, Star, Spiral
Shapes4Line (\)
Draw5Pen (P), Curvature (Shift+`)
Draw6Pencil (N), Vector Brush (B)
Draw7Eraser (E), Scissors (C), Knife (K), Join
Modify8Shape Builder (Shift+M), Pathfinder (F)
Modify9Width (Shift+W)
Modify10Rotate (R), Scale (S), Reflect (O)
Type11Type (T)
View12Artboard (Shift+O)
View13Hand (H)
View14Zoom (Z)
Color15Gradient (G), Style Picker (I)

Tool letter keys

In Vector mode a bare letter picks a tool, Illustrator style, and the standard chords are bound: Ctrl+Y for the outline view (Soft Proof keeps Ctrl+Y outside Vector mode), Ctrl+R for the rulers, Ctrl+U for Smart Guides, Ctrl+[ and Ctrl+] to arrange, Ctrl+2 and Ctrl+3 to lock and hide, Ctrl+7 to clip, Ctrl+8 for a compound path, Ctrl+J to join paths, Ctrl+Shift+O to outline text, and X, Shift+X, D and / on the fill and stroke (target, swap, defaults, remove). Polygon, Star, Spiral and Join have no letter; pick them from the strip. Holding Ctrl or Alt suppresses the letter keys so those chords stay free. All of these are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Modifier keys

The Illustrator modifiers apply throughout: Shift constrains a dragged shape to a square, a circle or a 45 degree line, Alt draws from the centre, Alt-dragging a selection makes a duplicate, the arrow keys nudge the selection or the selected anchors by 1 px (Shift for 10 px), and Up and Down change a polygon's sides, a star's points or a spiral's turns mid-drag.

The Fill and Stroke stack

At the foot of the strip, two overlapping swatches show the fill (front) and the stroke (behind) that new shapes will take, or the selected object's. Click one to target it, so the Color, Swatches and Gradient panels and a click on a swatch apply to it; X targets the other, Shift+X swaps the two paints, D restores the defaults (white fill, black 1 px stroke) and / removes the targeted paint. The pair mirrors the Color panel's Fill / Stroke target.

Where the vector tools draw

The vector tools accept canvas input only on a vector (graphic) layer.

  • The creation tools (Pen, Pencil, and the live shapes) are forgiving: if the active layer is not a vector layer, committing your first object creates a new vector layer automatically, so the shape always has a home.
  • The editing tools (Selection, Direct Select, Scissors, Join, Gradient) act on path objects that already live on the active vector layer. If the active layer has no vector content, they have nothing to grab and do nothing.
  • The filled-shape tools (Knife, Pathfinder, Shape Builder, Eraser) reshape existing filled objects on the active vector layer. Knife and the Eraser reshape filled shapes and also cut open, stroke-only paths; Shape Builder needs filled paths, so outline a stroke-only path first.

A locked active layer blocks all of these.

The raster tools (the Brush, the Eraser, filters, Free Transform and the rest of the Illustration tools) do not paint on a vector layer: its pixels are drawn from its objects, so the next redraw would wipe the change, and the status bar says so, for example "Painting is not available on a vector layer". To paint on the artwork as pixels, choose Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer: the layer keeps exactly what it shows and becomes a raster layer, and Undo brings the objects back. The next shape you draw then goes on a new vector layer. See Painting on a fill or adjustment layer.

While a Vector tool is in hand the canvas shows what it is doing: a small badge follows the pointer with the size of a shape being dragged or the angle of a rotation, chips mark snapped anchors, guides and edges, and the status bar reads the modifiers (Shift to constrain, Alt from the centre, and so on).

Selection (the black arrow)

Letter key V. The Selection tool picks, moves, scales and rotates whole objects, and it is the default tool in a new Vector document.

  • Click an object to select it. Shift-click adds more; Alt-drag duplicates.
  • Drag empty canvas to marquee-select every object the box touches, as in Illustrator.
  • Drag inside the bounding box to move the selection; drag a corner or edge handle to scale (Shift keeps the proportions, Alt scales about the centre); drag the rotation handle above the box to rotate (Shift snaps to 15 degrees).
  • Double-click a group to enter it (group isolation) and edit its members; double-click empty canvas or use Object ▸ Exit Isolation to leave.

The options bar shows the selection's width and height, a Transform menu (numeric transform, reflect), an Align menu and Group. The Properties panel follows the selection with Shape, Transform, Appearance, Align and Quick Actions sections. See Vector Editing and Output.

Object Lasso

Letter key Q, in the Selection slot. Draw a loop and every object inside it is selected, which is the quick way to grab an irregular cluster that a marquee would have to include neighbours to reach. Shift adds to the selection.

Direct Select (the white arrow)

Letter key A. Direct Select edits the inside of a path: individual anchors and their tangent handles.

  • Drag an anchor to move that point (both of its handles move with it). Drag a handle tip to reshape the curve into and out of the anchor.
  • Drag the live-corner widget on a corner to round it; the Corners section sets the style (Round, Chamfer or Inverted) and the radius.
  • Marquee-drag to select several anchors. With two or more selected, a transform box with corner, edge and rotate handles frames them: drag a handle to scale the anchors (Shift keeps proportions, Alt scales about the centre) or rotate them (Shift snaps to 45 degrees), one undo step.
  • The options bar counts the selected anchors and offers the Nodes menu: Corner, Smooth, Symmetric or Auto anchors, Break at anchors, Join endpoints and Join paths. The Properties panel's Anchor section adds Align X / Y and Space X / Y for the selected anchors.

On iPad the anchor and handle hit zones are larger than on the desktop, and a finger can drag anchors even with Finger painting off. Tangent handles appear only when they are long enough to grab on screen (about 6 screen pixels); zoom in to edit very short ones. The full anchor workflow is in Vector Editing and Output.

Pen

Letter key P. The Pen draws and edits cubic Bezier paths.

  • Click to drop a corner anchor (a sharp point). Click and drag to drop a smooth anchor with mirrored tangent handles, so the path curves through it.
  • Hold Alt while dragging to break handle symmetry (drag one side independently). Hold Shift to constrain to 15 degree steps, or, with Smart Guides on, to lock to a level or plumb alignment with an existing anchor.
  • Close the path by clicking the first anchor; the closing click can itself be a drag to curve the final segment. A rubber-band curve previews the next segment as you move.
  • Click an existing anchor of the path being drawn to remove it, or a segment to add one: adding, deleting and converting anchors are Pen behaviours, not separate tools.

The options bar offers Finish, Close path and Cancel path while a draft is open. The draft commits when you close it, press Enter, or switch tool or workspace; Esc discards it. An open path takes a stroke only; a closed path takes the default fill plus the stroke. New anchors snap to whatever View ▸ Snap To ▸ Snap To allows (anchors, guides, grid, object edges).

Curvature

Key Shift+`, in the Pen slot. The Curvature tool places smooth points and bends the path through them, Illustrator style: click to add a point and the curve re-fits through every point you have placed, so a wavy line takes a few clicks and no handle dragging. Double-click a point to make it a corner. Finish, Close path and Cancel path sit on the options bar as for the Pen.

Pencil

Letter key N. The Pencil draws a freehand line that is fitted to a smooth, editable Bezier path on release. Draw over a span of a selected path and the Pencil redraws that span instead of starting a new path.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Fidelity0.0 to 10.02.5Higher is smoother and uses fewer anchors; lower follows the stroke more closely.
Fill new pencil strokeson / offoffGive a new path the current fill as well as the stroke. In the Pencil options popup.
Reshape selected pathson / offonDrawing across a selected path replaces the span you draw over.
Close paths when ends are within0 to 100 px12A stroke that ends near its start closes into a shape.

Vector Brush

Letter key B, in the Pencil slot. The Vector Brush draws like the Pencil but paints a filled shape the width of the stroke, so a calligraphic mark stays one editable object with its own fill. It shares the Pencil's Fidelity and options popup. (B in the raster workspaces is the Brush tool; the two never conflict because the letter keys are per workspace.)

Live shapes

The shape tools drag out parametric "live" shapes: the object remembers its parameters (sides, radius, corner rounding, arc angles) so you can keep adjusting them after drawing, in the Properties panel's Shape section. Click instead of dragging to type a size. Shift constrains the proportions and Alt draws from the centre. Every live shape has corner styles, and any of them becomes a plain path with Object ▸ Convert to Path.

Rectangle

Letter key M. Drag out a rectangle. Round its corners with the live-corner widget, the Corner radius slider, or the Corners section, which also offers Chamfer and Inverted styles per corner.

Ellipse

Letter key L. Drag out an ellipse. With it selected, the Shape section has a Mode row: Whole (the default), or Arc, Chord and Slice, which turn the ellipse into a part of itself with Start and End angles (degrees, clockwise from the right); a pie widget on the canvas drags the same angles. An Arc is an open curve, a Chord joins its ends with a straight line, and a Slice joins them through the centre. The part remembers its centre, so editing it never drifts.

Line

Letter key \ (backslash). Drag out a straight line, drawn with a stroke and no fill. Shift snaps the angle to 15 degree steps.

Polygon

No letter key. Drag out a regular polygon; Up and Down during the drag add or remove sides.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Sides3 to 205Number of sides.
Cornerpx0Rounds every vertex by that many pixels (a value larger than the shape can host rounds as far as it can).

Star

No letter key. Drag out a star.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Points3 to 205Number of points.
Inner0.1 to 0.90.42Inner radius as a fraction of the outer radius (how deep the points are).
Cornerpx0Rounds every vertex.

Spiral

No letter key. Drag out a spiral: an open path that winds from its inner radius out to the edge of the drag, eight smooth anchors per turn. Up and Down during the drag add or remove half a turn. A spiral has no fill until you give it one.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Turns0.5 to 203How many times the spiral winds.
Inner0 to 0.90Where the spiral starts, as a fraction of its radius.

Eraser (Vector Eraser)

Letter key E. The Vector Eraser subtracts a round band from the filled shapes it crosses, leaving editable vector results. A ring at the cursor previews the band; on release, every filled shape the band crossed is replaced by its remainder, or removed if fully erased. Filled shapes lose the band from their fill; an open, stroke-only path is cut into separate pieces where the band crosses it, and a closed stroke-only loop opens with a gap. With objects selected only they are erased (a selected group is recursed into its editable member paths); with nothing selected, every unlocked filled shape the band crosses is.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Size1 to 100 px16Width of the erase band. [ and ] change it live, from 2 to 500 px.

Scissors

Letter key C. Scissors cut a path at the point you click (within about 6 screen pixels of the outline).

  • Cutting an open path splits it into two independent objects, so each half can be selected and moved on its own.
  • Cutting a closed path opens it in place (it stays one object).

The cut path drops its live-shape parameters (it becomes a plain editable path). Both resulting pieces are left selected so you can edit them immediately with Direct Select. No options bar.

Knife

Letter key K. The Knife slices filled shapes along a cut line you draw across them.

  • Drag a freehand cut line across the canvas. On release, every filled shape the line fully crosses splits into separate closed objects along the cut.
  • Hold Shift while dragging for a straight cut at any angle (the line follows the cursor).
  • Hold Alt while dragging for a straight cut snapped to 15 degree steps, for clean horizontal, vertical, or diagonal cuts.

Filled shapes split into separate closed objects. An open, stroke-only path is cut into separate open paths at every crossing; a stroke-only path that closes on itself is left alone. With objects selected, only the selected shapes are cut (a selected group is recursed into its editable member paths); with nothing selected, every unlocked filled shape the line divides is cut. A cut only happens where the line passes all the way through a shape; a partial slash leaves the shape whole. The new pieces are left selected so you can move or restyle them at once. The options bar shows the modifier reminder, with no other controls.

Join

No letter key (pick from the strip); Path ▸ Join Selected Paths (Ctrl+J) does the same from the menu. Join connects open path endpoints into one continuous path.

  • With two objects selected, Join bridges their nearest open endpoints and merges them into one object.
  • Otherwise, Join acts on the open path under the cursor: it bridges two open ends of that path, or, if the path is a single open run, closes it by connecting its last anchor back to its first.

No options bar.

Shape Builder

Key Shift+M. Shape Builder merges or removes the atomic regions formed where two or more selected shapes overlap, in the style of Illustrator's Shape Builder.

  • Select two or more overlapping shapes first. Selecting a single group works the same way: the group's member paths enter the partition with their transforms composed.
  • Hover a region to highlight the atomic area under the cursor.
  • Click or drag across regions to merge the touched ones into a single shape.
  • Alt-click or Alt-drag to delete the touched regions instead.

Anything you do not touch is left as it was. The merged or trimmed result is left selected. The options bar shows a short reminder, with no other controls.

Pathfinder

Letter key F, in the Shape Builder slot. Pathfinder combines selected shapes with boolean and split operations. Its pointer behaves like the Selection tool, and the operations sit on its options bar: Unite, Minus Front and Intersect inline, then Exclude, Minus Back, Divide, Outline, Trim, Merge, Crop, Compound and Release in the More popup. The same operations live in the Pathfinder panel and under Path ▸ Combine Shapes. Each operand is read under its own fill rule, so a compound path keeps its holes. See Pathfinder (boolean operations).

Width

Key Shift+W. The Width tool reshapes a stroke where you drag it: pull outward on a path to widen the stroke at that point, inward to narrow it, and the stroke's width profile follows the handles you have placed. It is the hand-drawn counterpart of the Profile presets in the Stroke panel, and it works on any stroked path.

Rotate, Scale and Reflect

Keys R, S and O, sharing one slot. Each works about a reference point that starts at the selection's centre: drag anywhere to rotate, scale or reflect the selection about it, and drag the reference marker (or click) to put it somewhere else, such as a hinge or a mirror line. Shift constrains to 15 degree steps or proportional scale, and Alt transforms a copy. Scale has a Scale strokes option: on, stroke widths scale with the object; off, they stay put. The Transform section of the Properties panel does the same by numbers.

Type

Letter key T. The Type tool sets text objects and edits them on the canvas with a live caret. Click to start point text, which grows from the point as you type; drag a box to start area text, which wraps inside it; or click a selected path with On path chosen in the options bar to flow text along it. Type ▸ Create Point Text, Create Area Text and Text on Selected Path do the same from the menu. While editing, Done (Ctrl+Enter) commits and Cancel discards; the Typography panel sets the font, size, tracking, leading, alignment and paragraph settings. New text starts at 24 px in black with no stroke. See Text objects.

Artboard

Key Shift+O. Artboards are named rectangles on the canvas that export as separate files. Drag to draw one, drag its edges to resize it or its body to move it, and set its Name, W and H (1 to 100,000 px) in the options bar; Delete removes it. The Artboards and Export panel lists them and their export sets. See Artboards and export sets.

Hand and Zoom

Hand (H) pans the canvas by dragging; holding Space does the same from any tool. Zoom (Z) zooms in on a click, out on an Alt+click, and drags a box to zoom to it. Both live in the View section of the strip; the raster workspaces zoom from the status bar instead.

Gradient

Letter key G. The Gradient tool places and aims a gradient on the object you drag across: the start and end of the drag set the direction and extent of the targeted paint's gradient. Edit the stops, the type (Linear or Radial), the spread and the document's shared gradients in the Gradient panel, which the options bar opens. See Object gradients.

Style Picker

Letter key I, in the Gradient slot. Click an object and its look is lifted onto the selection: choose in the options bar whether to pick the Rendered Color, the Fill, the Stroke or the Whole Style (every fill and stroke, with opacity and blend mode). It is the Vector counterpart of the Eyedropper.

Editable stroke tools (the Object and Line Edit tools)

Limner also has an older, separate "editable strokes" family: brush strokes captured as editable lines on a layer made with Layer ▸ New ▸ New Editable Stroke Layer. Its two tools, Object and Line Edit, live in the Illustration workspace on the Vector slot of the raster strip, not on the Vector strip: Object selects, moves, scales, recolours and redraws whole lines, and Line Edit reshapes them point by point. They are documented with their full options in Vector Editing and Output.

New in 0.9.0

  • A workspace of its own. Vector mode has its own menus, shortcuts, panel presets and a Properties hub; the workspace switcher sits on the menu bar.
  • Eleven more tools. Curvature, Object Lasso, Vector Brush, Width, Rotate, Scale, Reflect, Type, Artboard, Zoom and Style Picker join the strip, in Illustrator's order with captions and real icons.
  • Spiral and ellipse parts. A Spiral shape, and Arc, Chord and Slice modes for the ellipse.
  • Corner styles. Round, Chamfer and Inverted corners on every live shape, and a Corner field for polygons and stars.
  • Faster on dense artwork. Picking and erasing respond faster, editing a path re-renders only the touched region, and a document over the rebuild budget opens as outlines instead of being refused.

Vector Editing and Output

This page covers everything you do after you draw a vector object: its appearance, its anchors, moving and resizing it precisely, combining shapes, grouping, masking, cloning and symbols, text, aligning, guides and artboards, and getting the artwork out as SVG. For drawing the objects in the first place see Vector Mode and Tools.

Most editing happens in the Properties panel, the hub that follows what you select, with deeper panels (Stroke, Appearance, Align, Typography, Symbols, Pathfinder, Artboards and Export Sets, Advanced Authoring, Swatches, Gradient, Object Layers) a "..." click away or under the Window menu. The same commands live in the Object, Path, Type and Select menus and in the canvas context menu, always with the same name and shortcut.

The Properties hub

With nothing selected the panel shows the Document (page size and DPI, the page colour, artboards), the View switches (Grid, Smart Guides, Outline, Rulers, and Snap to Anchors / Guides / Grid / Edges) and the Defaults a new shape is painted with, and Quick Actions (New Graphic Layer, Import SVG as Layers, Artboards and Export Sets...). With an object selected it shows, top to bottom:

  • Shape: the live shape's parameters (size, corner radius, sides, points, arc mode) and the Corners styles; a Remove offset button when a live offset is attached.
  • Transform: the numeric transform, below.
  • Appearance: the ordered fills and strokes, opacity and blend mode, below.
  • Align: align and distribute.
  • Quick Actions: the commands that fit the selection (Group, Make Clipping Mask, Convert to Path, Outline Stroke, Create Symbol and so on).
  • Corners when the selection has editable corners, Group while a group is selected (opacity, blend mode, Isolate, Crops by), Anchor while anchors are selected, and Character and Paragraph for a text object.

Where a section has a deeper panel behind it, its header carries a "..." that opens it: Document to Artboards and export sets, Defaults and Appearance to the Appearance panel, Character to Typography, and Align to the Align panel. The panels wrap or scroll at narrow widths instead of clipping.

The page colour

A Vector document's page is a colour of the document rather than a raster Paper layer. The Document section offers presets, None for a transparent page, and a colour well with the full picker (a picker drag is one undo step). The page is painted under everything, it is saved with the document, and Include page color, in File ▸ Export As… when SVG is chosen, writes it into an SVG as a background rectangle. An Illustration document switched into Vector mode keeps its Paper layer instead: the Document section then shows an eye to hide or show the paper and a Make the page a document color button, which folds a solid-colour Paper layer into the page colour (the layer goes away, the page sits under every layer, and one undo step brings the layer back). A Paper layer that is not one solid colour stays a layer.

Appearance: fills and strokes

Every vector object carries an appearance: an ordered stack of fills and strokes, an object opacity and a blend mode. You edit it in the Properties panel's Appearance section, or in the Appearance and Stroke panels. When nothing is selected the same controls set the defaults that new shapes inherit: a solid white fill and a solid black stroke at width 1.0, with the Fill as the active paint target.

More than one fill or stroke

An object can carry several fills and several strokes, drawn in the order listed: add one with the + at the foot of the Appearance panel, drag rows to reorder them, and switch each on or off. A wide dark stroke under a thin light one gives an outlined line; a pattern fill over a solid one tiles on a colour. The Color, Swatches and Gradient panels and the Fill and Stroke stack act on the targeted row (X targets the other paint, Shift+X swaps them, D restores the defaults, / removes the targeted paint).

Fill and stroke rows

Each row shows a visibility switch, the label, and its paint: a colour swatch (click it to pick), a gradient (edit the ramp in the Gradient panel) or a pattern (a symbol tiled across the paint; see pattern paints). An open path takes a stroke only; a closed path takes the default fill plus stroke.

Stroke shape

The Stroke panel (and the Stroke section of the Appearance panel) holds the weight, alignment, caps and joins, dashes, arrowheads and the width profile of the targeted stroke.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Width0 to 100 px on the Stroke panel's slider, 0 to 4096 px in the numeric field1.0Stroke weight in canvas pixels; W on every Vector tool's options bar is the same value.
AlignCenter, Inside, OutsideCenterWhere the weight sits relative to the path: straddling it, entirely inside a closed shape, or entirely outside.
CapButt, Round, SquareButtHow the ends of an open stroke are drawn.
JoinMiter, Round, BevelMiterHow stroke corners are drawn. A Miter limit field beside it runs 1 to 100 and starts at 4.
DashesSolid, Dashed, Dotted, Dash dot, Long dash, CustomSolidA dash preset, or Custom once you type your own pattern.
Patternlengths in pxfrom the presetThe dash and gap lengths, separated by spaces (6 4, or 4 2 1 2); an odd count repeats.
Offsetpx0Shifts where the pattern starts along the path.
Start, EndNone, Arrow, Triangle, Circle, Square, BarNoneAn arrowhead or end marker on that end of an open path.
ProfileUniform, Taper end, Taper start, Taper both, Bulge, WaveUniformA variable-width stroke: the width follows the profile along the path.
Profile strength0 to 100 percent100How far the profile's thin parts narrow.

A dash preset is sized from the stroke width at the moment you pick it (Dashed on a 2 px stroke is 6 4), and the lengths are then fixed canvas pixels, so they do not follow a later change of weight. On a closed shape the pattern is stretched by the small amount that makes a whole number of repeats fit, so the dashes meet at the seam. An SVG export carries exactly these numbers.

Arrowheads

The Start and End rows put a marker on each end of an open path: an open Arrow, a filled Triangle, a Circle, a Square or a Bar, sized from the stroke width, painted with the stroke, and turned to follow the path's direction at that end. Closed shapes never show them. An SVG export writes them as markers that scale with the stroke; an SVG opened in Limner brings its own markers in as ordinary shapes.

Width profiles

The Profile row makes the stroke's width vary along the path: a taper at either end or both, a bulge in the middle, or a wave, with Profile strength setting how thin the narrow parts get. The Width tool shapes the same profile by hand, point by point. The band is drawn in the stroke's paint and follows every edit of the path; on a closed shape it keeps its middle clear. A profiled stroke is one continuous band, so its caps, joins, dashes and arrowheads are switched off until you choose Uniform again. An SVG export writes the band as a filled shape, so it looks the same everywhere.

Object opacity and blend mode

With an object selected, Opacity (0 to 100 percent) and a Blend mode sit at the foot of the Appearance section. The blend mode is the object's own: a Multiply shape darkens what is under it, on the same graphic layer or below, exactly as a Multiply layer would.

Appearance styles

Object ▸ Appearance and Styles ▸ Save Appearance Style... stores the selected object's whole appearance under a name; Apply Appearance Style... puts a saved style onto the selection. The Style Picker tool does the same from another object on the canvas.

Corner styles

Every live shape's Corners section offers three styles per corner, Round, Chamfer (a straight cut) and Inverted (a scooped corner), with a Radius in pixels; the live-corner widget on the canvas drags the radius directly. Polygons and stars round every vertex from their Corner field. A rounded shape stays live: its size and corner radius remain editable until you convert it to a path.

Anchors and handles

Every anchor is one of four kinds, shown and changed in the Properties panel's Anchor section (or Path ▸ Nodes) while anchors are selected with Direct Select:

KindHandlesDragging one handle
CornerIndependent; a sharp point.Moves only that handle.
SmoothIn line, each with its own length.Turns the other to stay in line; its length is kept.
SymmetricIn line and equal.Mirrors the other.
AutoAimed along the neighbours and a third of each span long, rebuilt after every move.Makes the anchor Smooth.

A Pen click makes a Corner, a Pen drag a Smooth anchor, and Alt while dragging a handle always breaks it to a Corner. Converting a Corner to Smooth or Symmetric grows handles tangent to the neighbours; converting to Corner retracts them. The same section works on the selection as a whole: Align X and Align Y bring the selected anchors to one x or y (their average), Space X and Space Y spread three or more anchors evenly (the outer two stay put), Break opens the path at every selected anchor, and Join joins two selected open ends: the two ends of one path close it, the ends of two paths bridge with a straight segment. With two or more anchors selected a transform box frames them; drag its handles to scale or rotate the anchors together. Deleting an anchor re-fits the neighbouring handles so the curve keeps its drawn shape.

The Transform panel (numeric)

The Transform section gives you exact numeric control over the selection. With nothing selected it shows "Select an object."

Reference origin

A 3 by 3 grid of dots (labelled "Ref") picks the reference origin: the point that stays fixed while W/H, Rotate, and Shear are applied. The grid is numbered 0 to 8 row by row.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Ref (9 point origin)0 to 84 (center)The anchor that stays put during resize, rotate, and shear.

Position and size

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Xunboundedfrom bounding boxHorizontal position of the reference point.
Yunboundedfrom bounding boxVertical position of the reference point.
W0 to 1,000,000from bounding boxObject width in pixels.
H0 to 1,000,000from bounding boxObject height in pixels.
Constrain (link)on / offoffLocks the W to H ratio so they scale together.

X, Y, W, and H are drag values: drag on the field or type a number. The link toggle next to W/H constrains their proportions, and Scale strokes decides whether stroke widths scale with the object or stay put. Object ▸ Transform ▸ Transform... opens the same numbers, and Reflect Horizontally / Vertically mirror the selection in place.

Rotate and Shear (live preview)

Rotate and Shear are drag value fields that preview as you scrub about the reference point, then commit as a single undo step on release. Each resets to 0 after it applies, so the next value is applied fresh rather than cumulatively.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Rotate-360 to 360 degrees0 (resets after apply)Rotates the selection about the reference point.
Shear-85 to 85 degrees0 (resets after apply)Slants the selection about the reference point.
Tip
"Rotate / Shear preview as you scrub; release to apply (about the reference point)."

Pathfinder (boolean operations)

Pathfinder combines two or more selected objects into one shape. It is now a tool as well as a Properties section: select the Pathfinder tool (its slot in the tool strip is shared with Shape Builder, or press F in Vector mode) and its operations appear on the tool-options bar at the top of the canvas. The same operations also live in the Properties panel's Pathfinder section, so you can run them from either place.

Select at least two objects, then click an operation. The operands are taken in z-order (bottom to top), and the result replaces them where the topmost operand sat.

OperationWhat it does
UniteMerge into one shape.
Minus FrontSubtract the upper shapes from the back shape.
IntersectKeep only the overlapping area.
ExcludeKeep the non-overlapping areas (XOR).
Minus BackSubtract the lower shapes from the front shape.
DivideSplit into one object per overlapping region.
OutlineSplit boundaries into stroked edges (no fill).

Divide breaks the overlapping shapes apart at every intersection: each distinct region becomes its own separate closed object, so you can recolour or move the pieces individually. Outline discards the fills and turns each boundary segment into its own stroked edge, leaving the artwork as line work. Both Divide and Outline produce several objects rather than a single combined shape. Three more operations sit in the panel's More group and under Path ▸ Combine Shapes: Trim removes every part of the lower shapes that the upper ones hide, Merge does the same and then unites touching pieces of one colour, and Crop keeps only what falls inside the top shape.

For Unite, Minus Front, Intersect, Exclude, and Minus Back, the result keeps the front (topmost) object's appearance, except Minus Front, which keeps the back object's appearance. The flattened boolean result is refit to smooth, corner preserving curves, so curved unions and intersections stay clean and right angles stay sharp.

Unite, Minus Front, Intersect, Exclude, Minus Back, and Divide need two or more objects; Outline acts on one or more. If the Properties section reads "Select two or more objects to combine," you do not have enough selected.

Compound Path

A compound path merges several paths into a single object whose overlaps punch see-through holes, using the even-odd fill rule. This is how you make letter-style cut-outs, like the hole in an O or the counter of an A, where an inner shape needs to show the background through it.

Both buttons sit on the Pathfinder tool-options bar (and are labelled Make Compound / Release Compound in the Properties Pathfinder section):

ButtonEnabled whenWhat it does
Compound (Make)2 or more objects selectedMerges the selection into one path so overlaps punch holes (even-odd).
Release1 or more objects selectedSplits a compound path back into its separate objects.

Make the outer shape and the hole shapes, select them all, then click Compound; the overlapping inner shapes become holes. Release reverses it, returning the pieces to ordinary separate objects.

Path operations

The Path menu, and the Path block of the Pathfinder panel, work on one or more selected objects.

Offset Path and Live Offset

Object ▸ Offset and Live Offset... (also under Path) adds a concentric copy of each selected object, grown or shrunk by a distance (-2000 to 2000 px, default 10). The originals are kept and the copies become the selection, one undo step.

Live Offset draws the selection as its outline offset by the distance while the path itself stays editable: reshape the path with Direct Select and the outline follows; change the distance later in the Shape section, where Remove offset returns the plain path. A live offset draws, exports and selects as its outline, and a live shape becomes a path when it takes one.

Simplify

Path ▸ Simplify... refits each selected path with fewer anchors while staying within a tolerance of the original curve (0.1 to 50 px, default 1, which is invisible at 100 percent). Real corners are kept as corners, smooth spans come back as smooth anchors, closed paths stay closed, and a path that would not lose an anchor is left alone. It is the usual cleanup after the Pencil, Image Trace or a Pathfinder result.

Outline Stroke, Close Paths and Convert to Path

Outline Stroke converts each selected object's stroke into a filled path, keeping its cap, join and miter limit, so the stroke can be edited as geometry or keep its weight through later scaling. Close Paths closes each selected open path with a straight segment. Convert to Path turns a live shape, a text object or any other special object into a plain editable path. Join Selected Paths (Ctrl+J) bridges the nearest open ends of the selected paths.

Grouping, clipping and masks

Object ▸ Group (Ctrl+G) combines the selection into one group and Ungroup (Ctrl+Shift+G) breaks it apart; the same buttons sit in the Selection tool's options bar and in Quick Actions. Object ▸ Lock and Hide hides or locks the selection (Ctrl+3, Ctrl+2) and shows or unlocks everything in scope (Ctrl+Alt+3, Ctrl+Alt+2), and Object ▸ Arrange moves the selection through the stacking order (Ctrl+] and Ctrl+[, with Shift for the top and bottom).

Group opacity, blend mode and isolation

With a group selected the Properties panel's Group section carries its own Opacity, Blend mode and Isolate switch. They apply to the group as one unit, the way a layer folder composites: two overlapping members of a 50 percent group do not double-darken where they overlap, and a Multiply group multiplies its combined result once. Leave them at 100, Normal and off and the group renders member by member. Members keep their own blend modes inside the unit, and a group nested inside another such group composites as its own unit with its own blend mode.

Clipping masks

Object ▸ Clipping and Masks ▸ Make Clipping Mask (Ctrl+7) turns the selection into a clip group: the topmost selected object becomes the clip path and only the artwork inside it shows; the clip path itself is not drawn. Release Clipping Mask (Ctrl+Alt+7) clears it. The topmost object must be a single shape, not a group.

Masks by luminance and alpha

Make Luminance Mask is Make Clipping Mask with the top object used as a luminance mask: the artwork shows where the mask object is light and hides where it is dark, so a gradient on the mask gives a soft fade. With a clip group selected, the Group section's Crops by row switches between Outline, Alpha mask (the mask object's opacity decides) and Luminance mask. To reuse one shape as the mask of several groups, make each group's top object a clone of a master shape.

Clones

Object ▸ Symbols and Clones ▸ Create Linked Clone makes a linked copy of each selected object. The copy draws with the original's shape and appearance and follows every edit you make to the original, while keeping its own position, rotation and scale. A clone's nodes cannot be edited directly: edit the original, or Unlink Clone to turn it into an ordinary object with its current shape. Select Clone Original finds the source; Select ▸ By Type ▸ Linked Clones finds every clone. The Object Layers panel marks clones with a link icon. Deleting the original leaves its clones as ordinary objects, and clones of clones are allowed.

Group isolation

To edit inside a group without ungrouping it, double-click the group (or Object ▸ Edit Group in Isolation). The Properties panel shows an Inside group banner with an Exit button; leave by clicking Exit, choosing Object ▸ Exit Isolation, or double-clicking empty canvas.

Symbols

A symbol is artwork stored once in the document and placed any number of times. Select the artwork and choose Object ▸ Symbols and Clones ▸ Create Symbol (the Symbols panel and Quick Actions have the same command): the selection becomes the definition and is replaced by an instance, a group tagged with the symbol (a diamond marks it in the Object Layers panel). Place adds another instance; move, rotate and scale instances freely. To change every instance at once, open one instance, edit its contents, then Redefine Symbol. Detach Symbol turns an instance back into an ordinary group; deleting a symbol does the same for all its instances. Rename a symbol by editing the name under Selected instance in the Symbols panel while one of its instances is selected.

Pattern paints

A symbol can also be a paint: the Pattern row of a fill or stroke tiles a symbol across the paint, the tile being the symbol's own bounds. Tile scale and Tile angle place the tiling about the object's origin, and redefining the symbol changes every tiling that uses it. An SVG export writes the tiling as a pattern, and an SVG with pattern fills opens with them as symbols and pattern paints.

Text objects

A text object is editable text living in a graphic layer: its letters are real paths that fill, stroke, clip, clone, tile and export like any other object, and its words and styling can be retyped at any time. The Type tool (T) sets three kinds and edits all of them on the canvas with a live caret:

  • Point text grows from the point you click as you type (Type ▸ Create Point Text).
  • Area text wraps inside the box you drag (Type ▸ Create Area Text); drag the box's handles to reflow it.
  • Text on a path flows along a selected path (Type ▸ Text on Selected Path).

The Typography panel (Type ▸ Typography...) sets the font family, bold and italic, size, tracking, line spacing, alignment and paragraph settings; the Properties panel's Text section shows the same for the selected object. Text is shaped as the raster Text tool shapes it (ligatures, joining scripts, right-to-left, real kerning), and a character the font lacks is drawn from another installed font that has it. Characters can be styled on their own (bold, italic, size) from the Type tool's options bar over a selection in the words box; see Styling part of the text. A document with styled characters needs the version of Limner that introduced them. Convert Text to Paths (Ctrl+Shift+O) turns the letters into ordinary paths that can be node-edited; the text can no longer be retyped afterwards. Text objects appear in the Object Layers panel with the rest of the drawing, and export to SVG as path geometry rather than as live SVG text.

Align and distribute

The Align section (and the Align panel, Object ▸ Align and Distribute...) lines objects up or spaces them evenly. Choose what to align to, select the objects, then click a button.

Align toWhat the buttons align against
SelectionThe selected objects' shared bounding box (the default).
PageThe canvas edges and centre. One object is enough.
Active artboardThe active artboard's edges and centre. One object is enough, and an artboard must be active.
First selectedThe object you selected first; it stays put and the others come to it.
Last selectedThe object you selected last; it stays put.

Align

ButtonWhat it does
LeftAlign left edges.
CenterAlign horizontal centres.
RightAlign right edges.
TopAlign top edges.
MiddleAlign vertical centres.
BottomAlign bottom edges.

Distribute

Distribute needs three or more objects and always works within the selection's own extremes: the two outer objects stay where they are.

ButtonWhat it does
HorizontalEven horizontal spacing of centres.
VerticalEven vertical spacing of centres.
Gaps HEqual horizontal whitespace between neighbours.
Gaps VEqual vertical whitespace between neighbours.

Equal centres and equal gaps are the same only when the objects are the same size; with a wide object between two narrow ones, Gaps is the one that makes the spaces look even.

Rulers and guides

View ▸ Toggle Rulers (Ctrl+R) shows rulers along the top and left edges of the canvas, in the document's pixels. Drag out of a ruler to place a guide, drag a guide to move it, and use View ▸ Guides for Show / Hide Guides, New Horizontal Guide, New Vertical Guide and Clear Guides. Guides are saved with the document, they never export, and the Snap to Guides switch makes every tool snap to them. The Illustration workspace's rulers (linear, parallel, radial, concentric, symmetry, perspective) are the drawing aids described in Construction Aids and are a different thing.

Snapping

View ▸ Snap To ▸ Snap To (also the Snap to row of the Properties panel's View section) chooses what every Vector tool snaps to while you draw, place or drag: Anchors (the other objects' anchor points), Guides (the ruler guides), Grid (the View grid's lines, shown or not, at the spacing set in View ▸ Show) and Object edges (the other objects' and the artboard's edges and centers). A snapped point shows a small cross. The Pen's new anchors, a dragged anchor under Direct Select, the corners of a dragged shape and a moved selection's edges and centre all snap; an anchor within reach wins, otherwise a guide or edge takes each axis, otherwise the grid. Anchors and Guides are on by default.

Smart Guides

Smart Guides give you alignment hints and snapping while you move or draw vector objects. Toggle them with View ▸ Snap To ▸ Smart Guides or Ctrl+U (rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts).

When on, Smart Guides:

  • Snap the Pen tool to align (level or plumb) with existing anchors.
  • Snap a moving object into alignment with its neighbours, drawing a transient

green alignment guide while it snaps.

  • Snap Direct Select anchor drags to alignment.

The on screen snap distance is about 8 pixels (scaled by zoom).

Artboards and export sets

An artboard is a named rectangle on the canvas that exports as a file of its own, so one document can hold a logo's square, wide and stacked versions, or every icon of a set. Draw them with the Artboard tool (Shift+O), or add and name them in the Artboards and Export Sets panel (Object ▸ Artboards and Export Sets...). The Document section of the Properties panel counts them, and the artboard edges and centres take part in snapping.

An export set is a recipe: a name, a scope (the whole document, the selected objects, or one artboard), a format (PNG or SVG), and a scale from 0.1x to 8x. File ▸ Artboards and Export Sets... (Vector mode) opens the panel. Its Export All Sets to New Folder... button runs every set in one go, into a new folder you choose, in the background and without overwriting anything. Artboards and their sets are saved with the document.

Advanced authoring: blends, meshes, envelopes and effects

The Advanced Authoring panel (Object ▸ Advanced Authoring ▸ Advanced Authoring…) holds the objects that are computed from a source rather than drawn directly. Each keeps its source editable: change the source and the result follows.

  • Make Blend (two objects selected) draws the intermediate steps between two shapes, morphing shape and colour across a chosen number of steps.
  • Make Mesh Gradient (one object) lays a grid of colour points over a shape, each with its own colour, for the painterly shading a linear or radial gradient cannot give.
  • Make Envelope (one object) bends the object through a deformable frame: drag the frame's handles and the artwork warps to fit.
  • Make Perspective Deformation (one object) puts the object into a perspective plane.
  • Add Wave Effect (one object) starts a live effect stack on the object. Each effect can be Wave, Twist, Roughen or Transform Copies, they stack in order, and each can be switched off without removing it.
  • Release Advanced Source returns the plain source object, and Expand Advanced Geometry bakes the result into ordinary paths for editing or export.

Advanced objects render with their result on the canvas and in every export; a document that uses them needs 0.9.0 or later.

Select Same and By Type

Select ▸ Same finds every object that shares the selection's Fill, Stroke Paint, Stroke Width or whole Appearance, the way Illustrator's Select Same does, which is how you recolour every red shape in a drawing at once. Select ▸ By Type selects every Path, Live Shape, Text object, Group, Linked Clone or Compound Path in scope. All in Active Layer, Deselect (Ctrl+D), Reselect and Invert Selection round out the menu.

Swatches panel

The Swatches panel applies colours from the active saved palette to the selected object. The hint at the top tells you whether a click sets the fill or the stroke, following the current paint target (the Fill/Stroke swap; see Color).

  • Click a swatch to apply that colour to the active paint target.
  • Click the + button to add the current colour to the palette.
  • Right-click a swatch and choose Remove swatch to drop it.

If there is no palette yet, the panel offers a New palette button.

Object gradients (Gradient panel)

To paint an object with a gradient instead of a flat colour, use the Gradient panel together with the Gradient tool. The panel turns the active paint target (Fill or Stroke) into a gradient and lets you edit its ramp; you place and aim the gradient on the canvas with the Gradient tool. See Vector Mode for the Gradient tool itself.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Apply gradientbuttonn/aConverts the current solid paint to a gradient.
TypeLinear / RadialLinearThe gradient shape.
Presetsbuttonsn/aBuilt-in and saved ramps, plus Save.
Stop colourcolour pickerper stopColour of the selected stop.
Opacity0% to 100%per stopOpacity of the selected stop.
Position0% to 100%per stopPosition of the selected stop along the ramp.
Reverseon / offoffReverses the ramp order.

On the stop bar, drag a marker to move a stop and click empty ramp space to add one. Select a stop, then click the Delete button to remove it (the ramp keeps at least two stops, so Delete is disabled when only two remain).

On the canvas, grab either end of the gradient annotator to re-aim an existing gradient without redrawing it; Shift snaps the axis to 45 degrees.

Shared gradients and spread

The Gradient panel's Spread row decides what the gradient paints beyond its ends: Pad holds the end colours, Reflect mirrors the ramp back and forth, and Repeat starts it again. Shared gradients are named gradients stored in the document: link any number of fills and strokes to one (Share turns the current gradient into a new shared gradient, click a shared gradient to link the paint to it, Unlink keeps the look but cuts the link, right-click to delete). Editing the ramp, type or spread of any linked paint restyles every object that shares it, while each object keeps its own placement, so link first, then aim with the Gradient tool. Gradients follow an object's transform exactly, shear and stretch included.

Object Layers panel

The Object Layers panel is the scene graph for the active graphic layer: a stack of every object you have drawn, with groups that disclose their children. It is the vector-mode counterpart to the Layers panel. It is closed by default; open it from Window, or from the "..." on the Properties panel's matching section. When the layer is empty it reads "No objects yet. Draw a shape with a Vector tool."

Its action bar (top of the panel):

ButtonEnabled whenWhat it does
New layeralwaysAdds a new graphic layer.
Make / Release clipping maska clip group is selected, or 2 or more objects are selectedMakes a clipping mask from the selection, or releases the selected clip group.
Mask2 or more objects selectedMakes a mask group: the top object masks the rest by its luminance.
TextalwaysAdds an editable text object at the centre of the canvas.
Delete selection1 or more objects selectedDeletes the selected objects.

Every object on a graphic layer is also disclosed under that layer in the Layers panel, each with a thumbnail, so one tree holds the whole drawing. Each object row, left to right:

  • A show / hide eye toggle.
  • A lock / unlock toggle.
  • A folder icon for group rows (a group indents its children below it).
  • The object name. Click it to select the object; double-click to rename. New objects are named for the tool that drew them plus a number that is unique in the document (Rectangle 7, Ellipse 12, Path 3, and so on); a duplicate takes the original's name followed by copy, then copy 2, copy 3.
  • On top-level rows only, Bring forward and Send backward carets that move the object up or down the stack.

Vector layers: the Object and Line Edit tools

These two tools belong to Limner's older "vector lines" model: brush strokes captured as editable centerlines on a CSP-style vector layer (made with Layer ▸ New ▸ New Editable Stroke Layer, a Limner Plus command, or Vector Layer in the Layers panel's Add menu). They live in the Illustration workspace, under the Vector tool group, not in the Vector workspace, but they are vector editing, so their full options are collected here. They are separate from the Illustrator style path objects on the rest of this page. See Vector Mode for the short introduction.

Object (Operate) options

Select a vector line, then restyle it from the options bar. Size and Opacity changes are applied when you release the slider.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Select All(button)n/aSelects every line on the layer.
Size0.5 to 512 (logarithmic)From the selectionRe-sets the stroke thickness of the selected lines (applied on release).
Opacity0.0 to 1.0From the selectionRe-sets the opacity of the selected lines (applied on release).
Colour(button)n/aRecolours the selected lines to the active paint colour.
Apply Brush(button)n/aRedraws the selected lines with the active brush.
Delete(button)n/aDeletes the selected lines.
Scale widthOn / offOnWhen scaling a line, scale its stroke thickness with it (CSP's "Adjust thickness when scaling").

Line Edit options

Line Edit reshapes vector lines point by point. Pick a mode from the options bar:

ModeWhat it does
Move pointDrag a control point to reshape the line.
Add pointClick the line to add a control point.
Delete pointClick a control point to remove it.
Adjust widthDrag a point right to thicken, left to thin.
Adjust opacityDrag a point right to strengthen, left to fade.
Split lineClick the line to cut it in two.
PinchGrab the line and pull it into shape.
SimplifyClick a line to remove excess points.
ConnectDrag one line end onto another to join them.

Alongside the modes, the options bar carries:

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Edit all linesOn / offOffApply edits across every line on the layer, not just the one under the cursor.
MagnetOn / offOffSnap a new line's ends to a nearby endpoint.
Range (Pinch mode)5 to 500 px (logarithmic)60.0How far around the grab point the pinch reaches.
Strength (Simplify mode)0.2 to 20 px1.5How aggressively Simplify removes points (the tolerance).
Snap to control points (Move mode)On / offOnSnap a dragged point onto another control point.

The eraser also has vector-specific modes on a vector layer: see Eraser.

SVG: export, open and import

File ▸ Export As… with SVG chosen (in Vector, File ▸ Export ▸ Export As…) writes a standalone SVG 1.1 document sized to the canvas. Everything goes: every object's path geometry, its ordered fills and strokes with opacity, fill rule, caps, joins, miter, dashes and offset, arrowheads as markers, width profiles as filled shapes, linear and radial gradients (shared ones included) in the defs, pattern paints as patterns, clip groups, group opacity, symbols, vector text objects as path geometry, painted text layers as SVG text with the canvas layout, painted raster layers as embedded PNG images cropped to their pixels, folder masks as clip boundaries, and, with Include page color on, the page color as a background rectangle. The default name is artwork.svg; with no artwork on any layer Limner reports "Nothing to export."

What the file cannot keep, it tells you about before the save dialog: adjustment layers, a blend mode CSS cannot express, text in a font this machine lacks, guides, rulers, saved selections or a timelapse each appear in an "Export as SVG with changes?" summary with Continue and Cancel. The same summary guards PSD and OpenRaster exports. Exporting never changes the document. Stroke weight is written as a plain scalar that matches Limner's renderer, so a scaled object keeps its visible weight.

Opening and importing SVG

File ▸ Open takes an .svg as a new document (dropping the file onto the window does the same), and File ▸ Import… with SVG chosen (in Vector, File ▸ Place / Import ▸ Import…) brings one into the open document. Groups become groups (a group that mixes paths and images becomes a layer folder, keeping its paint order, opacity, blend mode and isolation), gradients and pattern fills come in as shared gradients, symbols and pattern paints, markers arrive as ordinary shapes, text is laid out with the fonts on this machine and arrives as path outlines; a missing font is named in the import notice, and an SVG saved with layers (the way Inkscape writes them) opens with those layers. See File Formats.

New in 0.9.0

  • Ordered fills and strokes. Several of each per object, with alignment (Center, Inside, Outside), typed dash patterns, arrowheads, width profiles and saved appearance styles.
  • Anchors with kinds. Corner, Smooth, Symmetric and Auto anchors, align and space commands, a transform box on selected anchors, and Simplify for retained paths.
  • Groups that composite. Group opacity, blend mode and isolation, nested units, and masks by luminance or alpha; every object's own blend mode now renders.
  • Reuse. Clones, symbols, pattern paints, shared gradients with Reflect and Repeat spread, and Select Same.
  • Text objects. Point, area and on-path text edited on the canvas, with a Typography panel and Convert Text to Paths.
  • Layout. Rulers and guides, View ▸ Snap To, align to the page or a key object with equal gaps, artboards with export sets, and the page color as a document property.
  • Advanced authoring. Blends, mesh gradients, envelopes, perspective deformations and live effects.
  • SVG both ways. Files open with their structure intact, and the whole document, painted layers included, exports.
  • Fixes. Closed dashed paths meet whole periods at the seam, gradients follow shear and stretch exactly, Pathfinder honours each object's fill rule, and editing a path re-renders only the touched region.

See also

Vectorize Layer (Image Trace)

A Limner Plus feature. On the Free tier the menu item carries the Plus star and opens the Limner Plus prompt.

Layer > Vectorize Layer… traces the active raster layer into editable vector shapes on a new graphic layer, so a low-resolution logo, sticker, or drawing becomes clean art that scales without pixelation. The dialog floats over the canvas with a live preview and a shape count, and the canvas stays free to pan and zoom while it is open.

The settings

SettingWhat it does
ModeColor posterizes the layer into flat colors, one editable shape per color. Black and White traces everything darker than the Threshold as a single black shape, which suits line art and scans.
Colors / ThresholdIn Color mode, how many flat colors the trace uses (2 to 64). In Black and White mode, the darkness cutoff (0 to 255).
Detail (%)Higher follows the source more faithfully and places more anchors; lower gives simpler, smoother shapes.
Smoothing (%)Higher relaxes jagged pixel edges into flowing curves; lower keeps corners sharper.
Speckle (px)Regions this size and smaller merge into their surroundings instead of becoming tiny shapes, so scan noise and stray pixels disappear.
Ignore whiteColor mode only. Drops a white paper background instead of tracing it; the preview's checkerboard shows through where it is dropped.

What Apply gives you

The preview traces on a background thread, so the value controls stay responsive, and Apply runs on a worker too: a spinner reading "Vectorizing the whole layer..." shows with a Cancel button until the new layer lands.

Apply lands the result as “Trace of <layer>” directly above the source layer, in one undo step; the source layer is untouched. The traced shapes are ordinary graphic-layer objects: switch to the Vector workspace to select, move, recolor, and edit them like pen-drawn art, exactly as described in Vector Editing and Output. Corners in the art come out as corner anchors and smooth spans stay smooth, colors that touch never show a gap between them, and edges are placed through the source's anti-aliasing at sub-pixel accuracy.

Vectorize Layer works on plain raster layers (not text, vector, fill, or adjustment layers) and is unavailable in Animation mode. Elsewhere its Layer menu row and command palette row are grayed out, with the reason on hover ("The active layer is not a plain raster layer", "Not available in Animation mode"). Documents with traced layers save in the existing file format.

New in 0.9.0

  • Never blocks the window. The preview traces on a background thread, so value controls move freely while it works, and Apply runs on a worker with a spinner and a Cancel button; the new layer appears when the trace lands.

Animation mode

Animation Mode

For the painting tools you draw each frame with, see Brush and the Tools index. For how the layer stack works (each layer becomes its own cel track here), see Layers. For the workspace switcher and the rest of the window, see The Interface.

Entering Animation mode

Animation is one of Limner's three workspaces. The workspace switcher sits at the right end of the menu bar, labelled "Mode", with one button per workspace, and a Book and a Home button beyond the divider to its right.

  • Click the Animation segment in the Workspace switcher to enter Animation mode. Its tooltip reads "Frame by frame animation: draw cels on a timeline".
  • The Ctrl+Shift+M workspace hotkey cycles all three workspaces in switcher order: Illustration to Vector to Animation and back to Illustration. While a Book is open the cycle skips Animation, because a Book is never an animation project.

The three workspaces are:

WorkspaceWhat it is
IllustrationRaster painting: brushes, selections, filters.
VectorVector art: editable paths with fill and stroke.
AnimationFrame-by-frame cel animation on a timeline.

What changes when you switch

Switching to Animation mode does two things and leaves your artwork alone:

  • The Timeline appears. A full-width dope-sheet panel docks along the bottom of the window, above the status bar. It is resizable; drag its top edge to make it taller or shorter. It opens 300 px tall, enough for the ruler and several layer rows before you touch the divider, and the height you set is remembered. Switching on an extra row (the Filmstrip, the Camera track, the Audio row or the Graph) grows the panel by that row and gives the space back when you switch it off, so the layer rows are never pushed out of view; double-click the top edge to fit the panel to its content.
  • The panels swap to the Animation set: the Layers and Color panels on the right, with the Brush picker and Tool Settings on the left. The other panels (Navigator, Timelapse, Reference, Stats) stay reachable from the Window menu.

The tool strip is the Illustration paint strip, unchanged. Animation mode reuses the raster painting tools, so everything you know from Illustration (the brush, eraser, fill, selections, filters, and the rest) draws on each frame exactly as it does there.

What does NOT change: switching workspaces never converts your layers. Mode is a different set of tools and panels over the same document.

The white paper

A blank canvas is transparent, which would make every animation frame see-through and make onion ghosts hard to read. So the first time you enter Animation mode, Limner guarantees an opaque white paper under your art: if the bottom layer is empty it fills it white, otherwise it slips a white paper layer underneath. This is a single undo step, and it happens only once.

A new project started in Animation mode gets the same guarantee plus a drawing layer: it opens with Layer 1 above Paper, with Layer 1 active, so your first stroke lands on a cel and not on the paper.

A transparent canvas shows as a dark field in the other workspaces; View ▸ Show ▸ Transparency Checkerboard swaps that for a gray checkerboard, and Animation mode always shows the checkerboard so onion skins stay readable.

The Timeline (dope sheet)

The Timeline is a dope sheet: a grid with one row per layer and one column per frame. It has three parts, top to bottom: a transport row, a frame-operations row, and the dope-sheet grid itself, plus two rows you can switch on: the audio waveform under the ruler and the graph editor under the grid.

The dope-sheet grid

The grid is split into a frozen name gutter on the left and a scrolling frame grid on the right.

  • The name gutter lists your layers in the same top-to-bottom order as the Layers panel, one row each, with an eye toggle and the layer name. Folders show as header rows with a collapse caret; layers inside a folder are indented. The active layer's row is highlighted in the accent colour. Click a layer name to make it active.
  • The frame grid holds the cells. It scrolls both ways for long timelines and tall stacks. The name gutter stays put while the grid scrolls sideways, so you never lose track of which row is which.

The two panes scroll vertically together, so a layer's name always lines up with its row of cells. With more layers than the panel shows, changing the active layer scrolls its row into view, so the row you are drawing on is never scrolled away.

Zooming the timeline. For a long animation, zoom the grid out to see more frames at once, or in to work on a few frames closely: hold Ctrl and scroll over the grid, or use the magnifier buttons on the frame-operations row (click the percentage between them to reset to 100%). Zoom changes the frame-cell width only; at a tight zoom the frame numbers thin out so they stay readable, and the current frame is always numbered.

Thumbnail size. The gear at the Timeline's top right opens the Timeline options, where Small, Medium and Large set how big the cells and the filmstrip are drawn. A small drawing on a big canvas is unreadable in a small cell, and a long animation is easier to scan in one; the choice scales the row height, the cell width and the thumbnail picture together, and it is remembered between sessions.

The filmstrip. The per-layer cells show each layer's own drawing. To review the whole animation as finished frames, turn on the Filmstrip toggle on the frame-operations row: a row appears above the ruler showing a composited thumbnail of every frame, all your visible layers merged into one pose. Click a filmstrip thumbnail to jump to that frame. The thumbnails update as you draw, and the toggle is off by default (building them costs a little on a very long animation).

Reading the cells

Each cell shows the state of one layer on one frame:

CellWhat it means
ThumbnailA keyframe: a drawing starts on this frame. A blank keyframe shows a hollow box instead.
Hold barA flat bar across the cell: the previous drawing is held (it stays on screen until the next keyframe).
EmptyThe layer has no drawing yet at this frame.

A small number in a dark pill at a keyframe's top-right corner is its exposure: how many frames the drawing is held before the next keyframe (shown only when it is held for more than one frame). A coloured strip along a cell's top edge is its frame colour tag. The active layer's current cell carries an accent border so you can see exactly what you are about to draw on.

The ruler

The strip across the top of the frame grid is the ruler. It numbers the frames (starting at 1), marks the current frame with an accent pill, and carries the draggable in and out markers. Frames outside the in/out range are dimmed.

Click a frame number to jump the playhead there, or drag along the ruler to scrub: the playhead follows the frame under the cursor as you move, so you can flip through the animation by hand. To select a range of frames, hold Shift and click another frame (selects from the playhead to there) or Shift-drag across the ruler; the selected columns are washed in the accent colour, and Copy and Delete then act on the whole range (see Editing frames). To reorder a whole frame column (that frame, and every layer's drawing on it, moved to another position), hold Alt and drag; a highlight shows where it will land, and every other frame keeps showing the drawing it showed before: a frame that was holding a drawing the move took away is pinned to that drawing instead of going blank, sharing it rather than copying it. A plain click clears the selection.

Drawing frame by frame

The core loop is: draw a pose, add a frame, draw the next pose.

  • Add Frame (the button on the frame-operations row, hover "Insert a blank frame after this one and switch to it") inserts a new blank frame right after the current one and jumps to it. The new frame is a fresh page on every drawing layer, not only the active one: each layer gets a blank cel there, and only the bottom paper keeps showing, so the frame starts white with nothing from the frame before it. A background or any layer you are not animating does not carry over. To start a frame from everything the current one shows, use Duplicate frame (Alt+D, see Editing frames) instead.
  • Just start drawing. When you paint on a frame that is currently holding an earlier drawing, Limner automatically gives the active layer its own keyframe there first, so each frame you draw on becomes its own distinct cel. You never have to "create a keyframe" by hand.
  • Other edits on a held frame change only that frame. Edit ▸ Delete Inside and Delete Outside, Cut, a filter's Apply (or Repeat Last Filter), Free Transform and Mesh Warp on a frame that is holding an earlier drawing first give each layer they change its own copy of that drawing on this frame, then edit the copy. The frames around it keep showing the drawing it was held from, the status bar says "This frame has its own drawing now", and one Undo puts the hold back. On a frame that is its layer's own keyframe, an edit changes that drawing, and so its whole hold, as a stroke does.
  • Delete (hover "Delete this frame") removes the current frame and shifts the later frames left, so no gap is left behind. It is greyed out when only one frame remains.

Because each layer carries its own track of cels along one shared timeline, you can animate the character on one layer while the background layer holds a single drawing, and add a new layer at any time (it starts blank and holds across the whole timeline until you draw on it). Keep in mind that Add Frame gives every layer, the background included, a blank cel on the frame it adds.

Ctrl+Alt+click a mark on the canvas to jump to the layer that owns it. When you draw on a frame that is holding an earlier drawing, the new drawing starts blank; Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Copy a held drawing when you draw on it makes it start as a copy of the held one instead.

Onion skin

Onion skin ghosts the frames around the one you are drawing, so you can see where your last pose was and where the next one is, the way you would flip paper on a lightbox.

  • The Onion toggle on the transport row turns ghosting on and off in one tap (hover "Onion skin: ghost the nearby frames"). It is off by default. There is also a keyboard shortcut, Alt+O by default, which you can rebind in Keyboard Shortcuts.
  • The gear button next to it opens the Onion skin popover, where you tune the ghosts. Every setting stays editable even while onion is off, so you can set it up before turning it on.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Before0 to 121How many earlier frames to ghost.
After0 to 121How many later frames to ghost.
Opacity0.05 to 1.00.45Opacity of the nearest ghost. Frames further away fade out from there.
PastRGB colourwarm redThe tint for earlier frames.
FutureRGB colourcool blueThe tint for later frames.

Two more sections sit in the same popover. Markers pin a key pose so it stays ghosted wherever the playhead goes, ghost the active layer's last keyed pose before the playhead (on a keyframed layer the neighboring frames are interpolations, so the pose worth drawing against is the last one actually set; it shows the layer where its transform keys put it on that key, together with any layers parented to it), or ghost a fixed offset from the playhead, each with its own opacity, up to eight of them. Shift and Trace slides, rotates and scales the past or the future ghosts about the canvas centre until a landmark lines up with your pose, with a button to put them back.

Earlier frames are tinted with the Past colour and later frames with the Future colour, the usual warm-past / cool-future convention, so you can tell at a glance which way time runs.

Each ghost composites all of your visible layers together, so a character built from separate line, fill, and shadow layers ghosts as one whole pose, not just the layer you happen to be drawing on. Only the layers that actually change between frames are ghosted: a layer that holds the same drawing (a static background, or the white paper) shows no ghost, so neighboring frames never wash the canvas in tint, and a held pose never doubles up. Every ghost sits where the layers' transform keys place them on that frame, so a layer moved by keys ghosts at its pose there, not where it was drawn. The ghosts sit just under the layer you are drawing on, so your live line always stays on top.

Ghosts are hidden while the animation plays. Onion skin is a drawing aid, not part of the picture, and every ghost would smear the motion you are trying to judge, so Limner drops them the moment you press Play and brings them back when you pause or stop. The Onion toggle stays on, and the Every-frame cache is built from the clean frames, so it never holds a ghost either.

Playback and transport

The transport row across the top of the Timeline drives playback. Left to right:

ControlWhat it doesKey
First frameJumps to the first frame.Home
Previous frameSteps back one frame., (comma)
Play / PauseStarts or pauses playback. The button shows a pause icon while playing.Enter
StopStops playback (enabled only while playing).
Next frameSteps forward one frame.. (period)
Last frameJumps to the last frame.End
Frame rateThe project speed in frames per second.
Play modeLoop, Ping Pong, or Once.
PlaybackReal time (hold the frame rate, and drop and count what a heavy scene cannot draw) or Every frame (show every drawing, caching the range on the first pass).
Rate readoutThe frame rate playback actually achieved, and the number of frames it dropped.
PaperShows or hides the shared white paper under every frame.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Frame rate (fps)1 to 6012How many frames play per second.

The play mode is a three-segment control:

  • Loop (the default) plays the range over and over.
  • Ping Pong plays forward to the end, then back to the start, and repeats.
  • Once plays through one time and stops.

A readout at the right end of the transport shows "Frame X / N" (the current frame, counting from 1, over the total) followed by a timecode: the current time and the total duration in minutes:seconds.tenths at the current frame rate.

Real time, the default, keeps playback locked to the frame rate you set: on a heavy scene it drops the frames it cannot draw in time rather than playing in slow motion, so the timing you see matches the timing you will export, and the transport reports the rate it achieved and how many frames it dropped. Every frame never skips a drawing: the first pass runs as fast as the scene allows and caches each composite, and later passes play the cached range at full rate. Continuous audio plays only in Real time. Onion skin is hidden for the whole of playback and restored when you pause or stop, so what plays is the animation itself.

Keyboard frame navigation and playback

In Animation mode, a few keys drive the playhead and transport without reaching for the buttons. They work only in Animation mode and are fixed (they are not in the rebindable Keyboard Shortcuts list). Space stays the hold-to-pan key, so Enter is what plays and pauses.

KeyAction
, (comma)Previous frame
. (period)Next frame
HomeFirst frame
EndLast frame
EnterPlay / pause
Shift+, (comma)Extend the frame selection one frame earlier
Shift+. (period)Extend the frame selection one frame later

In and out range

Two markers on the ruler set the part of the timeline that plays and exports. Drag the in marker to set the start and the out marker to set the end; their grab tabs sit at the top of the ruler. You can also type the range directly: the In and Out boxes on the frame-operations row set the start and end frames numerically (drag them or click to type). Frames outside the range are dimmed.

  • The range bounds both playback and export. Playback loops, bounces, or plays once within the in/out points, and Export writes only the frames inside the range.
  • By default the range covers the whole timeline, and it follows the frame count as you add or remove frames. The Export menu names the current range, how many drawings it will write and how long they run, for example "Frames 1 to 12: 12 drawings, 1.000 seconds".

Editing frames

Right-click any cell to open its frame menu (available once you have more than one frame):

ItemWhat it does
Duplicate frameInserts an editable copy of this drawing right after it, and switches to it. The copy is independent: changing it does not change the original.
Clone frame (linked)Inserts a linked copy right after it. The two frames share one drawing, so editing either edits both, and the clone uses no extra space.
Delete frameRemoves this frame; the later frames shift left.
Color tagTags the frame with a colour (see below), or clears it.
TimingRetimes this layer's run of drawings: put them on 2s, 3s or 4s, double or triple every hold, keep every 2nd or 3rd drawing, reverse the run, or repeat it as a cycle.

The frame menu also has Copy frame and Paste frame after: the copied frame carries every layer's drawing and can be pasted anywhere in the timeline. The frame operations all have keyboard shortcuts too: Alt+N new frame, Alt+C copy, Alt+V paste after, Alt+D duplicate, Alt+L clone, Alt+Delete delete, all rebindable in Keyboard Shortcuts. Frame add, duplicate, delete, reorder, retime, and paste each undo as a single step that restores the whole timeline.

Working with several frames at once. Select a range on the ruler (Shift-click or Shift-drag, see The ruler), or extend the selection from the playhead with Shift+comma and Shift+period without leaving the keyboard (the far end of the current selection is the anchor). Copy and Delete then act on the whole range: the menu reads "Copy 3 frames" or "Delete 3 frames", and Alt+C and Alt+Delete do the same. Paste drops all of the copied frames in order after the target frame ("Paste 3 frames after"), and a held drawing pastes back as a hold: the drawing is keyed once and the frames after it hold it, exactly as in the range you copied.

Re-timing a cel

Drag a keyframe sideways along its row to re-time it, moving the drawing to a different frame. A highlight shows the target column as you drag. Dropping it onto a frame that already has a drawing replaces that one.

Changing how long a drawing is held (exposure)

The exposure of a drawing is how many frames it stays on screen before the next one. To change it on one layer, hover the right edge of a held drawing until the resize cursor appears, then drag: right holds it longer, left holds it shorter, and a guide line shows where the boundary will land. This moves the next drawing on that row; it never runs past the drawing after it (that one always keeps at least one frame), and it does not change the total frame count. The last drawing on a row has no edge to drag, since its hold runs to the end of the timeline; use Add Frame or Delete to change the timeline length. The exposure badge in the corner of a keyframe updates as you drag.

Colour tags

Frames can carry a colour label to mark beats, holds, or sections. Right-click a cell, open the Color tag submenu, and pick one of six colours (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, or purple), or None to clear it. The tag shows as a coloured strip along the top edge of that frame's cells, and the tags travel with the document when you save.

2D camera

The 2D camera adds a keyframed move over the whole animation: a pan, zoom, and rotate applied to the finished frame, so you can push in, drift across, or spin the shot without redrawing anything. It is a Limner Plus feature, and it is non-destructive: it never changes your drawings, only how the finished frame is framed.

Open the camera controls from the Camera button and its gear popover on the frame-operations row. To set up a move:

  1. Scrub to the frame where the move should start and click Add key (in the popover, or the Camera track's + button) to pin the framing you already have. Editing any value on a frame without a key adds the key for you, seeded from the framing shown there, in the same undo step, so a move is scrub and type. The first key turns on Camera view so you can see the framing.
  2. Set the framing for that key: Center X / Center Y (where the camera looks, as a percentage of the canvas, 50% being the middle), Zoom (100% frames the whole canvas, larger zooms in), and Rotation.
  3. Scrub to a later frame, add another key, and give it a different framing. Limner interpolates the camera between the keys, so the shot moves smoothly from one to the next.

Camera view (the Camera button, and always during playback) shows the canvas through the camera, so scrubbing and playing back preview the move. Turn it off to edit the frames on the plain canvas again.

The keyframe track. Once you have a key, a Camera row appears under the ruler, with a diamond at each keyed frame. Click a column to jump there; drag a diamond to re-time its key. A filled diamond is a moving key; a hollow diamond is a Hold key. Use the track's + and trash buttons, or the popover, to add or delete the key at the current frame.

Easing. Each key controls how the camera moves from it to the next key:

EaseMotion
HoldSteps: the camera stays put until the next key (no motion).
LinearA straight, even move.
SmoothEases in and out, so the move starts and ends gently.
Ease inStarts slow and gathers speed.
Ease outArrives slowly.
ExponentialBlends at a constant ratio rather than a constant step; offered only on Zoom and Scale, where the values are always positive.

The camera bakes into the export (GIF, MP4, and PNG sequence all render the move) and saves with the document.

Layer keyframes

Where the camera moves the whole shot, layer keyframes move one layer inside it: keyframe a layer's position, scale, rotation, and opacity over the timeline and Limner interpolates between the keys, so a cloud can drift, a title can fade in, or a cel can slide across the shot without redrawing it anywhere. A Limner Plus feature, and non-destructive: the layer's pixels are never changed, only how they are composited at each frame.

Open a layer's keyframe controls from the diamond button on its Timeline row (it lights up when the layer has keys):

  1. Move the playhead to the frame where the motion starts and click Add key, or just set a value: editing any value on a frame without a key adds the key for you, seeded from the pose already shown there, in the same undo step. Add key on its own starts as "no change", so adding it never alters the look.
  2. Set the values for that key: Position X / Y (an offset in canvas pixels), Scale (100% = unchanged), Rotation, and Opacity (100% = the layer's own opacity). Anchor X / Y sets the point scale and rotation pivot about; it belongs to the layer, not to any one key. A Parent picker on the track sends this layer along with another one: a hand parented to an arm rides the arm's keyed move, turn and scale, and the hand's own keys then apply relative to the arm. Chains nest up to eight deep, a cycle is refused, and the white paper is never offered as a parent, since it does not move. A link glyph on the layer's Timeline row, followed by the parent's name, says what it follows.
  3. Scrub to a later frame, add another key with different values, and play: the layer moves, turns, grows, or fades smoothly between them.

Keys show as small diamonds along the bottom of the layer's row: drag one to re-time it, right-click it to pick its mode (Hold, Linear, Smooth, Ease in, Ease out, and Exponential on Scale) or to delete it. Every property is its own channel with its own curve in the Graph editor. Keys ripple with frame inserts, deletes, and reorders, exactly like drawings and tags.

The popovers stay open while you work in them. The Keyframes, Camera, Onion skin and Audio popovers close only on a click outside, so you can add a key, set several values and check the result without reopening them. Each row scrubs from its name: drag the label left or right to change the number, hold Shift for coarse steps and Alt for fine ones, and double-click the field to type an exact value.

A few things to know:

  • Painting is blocked on a moved frame. On a frame where a layer is shown displaced, scaled, or rotated by its keys, a stroke would land away from the pen (the pixels live at their undrawn position), so Limner blocks it and says why. Paint on a frame where the transform is "no change" (for example the first key, before the move starts), or clear the layer's keys. Opacity-only keys never block painting.
  • Onion skin ghosts do not follow the keys. Ghost frames show the raw drawings; preview keyframed motion by scrubbing or playing instead.
  • Layer keyframes bake into the export and save with the document, like the camera. The 2D camera composes on top, so a camera move over keyframed layers exports exactly as previewed.

The audio track

A document can carry one audio track, so dialogue, music or a beat plays with the animation and lip sync lines up by eye. On the frame-operations row, the waveform button beside Audio opens the Audio popover; choose Load audio there (the animation needs more than one frame). WAV, MP3, OGG, FLAC, M4A and AAC files load, and so does the audio of an MP4. The file decodes in the background; the row and the popover read "Decoding" until the samples land.

Once a track is loaded, the Audio toggle shows or hides the audio row under the ruler: the waveform drawn over the frame columns, with the audible span tinted. Click a column in the row to move the playhead there, or drag the row to slide the track along the timeline, snapped to frames. The row's gutter names the file (hover it for the duration and whether the audio is embedded or referenced by path), with a speaker button that mutes and unmutes and a gear that opens the same popover.

ControlWhat it does
Starts at frameThe frame the audio starts on. A value before frame 1 starts it early, so a track can lead in.
Trim start / Trim endSeconds cut from the start and from the end of the file.
VolumePlayback and export gain, 0 to 200% (100% as recorded).
MuteSilences the track in playback and leaves it out of exports. The speaker button on the row does the same.
Embed in documentKeeps the audio bytes inside the .limner file instead of referencing the file on disk; unticking writes them back out to a file. A referenced file that has moved shows a Relink button in the popover.
Scrub audioPlays one frame's slice of sound whenever the playhead moves. A preference, not a document setting.
Replace / RemovePick another file, or take the track out of the document.

Continuous audio plays only in Real time playback, and a loop restarts the audio with the range (see Playback and transport). An MP4 export can carry the audible part of the track for the in/out range, trims and volume applied, inside the movie as an AAC track (the default on Windows, macOS and iPad); the Audio control in the Export Animation dialog can instead write it as a WAV file named after the export beside it, or leave the audio out. A PNG sequence has no container for audio, so it always uses the WAV file when audio is on. A muted track is never exported, and GIF and APNG exports carry no audio. The track, its placement, trims and volume are saved with the document.

Importing frames

You can start an animation from images you already have. Both importers are Limner Plus, and each opens a fresh Animation-mode document:

  • File ▸ Import Animation ▸ Import GIF as Animation Frames… splits an animated GIF, one frame per GIF frame, and sets the frame rate from the GIF's timing. A GIF stores whole centiseconds, so a rate that does not divide evenly is written as alternating delays; the importer recognises that, and a 12 fps GIF exported by Limner comes back at 12 fps.
  • File ▸ Import Animation ▸ Import Image Sequence as Animation Frames… turns a folder of numbered images into frames, one frame per file, in numeric order (so frame2 comes before frame10, padded or not). PNG, JPEG, WebP, BMP, TGA, TIFF, and GIF files are read, transparency is kept, and any off-size image is scaled to match the first one. A plain image sequence carries no timing, so it starts at 12 fps; change it in the transport. Both importers keep the first 300 frames of a very long source.

Export

The Export button on the Timeline's frame-operations row opens the Export Animation dialog. It is enabled once you have more than one frame, and it reads top to bottom in the order the decision is made: the format, a line saying what that format keeps, the frame / size / resample controls, the frame range, a summary of exactly what will be written, and one Export button. The four entries under File ▸ Export Animation (GIF…, Animated PNG (APNG)…, MP4 Video… and PNG Sequence…) still write directly, for when the settings are already right. They are listed in every workspace and enabled in Animation once there is more than one frame; the disabled hover says why. The four formats are:

FormatWhat it writesNotes
GIFAn animated GIF.Plays at the project frame rate.
Animated PNG (APNG)An animated PNG.Keeps full colour and real transparency, which GIF cannot, and plays in every modern browser.
MP4 videoAn H.264 MP4.Broadly playable; no transparency. A canvas larger than 4K is downscaled to fit the encoder. An audio track can be embedded inside the movie as AAC.
PNG sequenceOne numbered PNG per frame, plus a timing.json sidecar.Keeps transparency. Files are named frame_0001.png, frame_0002.png, and so on, in the folder you choose; timing.json carries the exact frame holds so Import Image Sequence restores them, and a loaded audio track is written beside the files.

A few things to know:

  • The export honours the in/out range. Only the frames inside the range are written; the Export menu names the range it will use. To export the whole animation, leave the markers at the ends.
  • Export controls. Size sets the output as a percentage of the canvas, from 10% to 400%, with the pixel size shown beside it, and Resample chooses Smooth for painted work or Sharp to keep pixel art crisp. When the animation has an audio track and the format can carry one, the Audio control chooses Embedded (AAC inside the MP4, the default where Limner has an AAC encoder: Windows, macOS and iPad), WAV file (a 16-bit WAV beside the export), or None. Embedded appears greyed with its reason for a PNG sequence, which writes the WAV file instead. A track at a sample rate AAC cannot carry (on Windows, the system encoder takes 44.1 and 48 kHz only), or with more than two channels, is refused with the WAV file as the remedy. Every writes every frame of the range, or every 2nd, 3rd or 4th, with the frame rate divided so the timing stays the same. GIF and MP4 use the project frame rate; GIF shrinks the longer side to 1280 px, and MP4 tops out at 4K per side. A multi-frame animation also exports to PSD as one flattened layer per frame, the shape Photoshop's Make Frames From Layers rebuilds an animation from, and an MP4 export writes a loaded audio track inside the movie as AAC unless the Audio control asks for the WAV file or None.
  • Onion skin is turned off during export, so ghosts never bleed into the output, then restored afterwards.
  • The 2D camera move and layer keyframes are baked in. Each exported frame is rendered through the camera framing and the layer transforms at that frame, so the export matches what playback shows on screen.
  • All four formats are encoded inside the app. GIF and MP4 use the same built-in encoder as the Timelapse feature, so no extra tools or downloads are ever needed.
  • One export runs at a time. The frames render and stream to the encoder in the background, so you can keep working, and switching documents cancels the export cleanly. A status line beside the Export button shows progress ("Exporting animation...") and then the result. While a job is running the Export button and the four entries under File ▸ Export Animation are disabled, with the reason "An export is already running" on hover, so a second click is never quietly dropped.

How animation is saved

Animations save inside the normal Limner document (.limner). The format stores the frame count, frame rate, play mode, onion settings and markers, the in/out range, the colour tags, the 2D-camera keyframes, the per-layer keyframes and their parent chains, keyed adjustment-layer values, the audio track with its placement, trim and volume, and every cel's pixels, so reopening a file drops you straight back onto the timeline. A document that uses animation reopens in Animation mode automatically. Older files, and files with a single frame, open as before in Illustration or Vector mode. See File Formats for details.

New in 0.9.0

  • An audio track. Load a WAV, MP3, OGG, FLAC, M4A or AAC file (or an MP4, for its audio) and it decodes in the background (the row and the popover read "Decoding" until the samples land) and then appears as a waveform row under the timeline, so lip sync and beats line up by eye, and it plays with the animation.
  • Layers that follow layers. A layer can be parented to another, so a hand keyed to an arm moves with it.
  • A graph editor. Camera and layer keys have per-channel curves with Hold, Linear, Smooth, Ease in, Ease out and Exponential interpolation, edited in the graph editor or from a key's context menu.
  • Adjustment layers animate. Fill and adjustment layers are available in Animation mode, and an adjustment layer's settings can be keyed.
  • Retime. The Timing submenu of a cel puts drawings on 2s, 3s or 4s, doubles or triples every hold, keeps every 2nd or 3rd drawing, reverses, or repeats a range.
  • Onion skin markers. Pin a key pose so it stays visible as an onion layer while you draw, and Shift and Trace offsets the onion image to check an arc.
  • Playback that keeps every frame. An every-frame mode plays each frame even when the machine cannot keep the rate, and the transport shows the achieved rate and the dropped count.
  • Export controls. Choose which frames to write, an output size from 10% to 400%, and Smooth or Sharp resampling; a multi-frame animation also exports to PSD as one flattened layer per frame, the shape Photoshop's Make Frames From Layers rebuilds an animation from.
  • Undo lands on the right frame. Undoing an edit made on one frame no longer applies to another.
  • Animated PNG export. The timeline exports to APNG as well as GIF, MP4, and a PNG sequence. APNG keeps full colour and real transparency, which GIF cannot.
  • Choose how held frames display. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Copy a held drawing when you draw on it decides whether drawing on a held frame starts a new drawing as a copy of the held one, or blank, which is the default.
  • The Interface: the workspace switcher, panels, and the rest of the window.
  • Layers: the layer stack that becomes one cel track per layer here.
  • Brush and the Tools index: the painting tools you draw each frame with.
  • File Formats and Export: what a .limner document stores, including animation.
  • Timelapse: the other video export, which records your drawing process.

Book

Book: Comics and Manga

For the painting tools you draw each page with, see Brush and the Tools index. For how the layer stack works on a page, see Layers. For the vector tools you can use on a page, see Vector Mode.

What a Book is

A Book sits ABOVE the per-page drawing workspaces. It is deliberately not a fourth workspace: switching Illustration / Vector changes the tools and panels for one document, while a Book is a project that owns many documents (its pages) and a board to manage them. Each page remembers its own workspace, so you can ink one page in Illustration and letter another in Vector inside the same Book. Animation is not available inside a Book: a Book is never an animation project, so the Animation button is greyed out while one is open.

While a Book is open you move between two surfaces:

SurfaceWhat it shows
Page (canvas)The active page open for drawing, with the normal tool strip and panels.
Book (Page Manager)The thumbnail board of every page in order, with the book toolbar.

Creating and opening a Book

Books are created and opened from the File menu:

  • File ▸ New Book opens the New Book setup dialog (described below).
  • File ▸ Open Book opens an existing .limnerbook file.
  • File ▸ Open Recent Book lists the books you opened recently; pick one to reopen it.

You can also reach these from the Book home screen: open the Page Manager with no book loaded and it shows New Book, Open Book, and a prominent "Continue" button for the most recent book, with the rest of your recent books listed below. Back to canvas returns to the document you left. Animation is not available on the Book screen (the switcher's hover reads "Animation is not available on the Book screen. Choose Back to canvas first."), and if the document behind it is in Animation mode, New Book and Open Book say that the document has to be switched to Illustration or closed first.

The New Book setup dialog

The dialog builds a new, empty book from a page template plus a few options. Pick a Template from the list to fill in the size and binding, then adjust anything by hand.

Built-in templatePage sizeDPI
Comic book (US, 300 DPI)1988 × 3075 px300
Manga B5 (182 × 257 mm, 300 DPI)2150 × 3035 px300
Manga A5 (148 × 210 mm, 300 DPI)1748 × 2480 px300
Tankobon (128 × 182 mm, 300 DPI)1512 × 2150 px300
Webtoon episode (800 × 12800 px)800 × 12800 px72
A4 (210 × 297 mm, 300 DPI)2480 × 3508 px300

The remaining controls:

ControlRange / optionsDefaultWhat it does
Width1 to 16384 pxfrom templateThe page canvas width (bleed included on print sizes).
Height1 to 16384 pxfrom templateThe page canvas height.
Resolution72, 96, 150, 300, 350, 600, 1200 DPI300Page resolution, used for metadata and the size of the guide insets.
BindingLeft bound (Western), Right bound (Manga)from templateRecords which side the spine sits on, shown in the Page Manager's summary line. It does not change the page order or the layout; the next row does.
Backgroundcolour or TransparentwhiteThe paper colour new pages start with, or transparent.
Right to left reading order (manga)checkboxfrom templateLays the Page Manager out right to left, so page 1 sits on the right. Exports keep the page order either way, and a Book PDF carries no reading-direction setting.
Print bleed and safe-area guidescheckboxon for print sizes, off for webtoonShows the bleed / trim / safe guides on each page.

Manga and Tankobon templates default to right binding and right-to-left order; the webtoon strip turns the print guides off. Click Create to start the book, or Cancel to back out.

The page list (Page Manager)

The Page Manager is the book's home board. Each page is a card with its thumbnail, its number and title, and a row of per-page actions. The active page is outlined in the accent colour.

ActionWhat it does
OpenOpens this page on the canvas to draw on it. Double-clicking the thumbnail does the same.
Rename pageGives the page a name of your own instead of its number. Double-click its title, or right-click the card.
Page Setup...Right-click the card to give this page its own bleed and safe area when it needs to differ from the Book. A page that has one shows an Own setup badge.
DuplicateInserts an independent copy of this page right after it. A page whose undo history is too large to copy (one page of a Book holds at most 128 MiB) is copied without it: the status line reads "Duplicated as <copy> without undo history", the copy starts with no undo steps, and the original keeps its own.
Move earlierMoves the page one slot toward the front.
Move laterMoves the page one slot toward the back.
DeleteRemoves this page (disabled when only one page remains).

The book toolbar across the top of the board carries the book-wide commands:

CommandWhat it does
Add PageAdds a new blank page using the book's page template.
Undo / RedoUndo or redo the last page-structure change (add, duplicate, delete, reorder). Ctrl+Z and Ctrl+Shift+Z do the same.
SaveSaves the book to its .limnerbook file.
Save AsSaves the book under a new name.
ExportExports every page as numbered PNG files or as one PDF (see Saving and exporting).
Close BookCloses the Book after a Save / Discard / Cancel prompt when it has unsaved work.

The toolbar heading shows the book name (with a * when there are unsaved changes) and a summary line: the page count, the binding (left or right bound), and "right to left" when that reading order is on. Page-structure undo and redo are session-only; a reopened book starts with an empty page history.

While the Page Manager is showing, the page you were drawing on is hidden, so commands that would change it wait until you open a page again. In the command palette (Ctrl+K) and on Quick Access, those rows are grayed out with "Not available in the Page Manager", including action rows such as Add Layer Below, Free Transform, Canvas Size, Crop to Selection and the zoom and view rows. Book commands, Save, the page-structure Undo, and app-level rows (theme, layouts, panels, the Keyboard Shortcuts window, the workspace switch) stay available. The Home screen holds the palette the same way, with "Not available on the Home screen".

Drawing on a page

A page is an ordinary document. Open it from the Page Manager and you draw with the same tools, layers, brushes, selections, and filters you use everywhere else. The page opens in its own remembered workspace, so each page keeps whatever Illustration or Vector lens you last left it in. Switching a page between Illustration and Vector happens at once, without the "new document?" offer a stand-alone document shows, and marks the Book changed.

When the print guides are on (or a page sets its own bleed and safe area), Limner draws two non-destructive guide rectangles over the canvas:

  • The trim line (blue) marks the final cut edge of the printed page.
  • The safe rectangle (orange) marks the area to keep important art and text inside.

The guides are a display overlay only. They are never composited into your artwork and never affect undo, the eyedropper, or export.

The Panel tool

While a Book is open, a comic Panel tool is appended to the tool strip in every workspace, so you can lay panels on any page without switching modes. Panels are frames: each panel CLIPS the page's raster paint to its interior, so nothing you paint spills into the gutters between frames. The clip is non-destructive: your true pixels stay intact for undo and the eyedropper. Exports burn the panels in (the gutter paper, each panel's fill and its border line), both the book's page export and a still export from a page (File ▸ Export As… with PNG, JPEG, PDF or CMYK TIFF), unless you untick Burn panels into the export in the Export As dialog.

  • Drag an empty area of the canvas to draw a new rectangular panel.
  • Click an existing panel to select it; then drag it to move or resize it.
  • Esc or Ctrl+Z during a drag puts the panel back where the drag found it (a new panel is dropped), with no undo step. Enter, or switching the tool, workspace or page, finishes the drag where it is, as lifting the pointer does.

The Panel tool options bar edits the selected panel live, or the defaults for the next panel you draw:

ControlRange / optionsDefaultWhat it does
Line width0 to 100 px4Border line width (0 hides the border).
BordercolourblackThe border line colour.
Fillcheckbox + colouroffFills the inside of the frame; off leaves it transparent so the page art shows through.
SnapcheckboxoffSnaps panel edges to the page guides and to other panels' edges, so touching panels align onto one line.
DeletebuttonDeletes the selected panel (shown only when a panel is selected).

Panels are stored with the page document, so they travel with the file and reopen exactly as you left them.

Saving and exporting

Bounded Book workflow
Every page keeps the Book's shared canvas size and DPI. Opening validates a decoded snapshot before replacement, and saving streams to an atomic staging file. Batch PNG export runs one page per frame with progress and Cancel, preserves physical DPI, refuses existing output names, and limits a rendered page to 128 MiB of RGBA data.

A whole Book saves into one .limnerbook file. The file holds the book metadata (page size, resolution, binding, reading order, default bleed / safe) and the full ordered page list, with each page embedding its own complete document blob. Use Save to write it, or Save As to write a copy under a new name.

A Book is autosaved while you work: if a session ends unexpectedly, it appears in the Recover unsaved work prompt on the next launch. Closing a Book with unsaved changes asks first, with Save, Discard and Cancel.

A page that cannot be read (damaged, or not the Book's canvas size) does not stop the Book from opening: it opens as a blank page in its place, keeping its number and title, and the other pages load as they are. A notice titled "Book opened with a damaged page" names each such page, and the Book opens as an unsaved copy, so Save asks for a new name and the original file, which still holds the damaged page, is left untouched. Only a Book in which no page can be read is refused. A recovery backup with a damaged page is restored the same way and is kept, so Limner offers it again at the next launch. Every Book save and recovery backup is read back and checked before it replaces the previous file; a save that fails the check leaves the old file as it was.

The pages themselves use Limner's normal document format, which is where each page's layers, vectors and panels live.

Export on the book toolbar writes every page as numbered PNG files, or as one PDF. It prompts for a base name, then writes the pages as name_001.png, name_002.png, and so on, padded so they sort in order. Export first opens an Export Book Pages dialog: Cut each page into screens turns webtoon slicing on, Screen height sets the piece height, and a line under them says how many files the export will write before you commit (a page no taller than one screen stays one file). PDF writes the pages in order into one file; each page keeps its own trim inset, and the PDF gets a full-canvas bleed box plus a trim box when the page has bleed. PDF keeps whole pages, so screen slicing applies to PNG sequences only. The checkbox starts on for a book that would have sliced before, so an existing book slices exactly as it used to. Sliced pages are named name_001_01.png, name_001_02.png, and so on. When the export finishes, Limner reports how many files it wrote and where.

New in 0.9.0

  • Books reopen from everywhere. A saved Book opens from the Home screen and by double-clicking its file even when the last workspace was Animation.
  • Webtoon slicing. Slicing a tall page into episode-sized pieces is an explicit export option, and the bundled webtoon template is an 800 x 12800 episode canvas the slicer can cut.
  • Rename a page. Any page can carry a name of your own instead of its number.
  • A page can have its own setup. When one page needs to differ from the rest of the Book, it can take its own setup.
  • Panels appear in Book exports. Batch exports and page thumbnails previously ignored comic panels entirely, emitting unclipped art with no borders or gutter.

Aids, files, and setup

Construction Aids: Rulers, Symmetry, Perspective

This page covers the four ruler kinds, guides, grid snap, symmetry, perspective, and the Smart Shape gesture.

Where the aids live

All of the aid tools share one flyout group in the left tool strip, in this order:

  • Linear Ruler
  • Parallel Ruler
  • Radial Ruler
  • Concentric Ruler
  • Symmetry
  • Perspective

There is no menu path and no default keyboard shortcut for any aid tool, and the aid tools are not listed in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog, so they cannot be given a key. Reach them from the Ruler flyout in the tool strip, or pin one out of the flyout so it keeps its own slot on the strip.

Two things to know about how the aids behave:

  • Selecting an aid tool puts you in its edit mode. A drag on the canvas places or moves that aid's geometry. It never paints.
  • Any handle can be grabbed at any time. While any aid tool is active, pressing near a ruler point, a guide, a symmetry handle, or a vanishing point grabs the nearest one and switches to its tool automatically, so you can nudge any aid without first picking its tool. The grab range is about 12 pixels on screen.
  • Aid edits go into the document's own history. Placing or moving a ruler, a guide, the symmetry axis, or a vanishing point is one step in the same undo chronology as your painting, so Ctrl+Z steps back through aid edits and paint edits in the order you made them. These shortcuts are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Rulers and guides are saved in the document: each layer's placed ruler travels with that layer, and guides are saved for the document as a whole. The symmetry axis and the perspective points are session state and are not saved.

The Snap checkbox

When a ruler is placed or any guide exists, a Snap checkbox appears at the left of the tool-options bar, no matter which tool is active. It is on by default. Turn it off to draw freely without removing your rulers and guides, then turn it back on to resume snapping.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Snapon/offonSnap strokes to the active ruler and guides.

Rulers

A ruler resolves a single constraint at the moment your stroke begins, then projects every later point of that stroke onto the same line or circle, so the whole stroke rides one clean path. There are four kinds. Each is its own tool.

Picking a ruler tool places that ruler at once, centred on the canvas, so it is visible and snapping immediately. Picking the tool is not an undo step and does not mark the document modified; the ruler enters history the first time you actually move it. A drag repositions it, or redraws it from empty canvas.

Linear

A single fixed straight line. Every stroke projects onto that one line, wherever you start drawing. Drag on the canvas to set the two endpoints. Use it for one repeated edge, a horizon, or a single straight rail.

Parallel

A fixed direction. Each stroke snaps to a line through its own start point, parallel to that direction. Drag once to set the direction, then draw anywhere to lay down parallel strokes. Use it for hatching, wood grain, or any field of parallel lines.

Radial (focus)

A focus point. Each stroke snaps to the ray through the focus and the stroke's start point, so lines radiate from (or converge on) the focus. Drag to place the focus point. A stroke that begins exactly on the focus has no direction, so it does not snap. Use it for sunbursts, spokes, and one-point radial layouts.

Concentric

A center point. Each stroke is locked to the circle centered there whose radius is fixed at your stroke's start point. The radius comes from where you begin; the stroke then sweeps around that circle. Drag to place the center. A stroke that begins on the center has no radius, so it does not snap. Use it for rings, ripples, and concentric arcs.

Ruler options

These controls appear on the tool-options bar for any of the four rulers.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Resetaction-Recenter the active ruler and mark it placed, so it is immediately visible at the canvas center.
Guides (N)readoutlive countShows how many guides currently exist.
+ Haction-Add a horizontal guide at the canvas mid-line.
+ Vaction-Add a vertical guide at the canvas mid-line.
Clearaction-Remove all guides.
Grid snapon/offoffRail strokes to the nearest View grid line of the dominant axis.

Hint shown on the bar: "Drag on the canvas to place or move the ruler, focus, or a guide."

The kind of ruler is decided by which ruler tool is active, not by a control on this bar. The Snap checkbox itself lives in the shared header (above), not in this list.

Placing and moving a ruler

  • For Linear and Parallel, the first drag sets the start point, then drags the end point. Later drags grab whichever endpoint is nearer.
  • For Radial and Concentric, only the single point (the focus or center) is placed and dragged.
  • Reset recenters the ruler: a horizontal line across the middle for Linear and Parallel, or the canvas center for the single-point kinds.

Rulers are per layer. Each layer's placed ruler shows as a ruler icon on its row in the Layers panel: click it to hide or show the ruler, and right-click it for Show in all layers or Show in editing layer only, Move to active layer, and Delete ruler. Only the active layer's ruler, or another layer's ruler set to show in all layers, constrains a stroke.

Guides

Guides are infinite horizontal or vertical lines. A stroke that begins near one snaps onto it, with the snapped line passing through your stroke's start point (only the guide's axis coordinate is forced). Guides are added from the ruler options bar with the + H and + V buttons. Once one exists, a Guides & Rulers section appears under the layer stack listing each guide, plus the symmetry axis and the perspective setup when they are on. Every row has an eye to show or hide it and a trash to delete it, and a Clear guides button removes them all.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Guide orientationhorizontal / verticalper add buttonWhether the guide is a horizontal or vertical line.
Maximum guidesup to 16-The + H and + V buttons stop adding once 16 guides exist.

A new guide is added at the canvas mid-line. A stroke snaps to the nearest guide within about 6 pixels on screen of where it starts, and only while Snap is on. You can drag a guide on the canvas to move it (the drag changes only its constrained coordinate). The Clear button removes every guide at once.

Grid snap

Grid snap is separate from rulers and guides. With Grid snap on, once a stroke has moved far enough for its direction to be clear (about 6 pixels on screen), it rails to the nearest View grid line of the dominant axis, so you can draw straight along grid lines.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Grid snap (ruler bar)on/offoffRail strokes to the nearest View grid line.
Grid spacing (View ▸ Show)slider 4 to 51264 pxThe spacing of the View grid, in canvas pixels.
Grid overlay (View ▸ Show ▸ Grid)on/offsee MenusWhether the grid is drawn on the canvas.

Grid snap uses the View grid spacing. It works off the spacing whether or not the grid overlay is actually shown.

Symmetry

The Symmetry tool mirrors and rotates each dab of your stroke around a movable center, so a single stroke is duplicated into a symmetric pattern. It applies to brush dabs, smudge strokes, and vector strokes. Entering the Symmetry tool while symmetry is Off starts it on Vertical so there is something to see and edit.

Modes

ModeCopiesWhat it does
Off1No symmetry.
Vertical2Mirror left to right across the (vertical, when unrotated) axis.
Horizontal2Mirror top to bottom across the perpendicular axis.
Both (4-way)4Mirror across both axes, a 4-way kaleidoscope.
Radial (N-fold)N (doubled if Mirror is on)N evenly spaced rotational copies around the center.

Symmetry options

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ModeOff / Vertical / Horizontal / Both (4-way) / Radial (N-fold)Off (auto-starts on Vertical when you enter the tool)The symmetry mode.
Sectors (Radial only)2 to 246How many rotational copies the Radial mode makes.
Mirror (Radial only)on/offoffAlso mirror within each sector (kaleidoscope), doubling the copies.
Recentreaction-Reset the symmetry axis to the canvas center and the angle to 0.

Hint shown on the bar: "Drag on the canvas to move the centre or rotate the axis."

Moving and rotating the axis

The symmetry axis has two on-canvas handles: a center dot and a rotation handle that sits out along the axis. Drag the center dot to move the origin of the mirror or rotation. Drag the rotation handle to turn the axis to any angle. The whole move or rotate is one undo step.

The center starts at the canvas mid-point and the angle starts at 0. Recentre returns both to those defaults.

Perspective

The Perspective tool sets up vanishing points, an eye-level line, and an optional perspective grid. Strokes then snap onto the line that runs from where you start toward the best-matching vanishing point. Entering the tool while perspective is Off starts it on 2-point and arms placing the first vanishing point. Leaving the tool disarms placement so an armed click cannot hijack another tool's first stroke.

Modes

ModeVanishing pointsWhat it does
Off0No perspective.
1-point1Frontal one-point perspective.
2-point2Two vanishing points on a horizon, the typical exterior setup.
3-point3Adds a third point for vertical convergence.

Perspective options

When the mode is Off, only the mode buttons are shown. The rest appear once you pick a mode.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ModeOff / 1-point / 2-point / 3-pointOff (auto-starts on 2-point when you enter the tool)The number of vanishing points.
VP1 ... VPn (one per mode)action-Arm placing that vanishing point, then press on the canvas to set it.
Snap to perspectiveon/offonSnap strokes onto the lines toward a vanishing point.
Gridon/offoffDraw a denser perspective grid.
Density (Grid only)2 to 248How dense the perspective grid is.
Eye levelaction-Reset the eye-level line to the canvas center.
Clearaction-Clear all vanishing points and re-arm placing the first one.

Hint shown on the bar: "Drag a vanishing point or the eye-level line to move it."

Placing vanishing points

Click a VP button to arm placement, then press on the canvas to drop that point. Placement flows on to the next unset point for the mode, so you can place them one after another. Each placement is a single undo step, and the placement gesture never paints. The eye-level line starts at the canvas mid-line (height divided by two).

Moving points and the eye level

When no placement is armed, drag a placed vanishing point to move it, or grab the eye-level line to slide it up or down. Each drag is one undo step.

How perspective snapping works

Perspective snapping is active only when Snap is on and at least one vanishing point is placed. On pointer-down it records the start point; the line direction locks once you have moved about 6 pixels on screen. The vanishing point chosen is the one whose line best aligns with your initial movement (toward or away from the point both count). Every later sample then projects onto that line.

Perspective snapping is the fallback below ruler, guide, and grid snapping: if a ruler or guide is snapping the stroke, that takes precedence.

Smart Shapes (draw and hold to snap)

Smart Shape is a gesture, not a separate tool. It works on the Brush tool and the other paint tools (Pen, Pencil, and Airbrush), and never for a transparent-paint (Erase) stroke. Draw a freehand shape and then hold the pointer still at the end of the stroke. If the path you drew reads as a clean primitive, the freehand is replaced by the snapped shape, rendered with your active brush, and dropped into on-canvas re-edit. If it matches nothing, your freehand stroke is kept, so you never lose an intentional squiggle.

A Smart Shape checkbox on the paint tools' options bar turns the gesture on or off (on by default, persisted across sessions). Untick it if you prefer every stroke to stay freehand.

SettingValueWhat it does
Hold time800 msHow long you must dwell at the tail before the shape snaps.
Dwell radius6 screen pxMoving farther than this re-arms the hold timer at the new spot. Measured on screen, so the feel is the same at any zoom; drawing slowly while zoomed in no longer reads as a hold.
Size floor48 screen pxStrokes whose on-screen bounding-box diagonal is smaller than this never snap, so small hatching and detail work stays freehand.

Because the snap is checked both as you move and once per frame, a held-still mouse (which sends no move events) snaps just like a tablet pen.

What it recognizes

Smart Shape is deliberately conservative so a back-and-forth shading or fill scribble is never force-straightened. A path is rejected (left freehand) when it has fewer than 8 points, is shorter than 12 pixels, has a bounding-box diagonal under 10 canvas pixels (on top of the 48 screen-pixel size floor above), or reverses direction along its own axis more than 3 times (the scribble gate).

When a path does pass, it can snap to:

  • Line (a clean single-pass straight stroke)
  • Arc (an open bowed stroke)
  • Ellipse and Rectangle (axis-aligned closed shapes)
  • Polygon (a rotated rectangle or a convex shape of 3 to 7 corners)
  • Rotated ellipse

For a closed stroke, the tightest-fitting candidate wins.

Constraining and re-editing

  • Hold Shift as the shape snaps to constrain it: a perfect circle or square, or a line snapped to the nearest 15-degree increment.
  • The snapped shape floats with draggable handles, an oriented selection box, and a rotation handle. While dragging a handle, Shift constrains to a square or a 15-degree line; on the rotation handle, Shift snaps rotation to 15-degree steps.
  • Commit by tapping off the handles or pressing Enter. Cancel with Esc.
  • On a vector layer, the snapped shape commits as an editable vector stroke rather than a flat raster shape. See Vector Editing.

The same shape re-edit handles are used by the Line tool. See Shapes.

New in 0.9.0

  • Rulers and guides in Vector mode. Ctrl+R shows edge rulers along the canvas; drag out of one to place a guide, and View ▸ Guides and View ▸ Snap To manage them. See Vector Editing and Output. The rulers on this page are the drawing aids and are unchanged.
  • Cleaner history. Picking a ruler tool no longer marks the document modified, four ruler undo defects are fixed by recording ruler edits chronologically, and the View grid no longer drifts out of alignment with the artwork.

See also

File Formats and Export

Limner reads and writes its native project format, opens and writes layered Photoshop and OpenRaster documents, opens and exports SVG, exchanges brush tips through ABR, exports flat pictures as PNG, JPEG, CMYK TIFF and PDF, exports animation as GIF, MP4, animated PNG or a PNG sequence, and imports the common raster image types, including HEIC, HEIF and AVIF stills. This page lists what each route preserves and where a round trip is deliberately limited.

Every export knows what its destination format cannot hold. Exporting to SVG, PSD or OpenRaster from a document that uses something the format lacks (adjustment layers, a blend mode the format cannot express, guides, saved selections, a timelapse) opens an Export with changes? summary before the save dialog, with Continue and Cancel, instead of telling you after the file is written. The flat picture formats keep their after-the-fact notice. Exporting never changes the Limner document itself.

Quick reference

FormatExtensionReadWriteNotes
Limner document.limner (legacy .artpaint)YesYesThe full project: layers, folders and folder masks, generated layers, masks, channels, the Reference board, animation, the vector scene with its symbols, artboards, guides and page colour, the timelapse, and history
Limner Book.limnerbookYes (Open Book)Yes (Save)A multi-page comic / manga / book project, one document per page
Photoshop document.psd, .psbYes (File ▸ Open)Yes (Export PSD)Layers, folders, masks, text, effects, vector masks, pattern fills, Smart Objects and adjustment layers stay live; every colour mode and depth Photoshop writes opens
OpenRaster.oraYes (File ▸ Open, OpenRaster file type)Yes (Export OpenRaster)Layers, folders, masks, opacity and blend modes, for exchange with Krita, GIMP and MyPaint
SVG.svgYes (File ▸ Open, SVG file type, or File ▸ Import… ▸ SVG)Yes (Export SVG)Groups, gradients, patterns and layers survive the import; the whole document exports, painted layers as embedded images
Photoshop brush.abrYes (import)Yes (export)Brush tips, see Brushes
PNG.pngAs imageYes (Export PNG)Keeps transparency; can be written at a chosen size
JPEG.jpg, .jpegAs imageYes (Export JPEG)Flattened over white; can be written at a chosen size
PDF.pdfNoYes (Export PDF, or PDF in Export As)Single-page raster and vector export, or a whole Book in one file; physical page size from the canvas DPI
CMYK TIFF.tifNoYes (Export CMYK TIFF)Flattened over white and converted through the active press profile, see Color
Animated PNG.pngNoYes (Export Animated PNG)Animation export with full colour and real transparency
GIF.gifYes (Import GIF as Animation Frames, or as an image)Yes (Export GIF)Animation export; the frame import is a Limner Plus feature
MP4 video.mp4NoYes (Export MP4 video)Animation and timelapse export through the built-in encoder
PNG sequencea folder of .png filesYes (Import Image Sequence as Animation Frames)Yes (Export PNG sequence)One file per frame
HEIC / HEIF / AVIF.heic, .heif, .avifStill images through installed system codecsNoWindows uses WIC with its codec extensions; macOS and iPad use ImageIO. Animated files and unsupported high-precision or HDR color data are refused (convert those to 8-bit SDR sRGB PNG first)
Image as layer.png, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif, .webp, .bmp, .tga, .tif, .tiff, .heic, .heif, .avifYes (File ▸ Import… ▸ Image)NoThe file picker and drag and drop accept the same raster image set

All keyboard shortcuts mentioned here are the defaults and can be changed in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

The native Limner format (.limner)

Limner's own project format is a single file that holds your entire working document. New files save as .limner by default; older .artpaint files still open and re-save in place, because both extensions share the same on-disk format. The default save name is untitled.limner.

Note
Since 0.9.0 the file is a versioned container of named parts. Damage to one part is reported as that one part (a layer that will not read, say) instead of taking the whole document down, and every save writes the current layout. There is no longer a first-save notice about the format being experimental.

What a .limner file stores

A document file is the complete project, not just flattened pixels. The current format (version 70) saves:

  • Every raster layer (name, blend mode, opacity, visibility, locks, and its painted pixels).
  • Layer folders nested up to 8 levels, including empty folders, and the raster mask a folder can carry.
  • Layer masks, vector masks, and the mask density and feather that came in from a Photoshop file.
  • Full layer locks, transparency locks, and raster clipping state.
  • Fill layers and live adjustment layers, including the live Gaussian Blur layer.
  • Named selection channels.
  • Reference layers.
  • The per-document Reference board, including its embedded photos, arrangement, pan, zoom, scale, stacking order, rotations and per-photo flips.
  • Re-editable text layers with their kerning and line-spacing rules, so you can keep editing text after reopening and older documents lay out exactly as they did. Characters you styled on their own (bold, italic, size or color over a selection) are kept too; a document with styled characters needs this build or newer to open, and one without keeps its older stamp.
  • The color hints and options a Colorize layer is solved from, so the flat color re-solves after a relaunch when a hint or the lines change. A document with one needs this build or newer to open; one without keeps its older stamp.
  • The retained source of a transformed or warped layer (the pixels it was lifted from, the pixels under the result, and the box or lattice), so Layer ▸ Transform ▸ Edit Transform re-opens it after a relaunch. A document with one needs this build or newer to open; one without keeps its older stamp.
  • Vector-layer strokes and the brush snapshots they were drawn with.
  • The Vector scene: every object with its ordered fills and strokes, corner styles, anchor kinds, dashes, arrowheads and width profiles; groups with their opacity, blend mode and isolation; clip and mask groups; clones; symbols and pattern paints; shared gradients and appearance styles; blends, mesh gradients, envelopes, perspective deformations and live effects; text objects; artboards and their export sets; and the page colour of a Vector document.
  • Construction aids: each layer's placed ruler (its kind, geometry, visibility and show-in-all-layers setting) and the document's guides.
  • Comic panels (frame folders) on a page. See the Book format below.
  • Animation, when the document uses it: every frame's cels, the frame rate, play mode, the in/out range, onion-skin settings, colour tags, the audio track, the 2D camera and its keys, layer keyframes and parenting, and the graph-editor curves. A single-frame document stores none of this. See Animation Mode.
  • The embedded timelapse recording, so it travels with the art and can resume on reopen. See Timelapse.
  • Per-document session stats (active drawing time and committed stroke count). See Stats panel.
  • The canvas size and DPI.
  • A capped slice of undo/redo history (the most recent 16 undo and 16 redo entries each, paint strokes and layer add/remove only).

Every version from 1 through 70 loads. Since 0.9.0 every save and autosave writes the current format in the damage-resistant container layout, and a file written that way needs 0.9.0 or later to open. Documents saved by 0.8.7 and older open exactly as before, and nothing is converted until you save, so keep a copy of anything you still need to open in an older version. In every case an older build refuses a newer file instead of dropping data. The classic single-stream layout is still available under the environment variable ARTPAINT_CLASSIC_SAVE=1, which stamps the lowest version the document's features allow. A file without animation opens as a single frame. An animation reopens on its timeline, a vector scene reopens in Vector mode, and everything else opens in Illustration. Unknown future versions are refused cleanly.

Pixels are stored compressed (run-length packed) on disk, so typical mostly-empty artwork saves small. Files are written atomically: Limner stages the new file beside the target and renames it into place, so the previous version is never left half-written, even when saving over the file you have open.

Checked after every save

Every save reopens the file it just wrote and confirms that it is there, that it is the size that was written, and that it starts with a header this version reads. If any of that fails you are told at once and the document stays unsaved, so the work is still in front of you, and the previous file on disk is left untouched. Exports are checked the same way before Limner reports success, and the autosave keeps running even when it cannot take its lock file.

Saving and opening

CommandMenu pathDefault shortcut
SaveFile ▸ SaveCtrl+S
Save AsFile ▸ Save AsCtrl+Shift+S
OpenFile ▸ OpenCtrl+O
Note
the shortcuts above are the defaults. Confirm and rebind them in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

Save writes to the document's tracked path; if nothing has changed since the last save, Limner skips the write. Save As prompts for a name and location and offers both the .limner and .artpaint extensions. If a file with the chosen name already exists, Limner shows its own overwrite confirmation in the app.

Opening a file that is already open in another tab just switches to that tab rather than opening a second copy. You can also open a document by double-clicking it: on Windows and macOS (the .limner / .artpaint association launches Limner.exe with the file), and on iPad a document opens straight out of the Files app.

Limits and safety

FieldRange on load
Canvas width and height1 to 16384 pixels each
DPIany finite value greater than 0

Documents are loaded defensively: a corrupt or hostile file produces a clear error (for example "not a Limner document", "unsupported file version", "file has no layers", or "file has a corrupt layer"), shown in a dialog rather than crashing the app. A file written by a build with a different internal tile size cannot be loaded.

For the on-disk layout, the version history table, and the developer-level details, see the developer file-formats page.

The Book format (.limnerbook)

A Book is a multi-page comic, manga, or book project. It is not a separate drawing mode: each page is an ordinary Limner document (it can use Illustration or Vector), and the Book wraps an ordered list of those pages with its own page metadata. The whole project saves as a single .limnerbook file, with one full per-page document embedded inside it.

Creating, opening, and saving

CommandMenu pathWhat it does
New Book…File ▸ New Book…Starts a new, empty Book project.
Open Book…File ▸ Open Book…Opens an existing .limnerbook file.
Open Recent BookFile ▸ Open Recent BookLists your recently opened or saved Books, most recent first.

When a Book is open you save it with the normal Save and Save As commands, which write the .limnerbook file (Save prompts for a name and location the first time). The default save name is untitled.limnerbook. Once a Book is open, a comic Panel tool appears in the tool strip; panels you draw on a page clip that page's artwork to the panel frame, so nothing spills into the gutters. See Menus for the File-menu commands.

What a .limnerbook file stores

  • The ordered list of pages, each one a complete embedded Limner document (the same native document shape a stand-alone .limner file holds).
  • The Book's page order and per-page identity, so pages keep their place when you reorder or page through them.
  • Book-level metadata (such as the binding and whether pages read right to left).

Because each page is a full document, every page keeps its own layers, masks, vectors, text, and comic panels. Older Books still open in newer builds, and an older per-page document inside a Book loads the same way a stand-alone older .limner file does.

PSD and PSB (Photoshop)

Limner opens every kind of Photoshop document and writes layered PSD that Photoshop reopens with its editable structure intact. Keep the original of anything that relies on a Photoshop feature Limner has no model for: the import notice lists exactly what was kept live, what was kept only as pixels, and what could not be represented.

Export PSD

File ▸ Export As… with PSD chosen writes a layered Photoshop file:

  • One PSD layer per Limner layer, with its name, blend mode (all 30 modes, Dissolve included), opacity, visibility and locks.
  • Folders as layer groups, with Pass Through and a folder's own mask kept as a group mask. Empty folders are not represented.
  • Layer masks as PSD layer masks, and vector masks as Photoshop paths.
  • Text layers as Photoshop's own live text records, so they are still typeable in Photoshop. Characters you styled on their own (bold, italic, size or color over a selection) arrive in the layer's one style, and the export notice says so.
  • Layer effects as live Photoshop effects, one of each kind per layer: drop shadow, inner shadow, outer glow, inner glow, stroke, color overlay, gradient overlay and bevel (inner or outer). A layer wearing two of one kind, a blend mode Photoshop's effects do not have, or a pattern overlay (Photoshop's pattern block has not been measured) keeps its rendered effect layers instead, and the export notice names it. Satin and the emboss styles are not modeled.
  • The flattened merged image and the document DPI.

Notes and limits:

  • Channels are written with RLE compression and per-layer bounds, so large documents with many layers export where they were once refused. The old practical ceiling of about a dozen full-size layers is gone.
  • PSD always exports the full canvas. The crop presets below apply only to the flattened formats (PNG, JPEG, PDF and CMYK TIFF).
  • Layer names are stored up to 255 bytes, and the format allows at most 32767 layers.
  • A multi-frame animation exports as one flattened layer per frame, "Frame 1" upward, the shape Photoshop's Make Frames From Layers rebuilds a frame animation from.
  • Adjustment layers are written as Photoshop's own adjustment layers with their settings, so they stay live there too. Fill layers, comic panels, and anything else PSD cannot carry live are written as pixels, and the Export with changes summary says so before the save dialog.

Photoshop documents

File ▸ Open takes a Photoshop file as a new Limner document, up to 16384 by 16384 pixels and 6 GB on the desktop (the iPad build stops at 8192 pixels and 2 GB). What opens:

  • PSD and PSB (the Large Document Format, which Photoshop switches to above 30,000 pixels or 2 GB), with raw, RLE (PackBits) or ZIP channel compression.
  • 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit float depths, and RGB, greyscale, CMYK, Lab, duotone, multichannel, indexed and bitmap colour modes. Everything is brought to the 8-bit RGB Limner paints in: 32-bit float values encode through the sRGB curve exactly as Photoshop's own 8-bit conversion does, a greyscale file keeps the tones its Dot Gain profile implies, and an indexed palette resolves to real colours. A duotone arrives as greyscale (Photoshop does not publish its ink specification), and a multichannel file brings in its first plate as greyscale and leaves the other spot channels out; Limner tells you so as the file opens, in both cases.
  • Layers with their names, blend modes (Dissolve too), opacity and visibility; groups as folders, Pass Through and group masks included; layer masks with the Density and Feather Photoshop keeps live; vector masks, which stay point-editable.
  • Text layers as re-editable text with their line breaks, and solid and gradient fills as fill layers.
  • Layer effects, live where Limner has the matching kind (drop shadow, inner shadow, outer glow, inner glow, stroke, color overlay, gradient overlay, inner and outer bevel): each is rendered into its own layer beside the one that wears it, the way Photoshop's own Create Layers command does, and the set stays editable from the layer's fx button or Layer ▸ Layer Effects…. A layer whose effects include satin, an emboss, a pattern overlay, or a gradient or pattern stroke keeps its pixels, and the import notice names the effect Limner could not draw.
  • Pattern fills as live tilings, and Smart Objects with their embedded originals: in the Layers panel, Export Original writes that file out unchanged and Replace Contents swaps in a new one through the same placement, as one undo step.
  • Levels, Curves, Brightness/Contrast, Color Balance, Posterize, Gradient Map, Invert, Threshold, Hue/Saturation, Exposure, Black and White, Vibrance, Color Lookup, Photo Filter, Selective Color and Channel Mixer adjustment layers as live, re-editable adjustments, including the values modern Photoshop stores in its newer records.
  • A document with no layers falls back to the merged image (named "Background"). A saved selection stored in the file is recognised as a selection rather than mistaken for transparency.

Whatever has no matching model in Limner is kept as pixels, never dropped silently. Nearly every Photoshop document embeds the standard sRGB profile, and that opens without a conversion notice; other profiles are converted to the working space and reported. If the file has no DPI, Limner uses 96. The imported document starts with fresh history and is not tied to a .limner path until you save. A PSD that cannot be imported is refused with a reason you can act on, and the message names the real size ceiling when a file is over it.

OpenRaster (.ora)

OpenRaster is the layered exchange format Krita, GIMP and MyPaint share. File ▸ Open takes an .ora as a new document when you pick the OpenRaster file type (dropping the file onto the window does the same), and File ▸ Export As… with OpenRaster chosen writes one: layers with their names, opacity, visibility and blend modes, folders, and layer and folder masks. Fill and adjustment layers are written as pixels, and the Export with changes summary lists anything else the format cannot keep before the file is written. Stack isolation and nested stack offsets are honored when an .ora is opened.

ABR (Photoshop brushes)

Limner imports and exports .abr brush sets. Importing brings sampled (bitmap) brush tips in as new brushes; exporting writes a widely compatible ABR version 2 file. These commands live in the Brush picker, not the File menu. See Brushes for the full workflow, the import folder naming, and the dynamics that do and do not travel in the ABR format.

SVG (open, import and export)

Export. File ▸ Export As… with SVG chosen writes a standalone SVG 1.1 document sized to your canvas, so vector artwork leaves Limner as true resolution-independent geometry. The whole document goes: every vector object with its paths, fills, strokes, dashes and offsets, arrowheads as markers that scale with the stroke, width profiles as filled shapes, ordered fills and strokes, linear and radial gradients (shared gradients included), pattern paints as patterns, clip groups, symbols, text objects and text layers as SVG text with the same layout the canvas draws, painted raster layers as embedded PNG images cropped to their pixels, and folder masks as clip boundaries. Include page color, shown in Export As when SVG is chosen, adds the page color of a Vector document as a background rectangle. The default save name is artwork.svg. If the document has no artwork on any layer, Limner reports "Nothing to export".

What the file cannot keep, it tells you about before the save dialog: adjustment layers, a blend mode CSS cannot express, text in a font this machine lacks, guides, rulers, saved selections or a timelapse each appear in the Export with changes summary, with Continue and Cancel.

Open and import. File ▸ Open takes an .svg as a new document when you pick the SVG file type (dropping the file onto the window does the same), and File ▸ Import… with SVG chosen (in Vector, File ▸ Place / Import ▸ Import…) brings one into the open document, above the active layer, at the SVG's own coordinates, as one undo step. File ▸ Open takes Photoshop, OpenRaster and SVG files as well as Limner documents and Books, and it points you to the right command if you choose another type. Groups become groups. A group that mixes paths and images becomes a layer folder, keeping its paint order, opacity, blend mode and isolation, and importing as layers follows the active layer's folder context. Gradients and pattern fills come in as shared gradients, symbols and pattern paints, markers arrive as ordinary shapes, and an SVG saved with layers (the way Inkscape writes them) opens with those layers. A supported clip path becomes a folder mask, including holes in a compound path. See Vector editing for building vector artwork.

PDF (single-page and Book)

Choose PDF in File ▸ Export As… (in Vector, File ▸ Export ▸ Export As…), or run Export PDF from the command palette. A raster document exports as one image with transparency. Documents containing graphic layers keep supported paths, solid fills, strokes, gradients, clipping and blend modes as vectors; graphic text exports as outlines.

Unsupported content, including patterns, reflected or repeating gradients, live effects and masks, exports as images, and a masked folder stays one image. A blend or adjustment that depends on earlier content includes that content in its fallback image. The export notice names every affected layer.

Comic panel clipping, spatial adjustments, and exports that exceed the layered image budget render the complete page as one image, with a notice.

Crop, export width, panel rendering and the watermark use the same settings as PNG. The page's physical size is the exported pixel dimensions divided by the canvas DPI: 1200 pixels at 300 DPI make a 4-inch page edge. Reducing export width at the same DPI also reduces the page's physical size.

This command exports a single page; use Book export for the whole Book. PDF export does not create PDF/X and does not embed fonts or an ICC profile. Keep the native document for editing. On iPad the completed PDF opens the Files destination picker.

Book PDF

In Book export options, choose PDF to write the pages in order into one file. Each page is rendered as an image at the Book's resolution and keeps its own trim inset. The PDF includes a full-canvas bleed box and, when the page has bleed, a trim box for the final cut edge. PDF keeps whole pages; screen slicing applies to PNG sequences. Canceling an export removes its incomplete PDF. Choose a new file name if an output already exists.

Animation export

An animation exports from the Timeline's Export menu or File ▸ Export Animation as GIF, animated PNG, MP4 video, or a numbered PNG sequence with a timing.json sidecar, and a multi-frame animation exports to PSD as one flattened layer per frame. The menu chooses which frames to write (every frame, or every 2nd, 3rd or 4th, with the timing kept), the output size from 10% to 400%, and Smooth or Sharp resampling; An MP4 export can carry the track's slice of the range inside the movie as an AAC track (the default on Windows, macOS and iPad); the Audio control in the Export dialog can instead write a WAV file beside the output, or leave the audio out. A PNG sequence always uses the WAV file when audio is on. See Animation Mode.

PNG and JPEG (still image export)

Both export the flattened canvas. Choose the format in File ▸ Export As…, where the crop, size and extras sit beside it, or press Ctrl+E to export a PNG straight away with the current settings.

FormatMenu pathDefault nameTransparency
PNGFile ▸ Export As…, PNGartwork.pngKept (RGBA)
JPEGFile ▸ Export As…, JPEGartwork.jpgFlattened over white

JPEG has no alpha channel, so transparent areas are composited over opaque white before encoding. PNG keeps the alpha channel. PNG also embeds the document DPI (a pHYs chunk), so print software reads the intended physical size. JPEG export does not write resolution metadata.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
JPEG quality1 to 10092Fixed encoder quality (artwork-grade, not adjustable in the UI)

Export at size

PNG, JPEG and single-page PDF exports can be written at a chosen pixel size: Full size, or 2048, 1600, 1200, 1080 or 800 px wide, or a custom width from 16 to 16384 px. The size applies after the crop preset and never upscales, so you can paint large and deliver small without touching the document. Image ▸ Image Size resamples the document itself instead, every layer, mask, and selection coming along, and lets you edit the DPI after creation. On a Book page, Burn panels into the export in File ▸ Export As… (shown only when the page has panels, on by default) draws the comic panels, their borders and fills into the exported picture, and a webtoon Book's export can cut each page into screens; see Book.

Crop and aspect presets

The Crop to setting in File ▸ Export As… sets a center-crop applied to PNG, JPEG, single-page PDF and CMYK TIFF exports (PSD always exports the full canvas). The chosen aspect persists between exports.

PresetOn-screen labelAspect (width : height)Result
NativeNativenoneNo crop, full canvas
Portrait9:16 (vertical)9:16Tall crop for TikTok, Reels, Shorts
Square1:1 (square)1:1Square crop for an Instagram feed
Landscape16:9 (wide)16:9Wide crop for YouTube

Limner takes the largest rectangle of the chosen ratio that fits the canvas, centred, with even dimensions and offsets. A canvas under 2 pixels on an edge exports uncropped.

Watermark

You can stamp an optional signature or logo onto PNG, JPEG, single-page PDF and CMYK TIFF exports, and onto timelapse videos. The toggle and settings live in the File ▸ Export As… dialog, on the rows shown for those formats, and in the Timelapse panel's Watermark section; both edit the same settings.

  • Add watermark in Export As (or On in the Timelapse panel) turns the stamp on or off. The toggle is stored separately from the settings, so turning it off never discards your configured image or placement.
  • Settings… next to Add watermark opens the configuration window. In the Timelapse panel, Change… picks the image and the placement controls sit below it.

If "Add watermark" is on but no image has been chosen, the export stops and tells you to pick one ("no watermark image chosen"). A watermark you asked for is never silently dropped: if the chosen image fails to load, the export aborts instead of writing an unwatermarked file. The watermark is sized against the final exported dimensions (after any crop).

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Add watermarkon / offoffEnables the watermark stamp on PNG, JPEG, single-page PDF, CMYK TIFF and timelapse video
Watermark imagea PNG or JPEG filenoneThe signature or logo to stamp
CornerTop left, Top right, Bottom left, Bottom right, CenterBottom rightWhere the stamp sits (margin is ignored for Center)
Scale1 to 50 (% of export width)15Watermark width as a percent of the exported image width
Opacity0 to 11.0Watermark transparency multiplier
Margin0 to 512 px24Gap between the stamp and the image edges

Import Image as Layer

File ▸ Import… with Image chosen brings a PNG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, BMP, TGA, TIFF, HEIC/HEIF, or AVIF still image into the current document as a new layer above the active one. The image is centred on the canvas at its native scale (clipped if it is larger than the canvas, the way Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint behave), and it lands in a single undo step, named after the file. Supported embedded RGB ICC profiles are converted to working sRGB first; a malformed or unsupported profile leaves the open document untouched. Encoded raster sources are capped at 512 MiB, at the platform dimension ceiling (16384 px on desktop, 8192 on iPad), and by a bounded decoder allocation before full pixel conversion. This command requires a document to be open. On iPad the picker offers Photos as well as Files. Multi-frame files decoded through this still-image route contribute one decoded image; use the GIF or image-sequence animation commands for frames. Animated HEIF and AVIF are refused.

HEIC, HEIF and AVIF system codecs

macOS and iPad use ImageIO. Windows uses WIC and installed codec extensions: HEIF Image Extensions with HEVC Video Extensions for HEIC photos, or AV1 Video Extension for AVIF. If a required decoder is unavailable, Limner explains how to obtain it or asks you to convert the image to PNG or JPEG. Linux reports that a supported system decoder is unavailable. No HEVC or AV1 decoder is bundled with Limner.

Supported embedded RGB profiles are converted to working sRGB. Animated files, unsupported pixel layouts, higher-precision data and HDR color spaces are refused with a conversion suggestion. The dimension and allocation limits above apply before full pixel conversion. EXIF orientation is left unchanged, matching the existing JPEG import behavior.

On Windows, transparency is read from the file's alpha image by Limner itself (the Windows codecs alone return every pixel opaque), an embedded profile is converted by Limner rather than by the codec, and the codecs' own color conversion is what you get for the rest. A file tagged with a color space other than sRGB but carrying no profile is refused with the PNG suggestion, because the codecs would decode it in their default space. A HEIC or AVIF whose alpha image cannot be decoded is refused rather than imported flattened.

Drag and drop

Drop a file onto the Limner window to open or import it. Dropping several files at once handles each one in turn. Limner routes by file type:

File typeWhat happens
.limner, .artpaintOpens as a document
.psd, .psbImports as a new document
.limnerbookOpens the Book
.oraImports as a new document
.svgImports as a new document, its groups as vector layers
.abrImports as brushes
.png, .jpg, .jpeg, .webp, .bmp, .gif, .tga, .tif, .tiff, .heic, .heif, .avifAdds as a new layer if a document is open, otherwise opens as a new document
anything elseShows a short notice listing the accepted types

The file picker and drag and drop accept the same raster image set. Dropped .psd, .psb, .ora and .svg files open as new documents, the same as choosing them in the File ▸ Open dialog, and a dropped .limnerbook opens the Book. When an image is dropped with no document open, Limner creates a white-paper document sized to the image (capped at 16384 by 16384 pixels) and lays the image in at 1:1.

Crash-recovery autosave

While you work, Limner periodically writes a crash-recovery snapshot of each modified document in the same format as a normal save. These are cleared on a clean exit. If the app closed unexpectedly, the next launch offers to Restore or Discard the recovered work.

See also

New in 0.9.0

  • A container that keeps damage to one part. Every save writes a versioned container of named parts, so a damaged layer is reported as that one part rather than as a lost file. A file written this way needs 0.9.0 or later; older documents open exactly as before and nothing is converted until you save.
  • Every kind of PSD opens, and the editable parts round-trip. PSB, 16-bit and 32-bit float, greyscale, CMYK, Lab, indexed and bitmap files all open; text, layer effects, vector masks, pattern fills, Smart Objects and sixteen kinds of adjustment layer arrive live, and text, effects and vector masks write back as Photoshop's own records.
  • OpenRaster and SVG go both ways. Krita, GIMP and MyPaint files open and save through .ora, SVG files open with their structure intact, and the whole document, painted layers included, exports to SVG.
  • Limner checks the file it just saved. Every save and export is reopened and verified before Limner reports success, and a failure leaves the previous file untouched.
  • Export losses are shown first. An Export with changes summary lists what SVG, PSD or OpenRaster cannot keep before the save dialog, with Continue and Cancel.
  • Image Size. Image ▸ Image Size resamples the whole document to new pixel dimensions, bringing every layer, mask, and selection along, and lets you change the document DPI after creation instead of being locked to the value you started with. The aspect ratio stays locked so text layers stay true to their pixels.
  • Export at Size. PNG and JPEG export can be written at a chosen pixel size without touching the document, so you can paint large and deliver small.
  • Animated PNG export. Animations export as APNG, which keeps full colour and real transparency where GIF cannot, and plays in every modern browser.
  • Copy and paste reach the system clipboard. Ctrl+C copies the current selection to the system clipboard for pasting into other programs, and Ctrl+V pastes an image copied elsewhere into your document as a new layer.
  • PSD export handles real projects. The writer now uses RLE compression and per-layer bounds, so large multi-layer documents export where they were previously refused outright. The old practical ceiling of about a dozen full-size layers is gone.
  • PSD import reads live adjustments. Adjustment layers arrive as live, re-editable adjustments instead of blank layers, including the values recent Photoshop versions store in their newer records, and Gradient Map now imports correctly. A PSD that cannot be imported is refused with a reason you can act on.
  • Comic panels reach every export. Exported PNG, JPEG, and PSD images, batch exports, and page thumbnails previously emitted the raw unclipped art with no borders, gutters, or panel fills. Exports now match what the canvas shows.
  • Webtoon slicing is an export option. Slicing a tall page into episode-sized pieces is now chosen explicitly at export, and the bundled webtoon preset is a tall episode canvas (800 × 12800) that the slicer can actually cut.
  • Bigger canvases and print DPI. Canvas sizes reach 16384 px per side, with a memory warning before you commit rather than a refusal, and DPI reaches 1200.
  • SVG export keeps clipping. Clip groups previously exported as if the clip did not exist.

Timelapse

There is no menu entry and no keyboard shortcut for the timelapse. Everything is driven from the Timelapse panel (a dock tab) and from the two short prompts described below.

How recording works

  • Limner captures the canvas (the flattened composite of all layers) and encodes it to an H.264 .mp4 with an encoder built into the app. There is nothing to install and no companion files: encoding works the same on any GPU.
  • Capture is non-blocking. Frames are read back from the GPU and handed to a dedicated encoder thread, so painting never stalls on encoding. If the encoder ever falls behind on a very large canvas, the occasional frame is dropped rather than freezing your brush. The on-screen frame count stays accurate because dropped frames are not counted.
  • Playback is fixed at 30 frames per second. At "1x" speed the panel shows the duration as frames / 30.
  • A timelapse is made of one or more segments (one self-contained .mp4 per recording session or save). Exporting joins them into a single continuous video.

Capture resolution

Recording happens at the canvas's native size by default, capped only by the resolution preset you choose. The long edge is capped to the preset's limit (aspect preserved), and the short edge to 2160 (the built-in encoder accepts up to 3840x2160 landscape or 2160x3840 portrait), so a square canvas records at up to 2160x2160. A canvas smaller than the caps records at its real size and is never upscaled. 4K is the maximum on purpose: recording above 4K balloons memory with no real benefit.

You can see the exact size and codec that will be used in the small hint line under the Resolution control, for example → 1920×1080 · H.264, or → 2160×2160 · H.264 (from 6000×6000) when a large canvas is downscaled to fit.

Frames live inside the document

The encoded segments are embedded in the saved .limner file (this also applies to legacy .artpaint files from format version 5 onward). That is why the panel footnote reads "Frames are saved inside the .limner file." A save while recording rolls the active segment over seamlessly, so the recording survives the save and keeps going. When you reopen a file that already holds a timelapse, Limner offers to continue it. See file-formats.md for the document format details.

An unreadable recorded segment no longer blocks saving the document: the rest of the recording survives, and Limner says which part it could not read. A Delete this timelapse link under the Record button throws the stored frames away, which is the only way to reclaim the space they take inside the document.

The recording prompts

Limner shows a short modal in two situations. Both embed the full setup controls (see below) so you can configure everything before recording starts.

  • Record a timelapse? appears once right after you create a new canvas. The body reads: "Limner records this session as a timelapse, saved inside the .limner file so you can keep recording every time you reopen it." Buttons: Record to start, or Not now to dismiss.
  • Continue this timelapse? appears when you open a file that already has a timelapse. It tells you how many frames are stored and that recording picks up where you left off and the whole thing exports as one video. Buttons: Continue to resume, or Not now.

Pressing Esc or clicking outside the modal also dismisses it.

The Timelapse panel

Open it as the Timelapse dock tab (record icon). The panel shows one of two states.

While recording

  • A red Recording label.
  • A blinking red dot with Recording (or a grey dot with Paused) and the elapsed time so far, then the frame count and a line reading, for example, "= 30.0s of video at real speed". When your export settings speed the video up, that line also gives the length at your chosen speed.
  • Three buttons, then a discard link:
ButtonWhat it does
Pause / ResumeStops capturing frames without ending the recording; Resume picks up where it left off.
Save copy…Saves the recording up to this moment and keeps recording. It seals the current segment, restarts a fresh one immediately (so the gap is essentially zero), then prompts for an export destination.
Stop and save…Stops recording, seals the final segment, releases the readback buffers, then prompts for an export destination.

Both save buttons force a final capture of the latest edit first, so your last change always lands in the video. Below them, Stop and throw it away ends the recording and discards it, and a note reads "Settings unlock when you stop."

When not recording

  • If saved frames exist, a strong label: Saved timelapse: {n} frames ({n/30}s at real speed).
  • The shared setup controls (Resolution, Quality, Capture, Watermark, and the export length options once frames exist).
  • A Record button, or Continue recording when saved frames already exist.
  • An Export video… button (shown only when saved frames exist) that saves the whole timelapse so far as one .mp4.
  • The footnote: "Frames are saved inside the .limner file."

Setup controls

These appear both in the panel (when not recording) and in the prompt modals.

Resolution

The recording size preset. This is greyed out (locked) when you continue an existing timelapse, because every segment must share one size to join cleanly.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Resolution4K (max) / 1080p / 720p (iPad offers 1080p and 720p)4K (max)Caps the recording's long edge: 4K (max) at 3840 px, 1080p at 1920 px, 720p at 1280 px. Smaller canvases record at native size; nothing is upscaled.

Quality

Four named quality tiers. Pick one and a short line under it says what you get. Draft is the smallest file with the softest edges, Good is a clean look in a small file, High is crisp strokes at a medium size, and Max is the sharpest and the largest.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
QualityDraft / Good / High / MaxHighSets the encode quality. A higher tier means better quality and a bigger file.

Capture (cadence)

When a frame is grabbed during recording.

OptionWhat it does
Every editDefault. One frame per committed edit (a stroke, fill, transform, filter, and so on). Skips idle pauses and captures the clean, committed result.
TimedOne frame every N seconds while the canvas is actually changing. Samples the in-progress stroke, and still skips idle time. Good for long continuous blends and for keeping very stroke-heavy work from producing an over-long video.
Every edit + timedBoth at once.

Every (s)

Shown only when Capture is set to Timed or Every edit + timed.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Every (s)0.2 to 10.0 (logarithmic slider)1.0The interval between timed samples, in seconds. Timed captures only fire when the canvas has actually changed, so an idle canvas does not pad the video.

The value is clamped to 0.2 to 10.0 on apply.

Watermark

The watermark controls are built into the Timelapse panel's Watermark section so you can set up your stamp before recording. This is the same watermark setting the still exports use (the Add watermark row in File ▸ Export As…), and it is saved in your app settings.

  • On: stamps your watermark image onto the exported video. Off by default.
  • Change… picks the image; its file name (or "No image chosen") shows beside it. Below sit a live placement preview and the size, opacity and margin controls (folded under Placement in the timelapse export prompt). Click a corner (or the middle) of the preview frame to move the stamp to the nearest anchor.
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Change…PNG or JPEG fileNo image chosenPicks the signature or logo image to stamp.
PositionTop left / Top right / Bottom left / Bottom right / CenterBottom rightWhich anchor the stamp sits at.
Size (% of image width)1.0 to 50.015.0Stamp width as a percentage of the output frame width (aspect preserved, clamped to stay inside the frame).
Opacity0 to 100 %100 %How visible the stamp is. 100% is fully opaque; lower values fade it out.
Margin0 to 512 px24Gap between the stamp and the frame edge.

The video stamp is laid out against the final exported frame (after any aspect crop), using the same rules as the still export so the two match. If the watermark is enabled but the image is missing or fails to load, the whole export is aborted with an error, on purpose: a watermark you asked for is never silently dropped from a video.

Exporting

When saved frames exist, the export-length controls appear in the setup area, and the Export video... button (or Save copy / Stop & save) prompts you for a destination. The default file name is timelapse.mp4 and the only output format is MP4 video. On iPad the finished video is written first, then a Save timelapse copy sheet asks where it should go: Save to Photos, Save to Files, or Cancel. Because the file is already written, a denied permission or a change of mind never costs you the recording. If the target file already exists, Limner asks you to confirm overwriting it.

The export runs on a background thread, so the app stays responsive. An "Exporting..." indicator shows while it runs. If the export fails, a "Timelapse export failed" dialog appears and the timelapse stays embedded in the document so you can try again.

Export length

OptionWhat it does
Real speedDefault. "Every frame at playback speed. The fastest export." Stream-copies the segments unchanged (no re-encode), so the length is locked to frames / 30. This is the fast export path.
FasterRe-encodes at a speed multiplier (greater than 1 is faster, less than 1 is slower).
Fit to timeRe-encodes so the finished video lands on a target length. Pick 15s, 30s or 60s, or type any length from 1 to 600 seconds.

× speed

Shown only when the timing is set to Faster.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
× speed0.25 to 60.0 (logarithmic slider)4.0Playback speed multiplier. The value is clamped to 0.05 to 200.0 on apply, so typed or extreme values still stay in a safe range.

Aspect (social crop)

Center-crops the video to a target shape for social platforms. Any crop forces a re-encode.

OptionWhat it does
NativeDefault. No crop; keeps the recording's aspect.
9:16 (vertical)Crops to 9:16 for TikTok, Reels, and Shorts.
1:1 (square)Crops to 1:1 for the Instagram feed.
16:9 (wide)Crops to 16:9 for YouTube.

The crop is the largest centered, even-dimensioned rectangle of the chosen ratio.

Hold last frame

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Hold last frame0.0 to 8.0 s0.0 (none)Holds the final frame for this many seconds as an end card.

Length estimate

A small hint below the controls estimates the output length, for example "900 frames → 30.0s at real speed · fast export", or "900 frames → a 7.5s video at ×4". The words "fast export" appear only when the export can be a stream-copy.

The built-in encoder

Limner encodes video inside the app: no ffmpeg.exe, no separate downloads, and identical behaviour on every GPU. Encoding runs on its own CPU thread so painting never waits on it. Every fresh recording is H.264 in an .mp4, the most widely playable combination there is.

A timelapse recorded by an old version above a 4096 px long edge used HEVC; those legacy timelapses still export (joined as-is), but recording cannot continue onto them and the re-encode options (speed, crop, end-card, watermark) are unavailable for them. Export such a timelapse with Real speed timing, then use Delete this timelapse in the Timelapse panel and start a fresh recording.

If recording or export ever fails, Limner shows a Timelapse couldn't start or Timelapse export failed dialog with the reason. The timelapse stays embedded in the document, so nothing is lost and you can try again. See Troubleshooting for more.

New in 0.9.0

  • A damaged segment does not block saving. If one recorded segment cannot be read, the document still saves and the rest of the recording survives.
  • Every export option on iPad. Faster, Fit to time, the crops, Hold last frame and the watermark all re-encode through the iPad's hardware pipeline; the finished video is written before you are asked where it should go.

Notes

  • All four export options (length, speed, aspect, end-card hold) are per-session settings: they are not saved to your preferences and reset to their defaults on a fresh launch. The watermark setting, by contrast, is saved.
  • A canvas size change mid-recording does not break the video: the recording size is locked for the whole session, so a resized canvas is letterboxed or resampled into that locked size.

Preferences and Keyboard Shortcuts

For the menus that expose these settings, see Menus. For where each control sits on screen, see The Interface.

Where settings are stored

Limner keeps all per-user files in one config folder:

  • Windows: %APPDATA%\Limner
  • macOS: ~/Library/Application Support/Limner
  • iPad: Library/Application Support/Limner inside the app's sandbox (not a folder you see in Files)
  • Linux and other platforms: $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/Limner, or ~/.config/Limner

The settings file itself is settings.toml. The same folder also holds brushes.dat (your brush library), the autosave/ snapshots, the thumbs/ previews the Home screen shows, the updates/ staging folder, a backup settings.toml.bak written after each save, and on desktop crash.log (on iPad the crash log is in Limner's Documents folder instead).

Settings are written on a clean shutdown. Two kinds of data are saved more eagerly, because they are curated work that must survive a crash: your swatch palettes and your gradient presets are saved on every edit.

If settings.toml ever becomes unreadable (for example after a bad hand edit), Limner uses settings.toml.bak for that session, or temporary defaults when neither copy can be read, rather than silently resetting you. Either way it leaves both files untouched, saves that session's changes to a separate settings-recovery-<nonce>.toml, and explains what happened in a "Settings recovery" notice; see Troubleshooting. Every field is optional, so a settings file written by an older build still loads cleanly: anything missing falls back to its default.

Migration from the old name

The first time you launch Limner, if a config folder from the previous artpaint name exists beside it and no Limner folder does yet, its contents are copied into the new Limner folder once. The old folder is left untouched, so nothing is ever lost. The copy is staged and then renamed into place, so a half-finished migration can never look complete.

What Limner remembers

The table below lists the persisted settings and their defaults exactly as the app uses them. "None = ..." describes how a value missing from the file is treated.

SettingDefaultWhat it does
Window width / heightLast sizeRestores the window to its previous size.
Last toolLast usedReselects the Illustration-mode tool you had active.
Last active modeIllustrationRestores the workspace mode (Illustration, Vector, or Animation) from last shutdown.
Last Vector toolLast usedReselects the Vector-mode tool, so it survives a mode switch after reload.
Last brush indexLast usedReselects the brush preset you had chosen.
Per-brush sizes(empty)Each brush keeps its own stamp diameter in canvas pixels, keyed by name.
Eraser / Smudge paramsBuilt-in defaultsEach of these tools keeps its own size, hardness, flow, and stabilization.
Last colourLast usedRestores the active sRGB paint colour.
Recent files(empty)Up to 8 most recently opened or saved documents, most recent first. Shown in File ▸ Open Recent.
Last open folder(none)The folder you last opened a document from, so the Open dialog returns there. None = until the first open.
Dock layoutDefault layoutRemembers which panels live where (splits and sizes). None = the default layout.
ThemeDarkThe visual skin (Dark or Light). None = the default dark skin.
Custom theme(none)Your own base + accent skin, overriding the Dark/Light preset while set. None = use the Dark/Light theme.
LanguageSystem languageThe interface language: one of the shipped locales (English, Deutsch, 日本語, Français, Español) or the system language. None = the system language, falling back to English.
Brush-Size CursorOnShow the brush-size cursor ring on the canvas. None = on.
Canvas ScrollbarsOnShow horizontal and vertical canvas scrollbars. None = on.
Smart GuidesOnVector-mode alignment guides and snapping. None = on.
Tool strip layoutDefault groupsYour custom left tool-strip arrangement. None = the default groups.
Keyboard shortcutsBuilt-in defaultsOnly the bindings that differ from default are stored (see below).
Pen pressure curve1.0 (linear)The pressure response curve from calibration, one per tablet. None = uncalibrated.
Swatch palettes(empty)Your saved colour palettes (the Color tab).
Active swatch paletteFirstWhich saved palette the Color tab shows.
Watermark(not configured)The export signature/logo overlay configuration.
Watermark enabledOffWhether PNG/JPEG exports stamp the watermark.
Gradient tool stateActive colour to transparent, linearThe gradient tool's ramp and shape at last use.
Gradient presets(empty)Your saved gradient presets.
Auto update checkOnWhether the launch-time update check runs at all. None = on.
Last update check(never)Timestamp that throttles the update check to once a day.
Skipped update version(none)A release version you chose "Skip this version" for.
Windows Ink notice seenNot seenTracks the one-time pen-pressure startup notice.

A few extra entries track brush organisation: user-created brush folders (in display order) and your custom brush-to-folder assignments, so a re-imported brush re-lands where you dragged it.

The Preferences menu

Edit ▸ Preferences gathers the app-wide settings: Light / Dark, Customize Theme and Reset Theme; Language (the interface language, see below); Check for Updates Automatically (Windows only); Show Home Screen on Startup (on by default); Interface Scale, a 0.6x to 2.0x value with a Reset button and a sensible minimum window size; Outline uneven SVG strokes (off by default); Copy a held drawing when you draw on it (off by default; see Animation Mode); Pen Pressure, which opens the calibration curve; Keyboard Shortcuts; and, on iPad only, Finger Painting (off by default), Palm Rejection (on by default) and Record Input Trace (off by default). The Fill tool's settings and the Text tool's style are remembered between sessions too, and the autosave interval is fixed at 120 seconds unless the ARTPAINT_AUTOSAVE_SECS environment variable overrides it.

Recent files

Limner keeps the 8 most recently opened or saved documents, most recent first, with duplicates removed. They are listed in File ▸ Open Recent, where each entry shows the file name (full path on hover) and clicking one opens it; a Clear Recent item at the bottom empties the list. The same list also drives the launch behaviour: if you start Limner with no file on the command line and no autosave to recover, it offers to reopen your last project. Double-clicking a .limner (or legacy .artpaint) file in Windows opens that document directly instead.

Limner also remembers the folder you last opened a document from, so the Open dialog returns there next time. (Save As and the export dialogs start from the current document's own folder instead.)

Theming

Limner ships two complete skins and lets you build your own. The theme controls live in Edit ▸ Preferences.

Dark and Light

Edit ▸ Preferences shows a single toggle that flips between the two preset skins. When you are on the dark skin it reads Light Theme; when you are on the light skin it reads Dark Theme. It switches between the dark glass skin and the bright Aero light skin. The default is Dark.

Customize Theme

Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Customize Theme… opens a small editor where two colors drive the entire skin. Everything updates live as you adjust them.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
BasesRGB colourCurrent panel colourThe chrome base: panels and bars.
AccentsRGB colourCurrent accent colourSelection and focus highlights.
TextsRGB colour, optionalOff (auto)Pick the text colour yourself. Unchecked = automatic contrast against the base.
Tool iconssRGB colour, optionalOff (follows Text)A standalone colour for the tool-strip icon glyphs. Unchecked = follows Text.

The editor offers three buttons:

  • Apply keeps the custom theme. It persists across sessions, overriding the Dark/Light preset.
  • Reset drops the custom theme and returns you to the Dark/Light preset.
  • Cancel closes the editor and reverts any live preview.

A tip in the editor reminds you to keep the base near-neutral, because a saturated surround skews how you judge colour. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Reset Theme also drops any custom theme and returns to the Dark/Light preset.

Language

Limner's interface ships in English (US), German, Japanese, French and Spanish. Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Language lists them under System language, the default, which follows the language your system is set to (the first shipped language it matches; English when none does). Choosing a language changes the menus, the tool strip, the tool-options bar, the Layers panel and most command palette names at once; on macOS the menu bar at the top of the screen (Limner, File, Edit, View, Window, Help) is built once at launch and takes the new language the next time you start Limner.

This first release of the translation leaves part of the interface in English: the Vector workspace's menu commands (the menu titles are translated), the panel names in the Window menu and on the dock tabs, the Image ▸ Rotate Canvas entries, the Help ▸ Search the Manual topics, the Mode, Book and Home buttons at the right end of the menu bar, the blend mode names, the other panels, the dialogs (including the Keyboard Shortcuts window's own controls), the Home screen, and this manual.

Japanese is drawn with the Japanese face your system already has (Hiragino Sans on macOS, Yu Gothic on Windows); Limner bundles no fonts. The iPad gives Limner no Japanese face in this release, so there the Japanese interface and Japanese text in a document draw as empty boxes; pick another language on iPad for now.

Pen pressure calibration

Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Pen Pressure opens the Pen Pressure Calibration dialog. It tunes a pressure response curve to your hand, applied before each brush's own pressure curves. The curve is kept per tablet: every pen Limner has seen gets its own profile and an unnamed pen its own, so calibrating one never overwrites another, and the curve itself can be reshaped by hand rather than only by exponent.

How it works: scribble naturally on the canvas with your usual pressure, a few comfortable strokes. Nothing is painted while the dialog is open. A live bar shows the raw pressure for the current sample, and a counter shows how many samples have arrived. Once you have at least 50 samples, Limner fits a curve so your typical (median) press maps to a medium stroke and shows the suggested value, along with a plain-language note such as "You press lightly: the response will be boosted."

The dialog has three buttons:

  • Apply uses the fitted curve for all pen input. It is enabled only after 50 samples.
  • Reset to linear removes any calibration, so you get raw tablet pressure.
  • Cancel closes the dialog without changing anything.

The calibration is stored as a response curve you can reshape by hand, one per tablet, keyed by the device's own name, with a further curve for a pen the system cannot name. A profile written by an older build, which held a single exponent, still loads through its original path.

If Limner is not receiving pressure at all, a one-time startup notice explains how to enable Windows Ink in your tablet driver. See Troubleshooting for more.

View toggles

The View menu collects the display options in submenus. It stays open while you click items, so you can toggle several at once. See Menus ▸ View for every row.

ControlWhereRangeDefaultWhat it does
GridView ▸ ShowOn / OffOffShow the canvas grid overlay.
Grid (spacing slider)View ▸ Show4 to 512 px64Spacing of the grid lines, in canvas pixels.
Brush-Size CursorView ▸ ShowOn / OffOnShow a ring at the cursor sized to the active brush. Not in Vector.
Crosshair in Brush TipView ▸ ShowOn / OffOnAdd a small center crosshair inside the brush-size ring. Not in Vector.
Canvas ScrollbarsView ▸ ShowOn / OffOnShow horizontal and vertical scrollbars around the canvas.
Transparency CheckerboardView ▸ ShowOn / OffOffShow transparent areas as a gray checkerboard. Animation always shows it. Not in Vector.
Tool Strip CaptionsView ▸ ShowOn / OffOnName the Vector tool strip's sections. Vector only.
Show Editable Stroke PathsView ▸ ShowOn / OffOffShow the active vector layer's centerlines with any tool. They always show for the Object and Line Edit tools. Not in Vector.
Show Frame TimeView ▸ ShowOn / OffOffOverlay the recent average and worst frame time, for performance reports. Session-only.
Snap to Special RulerView ▸ Snap ToOn / OffOnSnap brush, eraser and Line strokes to the active layer's ruler and to guides; the same switch as the Snap checkbox on the tool options bar. Not in Vector.
Smart GuidesView ▸ Snap ToOn / OffOnVector mode: alignment guides and snapping while you move or draw objects. Also Ctrl+U.
Mirror View HorizontallyView ▸ MirrorOn / OffOffMirror the view left to right. Non-destructive: the artwork is unchanged.
Mirror View VerticallyView ▸ MirrorOn / OffOffMirror the view top to bottom. Non-destructive: the artwork is unchanged.

The View menu also holds the Zoom submenu (minus, plus, Fit, 100% and a zoom readout), the Rotate View submenu (Left, Right and Reset, 15 degrees a step), the Proofing submenu, Interface Scale, Canvas Focus and Fullscreen. The bottom bar keeps the rotation angle slider for scrubbing.

Default keyboard shortcuts

These are written with Ctrl, the Windows and Linux spelling. On a Mac, read every one of them as Cmd: Cmd+S, Cmd+Z, Cmd+K, and so on. Limner shows the right modifier for the machine it is running on, so the menus and this dialog always match your keyboard. See Limner on Mac.

These are the built-in defaults. Every command is rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.

General

CommandDefault chord
UndoCtrl+Z
RedoCtrl+Shift+Z
SaveCtrl+S
Save AsCtrl+Shift+S
OpenCtrl+O
Export PNGCtrl+E
New DocumentCtrl+N
Fit to ViewCtrl+0
Actual Pixels (100%)Ctrl+1
Command PaletteCtrl+K
Limner ManualF1
FullscreenF11
Soft ProofCtrl+Y (outside Vector mode)
Copy to ClipboardCtrl+C
Cut to ClipboardCtrl+X
Paste (onto Active Layer)Ctrl+Shift+V
Paste as New LayerCtrl+V
Swap Foreground / BackgroundX
Reset Colors to Black / WhiteD
Memory Readout (debug)` (backquote)

Note the paste pair: Ctrl+V pastes as a new layer (the usual copy/paste workflow, matching Photoshop and Clip Studio Paint), while Ctrl+Shift+V pastes onto the active layer in place.

Selection and filters

CommandDefault chord
Select AllCtrl+A
DeselectCtrl+D
ReselectCtrl+Shift+D
Invert SelectionCtrl+Shift+I
Fill Selection with ForegroundCtrl+, (comma)
Selection from Layerunbound
Repeat Last FilterCtrl+Alt+F

Layers

CommandDefault chord
New layerN
Duplicate layerCtrl+J
Delete layerShift+Delete
Cycle blend modeShift+B
Layer opacity +=
Layer opacity -- (minus)
Toggle layer visibilityH

Cycle blend mode sits on Shift+B (not plain B) so that the Brush tool can take the universal B hotkey.

Brush

CommandDefault chord
Brush size +]
Brush size -[

Vector and workspace

CommandDefault chord
Group (layers into a folder, or objects in Vector)Ctrl+G
Ungroup (dissolve the folder, or objects in Vector)Ctrl+Shift+G
Clone (Vector)Ctrl+Alt+D
Unlink clone (Vector)Ctrl+Shift+Alt+D
Cycle workspace (Illustration / Vector / Animation)Ctrl+Shift+M
Smart Guides (Vector)Ctrl+U

The workspace hotkey cycles the three modes in switcher order: Illustration to Vector to Animation and back to Illustration. While a Book is open it skips Animation (a Book is never an animation project) and goes from Vector straight back to Illustration. Book is not part of the cycle; it has its own button beside the mode switcher.

Animation frames

These work only in Animation mode.

CommandDefault chord
New FrameAlt+N
Duplicate FrameAlt+D
Clone Frame, LinkedAlt+L
Delete FrameAlt+Delete
Copy FrameAlt+C
Paste Frame AfterAlt+V
Toggle Onion SkinAlt+O

Tool hotkeys

These select an Illustration-mode tool. They default to the familiar Photoshop / Clip Studio letters so the tools are usable without hunting the strip. They are inert in Vector mode, which routes bare letters through its own tool selection.

ToolDefault chord
BrushB
EraserE
EyedropperI
GradientG
Fill BucketShift+G
Rect SelectM
Ellipse SelectShift+M
LassoL
Polygon SelectShift+L
Magic WandW
Layer MoveV
CropC
TextT
RectangleU
EllipseShift+U
TransformCtrl+T

The remaining tools ship unbound (Pen, Pencil, Airbrush, Blend, Clone Stamp, Heal, Liquefy, Line, Curve, and Mesh Warp). Every one of them is rebindable from the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog.

Fixed keys (not rebindable)

A handful of keys are wired directly and do not appear in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog.

Animation frame navigation and playback works only in Animation mode (see Animation Mode); in the other workspaces these keys are free for their usual roles.

KeyAction
, (comma)Previous frame
. (period)Next frame
HomeFirst frame
EndLast frame
EnterPlay / pause

Caps Lock toggles the brush cursor between the size ring and a precise crosshair (Photoshop's Caps Lock behaviour), for the brush-style tools. See Interface ▸ Cursors.

Other fixed behaviours (also covered in Menus): Alt-hold eyedropper, Space-drag pan, Space+Ctrl-drag zoom, the wheel zoom, and the Shift / Alt / Ctrl selection modifiers.

The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog

Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts opens the rebinding dialog. A search box at the top filters by command name, by chord, or by command id. Below it every command is listed in two columns, the command name and its current chord; an unbound command shows a "-". Vector-mode commands are listed with a "Vector:" prefix and a note that they apply only in Vector mode, where they take priority.

Rebinding

Click a shortcut button, then press the new key combination. The button reads "Press a key..." while it waits. Press Esc to cancel a capture. Bare modifier keys (Ctrl, Shift, Alt, and the like) are not valid chords on their own, and only keys in Limner's curated key table can be bound (letters, digits, function keys, common punctuation, arrows, and a few others).

Conflict displacement

If you assign a chord that another command already uses, the new binding wins: the chord is cleared from the other command (which becomes unbound), and the dialog reports which command was displaced. You can then give that command a fresh chord, or leave it unbound.

Reset and persistence

The dialog has Reset to defaults (restore every built-in binding) and Close. Only the bindings that differ from the defaults are saved to settings.toml. This is deliberate: commands you never touched keep tracking any new defaults a future build introduces. A binding you explicitly cleared is stored as an empty value, so it stays cleared on reload. An unparseable saved chord is ignored and the default is kept.

See also

  • Menus for the menu entries that open these dialogs.
  • The Interface for where the View toggles and panels sit on screen.
  • Updating Limner for the auto-update behavior controlled by the Help menu.

New in 0.9.0

  • Pressure profiles per tablet. Calibration keeps a curve for each tablet, plus one for an unnamed pen, and the curve can be reshaped by hand.
  • More in Preferences. Interface Scale (with Reset), Copy a held drawing when you draw on it (Animation), Show Home Screen on Startup, and on iPad Finger Painting, Palm Rejection and Record Input Trace.
  • Vector chords. In Vector mode the standard keys are bound: Z zoom, H hand, Shift+` Curvature, Shift+O Artboard, Shift+W Width, R / S / O Rotate / Scale / Reflect, T Type, Q Object Lasso, I Style Picker, B Vector Brush, Shift+M Shape Builder, Ctrl+Y outline view (Soft Proof keeps Ctrl+Y outside Vector mode), Ctrl+R rulers, Ctrl+U Smart Guides, Ctrl+[ and Ctrl+] to arrange, Ctrl+2 and Ctrl+3 to lock and hide, Ctrl+7 to clip, Ctrl+8 for compound paths, Ctrl+Shift+O to outline text, and X, Shift+X, D and / on the fill and stroke. See Menus Reference.
  • Honest gates. Plus gates say what they gate, the Threshold filter is named Threshold everywhere, and status messages are non-modal.
  • UI scale. A preference scales Limner’s interface, with a sensible minimum window size so the layout cannot be squeezed into an unusable shape.
  • Tool defaults persist. Fill and Text tool settings are remembered between sessions.
  • Show Home Screen on Startup. The Home screen can be switched off here as well as from its own footer. Off restores the classic launch exactly.
  • Messages you can see. Warnings about altered artwork used to be printed to a console window that does not exist in the shipped build. They now arrive on a non-modal status channel inside the app, which also surfaces a crash log from a previous run instead of hiding it.

Panels

Panels Reference

The default Illustration layout docks the Layers and Navigator panels on the right with Color, Timelapse, and Reference below them, and the Tool Settings and Brush picker on the left. Vector mode shows its own panel set: Properties and the shared Layers panel on top, with Color, Swatches, and Gradient below. Window ▸ Vector Workspaces switches between the Vector Essentials, Node Editing, and Lettering presets.

Panels in this manual

PanelWhat it doesDocumented on
LayersThe layer stack: visibility, opacity, blend mode, locks, masks, groupsLayers
BrushThe brush picker: folder rail, search, and preset gridBrushes
Tool SettingsThe deep per-brush editorTool Settings
ColorColor picker, swatches, palettes, and harmonyColor
TimelapseRecord and export a timelapse of your processTimelapse
ReferenceA board of reference images to draw from (with a pop-out window)Reference
NavigatorA minimap for panning and zoomingNavigator
StatsSession statistics (drawing time, strokes, layers)Stats
Create BrushThe guided brush-creation wizard: type, tip, pen response, character, name. Closed by default; opened from the picker's New brush button, the Tool Settings header, or the Window menu. A Limner Plus feature.Tool Settings

Vector-mode panels

In Vector mode the Window menu lists twenty panels, with the Vector Workspaces presets, an All Vector Tools submenu and Customize Vector Toolbar above them; Brush and Create Brush follow, grayed out, because raster brushes work only in Illustration and Animation. The Properties hub follows what you select. The panels are described in Vector Editing and Output.

PanelWhat it does
PropertiesThe hub that follows what you select: the document (page color and artboards) when nothing is selected, then Shape, Transform, Appearance, Align and Quick Actions for an object, each with a "..." that opens the deep panel.
StrokeWidth, cap, join, alignment, dashes, arrowheads and width profiles of the targeted stroke.
AppearanceThe ordered fills and strokes of the selected object, its opacity and blend mode, and saved appearance styles.
AlignAlign and distribute, relative to the selection, the page or a key object.
TypographyFont, size, tracking, leading, alignment and paragraph settings for text objects.
SymbolsThe document's symbols: create, place, redefine and detach instances.
PathfinderUnite, Minus Front, Intersect, Exclude, Minus Back, Divide, Outline, Trim, Merge and Crop, plus compound paths.
All Vector ToolsEvery Vector tool as a button, and the way to regroup the tool strip.
Artboards and Export SetsArtboards on the canvas and the export sets that write them out as PNG or SVG in one go.
Advanced AuthoringBlends, mesh gradients, envelopes, perspective deformations and live effects.
Object LayersThe vector scene graph: every object on the active graphic layer, with thumbnails, groups that disclose their children, and the same objects disclosed under the layer in the Layers panel.
LayersThe layer stack, shared with the raster workspaces.
ColorThe color picker, with a Fill / Stroke target.
SwatchesNamed colors from the active palette, applied to the target.
GradientThe object gradient editor: type, spread, stops, presets and the document's shared gradients.
ReferenceThe reference board, shared with the raster workspaces.
NavigatorThe minimap, shared with the raster workspaces.
StatsSession statistics, shared with the raster workspaces.
TimelapseTimelapse recording settings, shared with the raster workspaces.
Tool SettingsThe active Vector tool's options.

Reference Panel

The Reference panel is a board for the images you want to draw from. Drop in photo references, model sheets, color studies, or anything else, then arrange them freely on an infinite board, zoom in on a detail, and keep them all in view while you paint. It works like a PureRef-style pinboard built into Limner.

The board is a drawing aid, not part of your artwork. Its images, arrangement, pan, zoom, scale, stacking order, rotations, and per-photo flips are saved inside the current document, but reference images never render into the canvas or appear in exports. Each open document keeps its own board, and reopening a document restores it.

Open it from Window ▸ Reference (the panel list shows the panels for the current workspace). The board lives in the Reference dock tab by default, and you can pop it out into its own window (see Pop-out window).

Board editing is available only while a document is open. With no document, the panel says "Open or create a document to use reference images." and disables Add, Flip, Fit, Clear, zoom, pan, drag, drop, delete, and color sampling. Docking and popping out the panel remain available.

The toolbar

A row of buttons runs across the top of the panel. On a narrow dock the buttons wrap onto a second line so the zoom controls stay reachable.

ControlWhat it does
DockBrings the board back into the main window. Shown only when the board is popped out.
Add images...Opens a file picker so you can add one or more reference images to the board.
Rotate leftTurns the selected photo 90 degrees counter-clockwise. The rotation is saved with the document.
Rotate rightTurns the selected photo 90 degrees clockwise.
Flip HMirrors the selected photo horizontally. Click again to restore it.
Flip VMirrors the selected photo vertically. Click again to restore it.
FitZooms and pans so every image on the board is in view at once.
ClearRemoves every image from the board.
Pop-out (the open-window icon)Opens the board in a separate window you can move to another screen. Sits next to Dock at the left of the toolbar and is shown only when the board is docked. On iPad it is greyed out: separate Reference windows are not available there, so use the docked panel.

The zoom row

To the right of the toolbar (after a separator) is a three-button zoom cluster sized for touch. These zoom about the center of the view, since an on-screen button has no cursor to anchor on.

ControlWhat it does
Zoom out (the minus magnifier)Zooms the board out one step (each step is 1.25x).
Zoom readout (for example "100%")Shows the current zoom. Click it to reset zoom to 100%.
Zoom in (the plus magnifier)Zooms the board in one step (each step is 1.25x).

The zoom range across every zoom path (wheel, pinch, the toolbar buttons, and Fit) is 0.05x to 8.0x.

Adding and removing images

  • Add: click "Add images..." and choose one or more files. New images are placed near the center of the current view.
  • Remove one: select an image, then click the small close button (the dark disc with an x) at its top-right corner. You can also select it and press Delete while the pointer is over the board.
  • Remove all: click "Clear".

You can also drop image files from Explorer (or the Finder), or from a browser, straight onto the Reference panel or its pop-out window. Image pickers start in the folder you last picked an image from, separate from where your documents live, and a successful import brings the Reference tab forward, or focuses the pop-out if you use one.

The 24-image cap

A board holds at most 24 images. Each image keeps a GPU texture (up to 2048 by 2048 pixels), so the cap keeps the board from quietly eating video memory on lighter hardware. When the board is full, a small note reads "Board is full (24 images max)", and an import that would go over the cap stops adding images and tells you how many files were left off.

Working on the board

The board is an open space you pan and zoom freely. Click an image to select it; the selected image gets an accent outline, a scale handle at its bottom-right, a close button at its top-right, and rotate left / rotate right and Flip H / Flip V controls in the toolbar. Selecting or grabbing an image also raises it to the front, so it draws on top of any images it overlaps. Flipping affects only that board photo, not its source file or the artwork.

ActionResult
Drag empty spacePans the board.
Drag an imageMoves it (and brings it to the front).
Drag the bottom-right handleScales the selected image.
Click the top-right close buttonRemoves that image.
Scroll the wheelZooms about the pointer.
Pinch, or Ctrl + wheelZooms about the pinch center (or, with Ctrl + wheel, about the pointer).
Click an imageSelects it and brings it to the front.
Click empty spaceDeselects.
Delete key (pointer over the board)Removes the selected image.

When the board is empty it shows a centered hint: "Add reference images, then drag to arrange." and "Pinch or scroll to zoom, drag empty space to pan." A populated board is embedded in the .limner file and can increase its size; clearing the board removes that document data on the next save.

Picking colors off a reference

While the Eyedropper tool is active, clicking an image on the board picks that pixel's color into your paint color instead of selecting or moving the image, so sampling a color never disturbs your layout. The cursor shows a crosshair when you hover an image with the Eyedropper active. This works on both the docked board and the pop-out window. See Eyedropper.

Pop-out window

Click the pop-out button (or drag the Reference tab past the window edge) to open the board in its own operating-system window. This is handy for putting your references on a second monitor while the main window stays full of canvas. It is a desktop feature: on iPad the pop-out button is greyed out and the board stays docked.

The pop-out window:

  • Opens at about 900 by 700 points and is resizable.
  • Is titled "Reference".
  • Shows the exact same board for the active document. The board state is shared, not duplicated, so the docked tab and the pop-out always agree on the images, pan, zoom, scale, stacking order, and flips. Switching documents switches the board in the pop-out too. Only one view draws the board at a time.

While the board is popped out, the Reference dock tab shows a placeholder: "The reference board is open in its own window." with a "Bring it back" button. Click that button, or the "Dock" button in the pop-out's own toolbar, to return the board to the main window.

The Eyedropper color-picking described above works in the pop-out window too.

The board is saved inside the .limner file, so it comes back with the document on every platform, and it never appears in exported artwork. The pop-out's position, size, and popped-out state are restored the next time you run Limner.

New in 0.9.0

Rotate a reference in quarter turns. Select an image on the board and use its rotate left / rotate right controls to turn it 90 degrees at a time, in the docked panel and the pop-out window alike. Rotation combines with the horizontal and vertical flips, survives saving and reopening the document, and, like everything on the Reference board, never appears in your exported artwork.

Stats Panel

The Stats panel is not part of the default workspace. Open it from Window ▸ Stats. (See The interface for how panels dock, float, and reset.)

What it shows

The panel is display only. You cannot edit any value here; the numbers update on their own as you draw. The time readout reticks about once per second while the panel is visible, so it stays current instead of freezing between strokes.

RowExample valueWhat it means
Active drawing time3h 24m 12sTime spent actually drawing on the canvas (see below). Leading zero units are dropped, so you may see "24m 12s" or "12s", and a fresh document shows "0s".
Strokes1,234Number of committed paint strokes. Thousands are comma separated for readability.
Layers7How many layers are in the active document right now.
Canvas2048 × 1536 px @ 300 DPIThe canvas width and height in pixels, then the document resolution in DPI (rounded to a whole number).

How "Active drawing time" is counted

The timer is not a wall clock. It advances only while pointer input is actually arriving on the canvas, and it pauses the moment that input stops. Time spent in menus, panels, or away from the app is never counted. The panel says this in plain words at the bottom:

Note
Time counts only while you are drawing on the canvas.

Short pauses between strokes still count. Lifting the pen between hatch lines or glancing at a reference for a moment is treated as part of the work, so the clock does not stutter every time you briefly stop. Long idle gaps do not accumulate.

The drawing clock does not bridge across documents. When you switch documents, the timer for the new document picks up from its own stored total rather than carrying over the gap.

What counts as a "Stroke"

The Strokes counter tracks committed paint strokes only. Each finished brush, eraser, smudge, clone, heal, or Quick Mask gesture adds one, as does a committed figure from the Line, Rectangle, Ellipse or Curve tool, a Smart Shape you let snap, and a freehand line captured on a vector layer (a mirrored or symmetric gesture still counts as the single gesture it was).

The counter deliberately does not include:

  • Fills (the bucket or gradient)
  • Text
  • Free Transform and layer moves (a Liquefy stroke does count: it is a brush you draw with)
  • Selections

So the number reflects hands-on painting, not every possible edit.

The counters travel with the document

Both the drawing time and the stroke count are saved inside the document, so they resume the next time you open the file. They are stored in the native .limner format (and continue to load and save in legacy .artpaint files saved at or after the version that introduced these counters). Files saved before that feature open with the counters starting at zero. See File formats for details on what each format preserves.

Starting a new document, or opening one without saved stats, begins both counters at zero.

Tips

  • Use Active drawing time for timed studies or to log effort per piece; it ignores time you spend tweaking settings or stepping away.
  • The Layers and Canvas rows are a quick sanity check before exporting: confirm the resolution and layer count match what you expect.
  • If the time readout looks frozen, make sure the panel is actually open and visible; it only reticks while it is on screen.
  • The interface - opening, docking, and resetting panels, including Window ▸ Stats.
  • Layers - the layer stack that feeds the Layers count.
  • File formats - what .limner and other formats save, including the session counters.

Help

Troubleshooting and FAQ

See also: Preferences and shortcuts, Timelapse, and the developer note on Distribution and signing.

Updating Limner

How updates work

On Windows and macOS, Limner checks for a newer version at most once a day on launch, quietly and in the background. The check is a bounded download of a small signed token from https://limnerart.com/latest.signed.json, and Limner verifies the signature before it uses the offer. The anonymous version lookup sends no Limner identifiers. If a newer version exists for your platform, an accent-colored chip that reads "Update available" appears in the status bar. Click it for the new version number and its release notes. Only that small offer downloads during the check; the app itself downloads and installs only after you ask.

On Windows, Download and Install downloads the signed installer and verifies it two ways before it is ever run:

  1. The download must match the exact checksum (SHA-256) listed in the manifest.
  2. The installer must carry a valid Windows code signature from the verified publisher, "Parker Vincent".

If either check fails, the file is deleted and never run. Once both pass, the prompt and the status-bar chip read "Update ready". Install now closes Limner the way quitting does (unsaved work is resolved first) so the installer can replace the running program, then reopens it for you.

Checking for updates manually

On Windows, use Help ▸ Check for Updates… to check right now. A manual check ignores the once-a-day throttle and any version you previously skipped, and it always tells you the result (even "You are up to date").

Turning the daily check off

On Windows, use the Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Check for Updates Automatically checkbox to turn the launch-time version check on or off. The hover text reads "Once a day on launch. This anonymous check sends no Limner or device identifiers." When it is off, Limner never checks versions on its own; you can still check by hand.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Check for Updates Automatically (Windows)On / OffOnRuns the version check on launch, at most once every 24 hours

Skip this version

In the "Update available" prompt, Skip this version silences the automatic check for that one version only. A manual Check for Updates… still shows it. Later closes the prompt and changes nothing.

Windows SmartScreen on first install

The installer is signed by a verified publisher, so SmartScreen should accept it quietly. On a brand-new release that few people have downloaded yet, Windows may still show a "Windows protected your PC" screen the first time. If it does, click "More info" and confirm the publisher reads "Parker Vincent", then choose "Run anyway". The signature is the same one Limner checks before running any update.

Updates on macOS and iPad

macOS runs the same daily check and is offered only its own disk image. The prompt's button reads Download and Verify: Limner downloads the disk image, checks its SHA-256, and checks that the app inside passes a strict code-signature check with Limner's Team ID and is accepted by Gatekeeper. Install and Relaunch closes Limner the way quitting does, checks the image again, replaces the installed app and reopens it. If Limner cannot replace itself (for example because macOS ran it from a temporary security location, or its folder cannot be changed), it opens the verified disk image instead and says "Finish the update in Finder": drag Limner into Applications, then reopen it. Open Disk Image in the same prompt takes that manual route directly.

On macOS, start a check from the Mac menu bar's Help ▸ Check for Updates…, or click the "Update available" chip in the status bar when the daily check finds one. Limner's in-window Help menu shows Get Limner Updates… instead, which opens https://limnerart.com/download.html. The Edit ▸ Preferences checkbox that turns the daily check off is Windows-only.

The iPad build has no in-app update download: its Help menu shows "Updates arrive through TestFlight". See Limner on iPad. Neither Apple build offers the Windows .exe.

Online Limner Plus lease renewal is separate from version checking. A licensed Windows or macOS installation may still contact the configured license service with its key and device activation identifiers for entitlement upkeep, even with the daily version check turned off. The fully unlocked iPad beta uses no key and does not contact that service.

Timelapse recording or export failed

Limner encodes timelapse video with an encoder built into the app, so there is nothing to install and no companion files. If recording cannot start or an export fails, a dialog titled "Timelapse couldn't start" or "Timelapse export failed" explains the reason. Common causes:

  • A legacy oversized timelapse. A timelapse recorded by an old version at more than 4096 px on an edge was encoded as HEVC. The built-in encoder cannot record onto it or re-encode it. Export it with Real speed timing and no crop, end card, or watermark, then use Delete this timelapse in the Timelapse panel and start a fresh recording.
  • Disk or file problems. The encoder writes segments to your temp folder and the export to the destination you chose; a full disk or a locked destination file surfaces here.

An export failure never loses the recording: the timelapse is still saved inside your .limner file, so you can fix the cause and try again.

For everything else about recording, see Timelapse.

The old "Saved; a note on the format" notice

Builds before 0.9.0 showed a one-time heads-up after the first save, saying the .limner format was experimental. That notice is gone: every save now writes the current format (version 70) in the damage-resistant container, and a file written this way needs Limner 0.9.0 or later to open. Documents saved by older builds still open exactly as before. See File Formats.

When a document will not open

Limner names the problem in the dialog's title. Preserve the original file while you investigate, and do not save over it: a failed open alone does not mean the file is damaged.

"Saved by a newer Limner"

The document was written by a newer version of Limner, in a document format this version does not know. The dialog gives the format number and says the file is not damaged. Update Limner (see Updating Limner above), then open the file again.

"Could not open file"

The dialog names the file, the reason the reader gave, and a hint that depends on what the file is:

The file isThe hint says
Unreadable (missing, moved, or no permission)Check that the file is still available and that Limner has permission to read it.
A Book (.limnerbook)Use File ▸ Open Book (Limner Plus).
A Photoshop, OpenRaster, or SVG fileUse File ▸ Open… and pick the matching file type.
A brush set (.abr) or Limner brush preset (.lbrush)Use Import in the brush picker.
An image such as a PNGCreate or open a document, then choose File ▸ Import… and pick Image.
Anything elseCheck the reported reason, or try an earlier copy or backup.

Supported older document versions remain readable within the format and resource limits of the current build. Damaged, unsupported, or oversized data may be refused with an error. If the file is genuinely damaged, open the most recent good copy instead, or the recovery backup if one exists (see Crash recovery).

A .limner and a .artpaint file are identical in format; the extension does not affect whether a file opens.

"Book opened with a damaged page"

A Book whose page cannot be read still opens: that page opens blank in its place and the other pages load normally. The notice names each such page, and the Book opens as an unsaved copy, so Save asks for a new name and the original file is left untouched. Only a Book with no readable page at all is refused. See Book.

"Opened with damage"

A document saved in the container format isolates damage to the part it hit. When part of the file cannot be read, the document still opens: the affected areas load blank, everything else is intact, and the dialog lists what was lost. If you have a backup or an earlier copy, check it before saving over the damaged file.

Pen pressure and Windows Ink

On Windows, the first launch shows a one-time notice titled "Pen pressure & Windows Ink":

Note
Drawing with a pen tablet? Turn on "Windows Ink" in your tablet driver (the Wacom / Huion / XP-Pen control panel) so Limner receives pressure. It reads the pen through the Windows Pointer (WM_POINTER) API, which Windows Ink feeds. A mouse works fine without it.

If your pen strokes come out at a constant width with no pressure response, this is almost always the cause. Open your tablet driver's control panel and enable the "Windows Ink" option, then restart your drawing. A mouse needs no setup. The notice appears once and is dismissed with "Got it".

If pressure still feels wrong after enabling Windows Ink, you can shape the response curve with the pen pressure calibration tool (Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Pen Pressure…). See Pen pressure calibration.

Crash recovery

Limner keeps a background safety net for standalone documents and the open multi-page Book, so a crash or power loss is less likely to wipe out unsaved work.

How autosave works

Every open standalone document with unsaved changes and the open modified Book are eligible for recovery snapshots about every 2 minutes. Limner waits for a brief editing pause before preparation and writes the snapshot in the background. Large projects and busy or failing storage can delay completion. Autosave never changes your file on disk and never clears the "modified" state: it is a safety copy, not a substitute for saving with Ctrl+S. (Default shortcuts like Ctrl+S and Ctrl+E are rebindable in Edit ▸ Preferences ▸ Keyboard Shortcuts.)

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
Autosave interval (ARTPAINT_AUTOSAVE_SECS env var)5 seconds or more120 secondsHow often unsaved documents and the open Book are snapshotted for crash recovery

The interval is mainly a verification knob, but it can also be set as an environment variable if you want more frequent backups.

If a snapshot cannot be written (a full disk, for example), the status bar shows Recovery backup failed until a later snapshot succeeds or the work is saved or closed. Hover it for the reason. While it shows, a crash could lose unsaved work, so save; Limner keeps trying.

When Windows signs out, restarts or shuts down

If you sign out of Windows, restart or shut down while Limner has unsaved work, Limner does not ask whether to save, because Windows would not wait for the answer. It writes a recovery snapshot of that work at once instead. If the write takes more than a few seconds, Windows lists Limner with Saving a recovery copy of your work while it waits. The next time you start Limner, the recovery prompt offers the work back.

The worst case: if a stroke, transform, text edit or filter preview is still open at that moment, or the snapshot cannot finish in time, you lose the changes made since the last automatic snapshot, about 2 minutes of work at the default interval. Save before you sign out to be sure.

The recovery prompt

A clean exit deletes resolved backups from that session. If Limner finds leftover snapshots on the next launch, it knows the last session did not close cleanly and shows a prompt titled "Recover unsaved work?":

Note
Limner didn't close cleanly last time, but an automatic backup of your work was saved.

The prompt lists the affected projects and requires an explicit choice. Choose Restore (or Restore All) to reopen them. Standalone documents return in tabs, then a recovered Book opens in front of them. Each project points at its original file when that path is available and is marked modified so you remember to save. Limner keeps the recovered snapshot in its active recovery slot until a normal save, deliberate discard, or clean close resolves it. Choose Discard Backup (or Discard Backups) only when you are sure the snapshots are not needed. Esc and click-outside do not dismiss this safety decision.

Only one Book can be open, so when several Book snapshots are waiting, the newest is restored and the others stay on disk for a later launch. A Book backup that is older than the Book's last save opens as an unsaved copy, so saving it cannot replace newer pages; save it under a new name to keep it. A snapshot that cannot be restored stays on disk and is offered again on the next launch.

Where recovery files live

Autosave snapshots are stored in the autosave subfolder of Limner's settings folder. On Windows this is %APPDATA%\Limner\autosave\; on macOS it is ~/Library/Application Support/Limner/autosave/.

Standalone snapshots use tab<id>-<session>.artpaint and a matching .meta sidecar; Books use book-<session>.limnerbook and a matching .meta. The sidecar records the original path. Snapshots taken after a graphics failure start with gpu-failure-, and each running session keeps a small .autosave-session-<session>.lock file. Older snapshots can use names without the session suffix. Preserve the whole recovery folder before manual recovery, including sidecars and any gpu-failure- snapshots. Do not rename or remove files while a Limner instance is using them. A snapshot is not meant to be opened directly: on macOS, opening one from Finder is refused with "Use recovery instead". Restart Limner and use the recovery prompt.

If Limner crashes

When Limner stops unexpectedly, it writes a report to crash.log in the settings folder (on iPad, in Limner's Documents folder). On the next launch the status bar says "Limner closed unexpectedly last time", once per crash. Help ▸ Show Crash Log shows you the file; the row appears only while a report exists. Attach the file to a bug report. Unsaved work that autosave had captured comes back through the recovery prompt.

Where settings and brushes are stored

Limner keeps preferences and supporting data in these platform folders:

  • Windows: %APPDATA%\Limner\
  • macOS: ~/Library/Application Support/Limner/
  • iPad: Library/Application Support/Limner/ inside the app's sandbox. This is separate from user documents visible in Files; the desktop reset procedure below is not a Files-app procedure on iPad.

Documents and completed exports can live elsewhere. A settings recovery warning displays the exact paths for that session.

File or folderWhat it holds
settings.tomlAll your preferences, palettes, presets, and shortcut changes
settings.toml.bakA duplicate written after each normal settings save; if that second write fails, it can hold an older copy
settings-recovery-<nonce>.tomlPreferences saved separately after a failed settings load; not loaded automatically
brushes.datYour brush library, including imported and customized brushes
autosave\Crash-recovery snapshots (see above)
updates\Staged desktop update downloads
crash.logThe crash report (desktop; see above)

Resetting desktop preferences safely

  1. Save your documents and close all Limner instances.
  2. Copy the settings folder to a separate backup location and verify the copy. Preserve settings.toml, settings.toml.bak, every settings-recovery file, brushes, licenses, and recovery snapshots.
  3. Rename both settings.toml and settings.toml.bak, if present, to distinct unused backup names. Do not delete them or replace an existing backup.
  4. Reopen Limner to start with default preferences. Keep the saved copies until you have checked the result.

Renaming only settings.toml is insufficient: a readable .bak is loaded when the primary is missing. A preference reset does not require removing brushes, licenses, or documents. To reset just the brush library, first preserve brushes.dat, then rename it with all Limner instances closed.

Settings recovery after a failed load

If the primary settings cannot be read or parsed, Limner uses a readable backup for this session, or temporary defaults when neither copy is usable. The "Settings recovery" warning explains which happened. The original settings and backup remain protected; session changes go to a separate settings-recovery-<nonce>.toml. A save failure is reported rather than overwriting the originals.

The recovery file is not loaded automatically. To restore preferences, close all Limner instances and preserve all copies first. Choose the valid file containing the preferences you want, place a copy at the original settings.toml path shown in the warning, and reopen Limner. Check dates and contents before replacing a newer profile with an older backup.

"Brush library protected"

If brushes.dat was written by a newer Limner, or cannot be loaded safely, Limner does not load it and will not overwrite it. A "Brush library protected" notice says so at launch. Brush changes then last for this session only. To keep a brush you make, right-click it in the brush picker and choose Save as Limner Preset… (every setting travels) or Export as .abr… (the tip, name, and spacing travel). To start a fresh library, move the file aside and restart Limner.

Moving from an older "artpaint" install

The program was formerly named differently, and stored its data in an artpaint folder beside today's Limner one (on Windows, %APPDATA%\artpaint). The first time you launch the renamed build, it copies that old folder into Limner automatically, leaving the original untouched. You should not need to do anything.

"Why is this menu item grayed out?"

Some actions only make sense in a particular context, so Limner disables them until that context exists. Hover a grayed-out row to read why: many menu rows say so, for example "Open or create a document first", "Select part of the canvas first", or "Book pages share one fixed canvas size". A grayed-out row in the command palette (Ctrl+K) shows its reason on hover too, including "Requires Limner Plus". The common cases:

  • Needs a document open. Saving, exporting, importing an image as a layer, and most editing commands require an open canvas. Create or open a document first (File ▸ New or File ▸ Open).
  • Needs a selection. Operations that act on a selected region stay disabled until you have an active selection. Make one with a selection tool first.
  • A Book is open. Book pages share one canvas size, so Image Size, Canvas Size, and Crop to Selection are unavailable while a Book is open.
  • Nothing to export. SVG export reports "Nothing to export" when no layer holds any artwork yet.
  • Mode-specific tools. Some tools belong to a specific workspace (Illustration or Vector). Switch workspaces if a tool looks unavailable. See Vector mode. A raster tool used on a Vector-mode layer does nothing and the status bar says why, for example "Painting is not available on a vector layer"; Layer ▸ Rasterize ▸ Rasterize Layer turns that layer into pixels you can paint on.
  • Nothing to merge into. Layer ▸ Merge Down is grayed out on the bottom layer and when the layer or the one below it is locked.
  • The document is hidden. On the Home screen and in a Book's Page Manager, command palette rows that would change the hidden document are grayed out with "Not available on the Home screen" or "Not available in the Page Manager".

If something stays grayed out and there is no hover reason, check that you have a document open and, where relevant, an active selection. Those two conditions cover most cases.

Quick reference

SymptomLikely causeFix
Pen has no pressure (Windows)Windows Ink is off in the tablet driverEnable Windows Ink in the driver control panel, then restart your stroke
Timelapse will not recordLegacy oversized (HEVC) timelapse, or a temp-folder problemExport the old timelapse at Real speed, delete it, and start a fresh recording; check disk space
"Saved by a newer Limner"The document comes from a newer versionUpdate Limner, then open the file again
A .limner file will not openAccess, format, data, or resource-limit errorRead the reason in the dialog; preserve the original and follow the open-file guidance above
Lost work after a crashLimner did not close cleanlyChoose Restore in the recovery prompt on next launch
"Recovery backup failed" in the status barRecovery snapshots cannot be writtenSave your work; free disk space if the reason says the disk is full
Preferences look wrongSettings file changed or corruptedRead the Settings recovery warning; preserve all copies before following the reset or restore steps above
"Brush library protected"brushes.dat is newer or unreadableSave new brushes as Limner presets; move the file aside and restart
Menu item grayed outNo document open, no selection, or a Book is openHover the row for the reason

New in 0.9.0

  • The crash reporter keeps your settings. Writing a crash report no longer saves default settings over your real ones, and the "closed unexpectedly" notice is no longer hidden behind the Home screen.
  • Open explains itself. File ▸ Open names the real reason a file could not be read and points you to the right command for a Photoshop, OpenRaster, SVG, brush or image file.
  • Warnings you can see. Notices about altered artwork arrive on a status channel inside the app instead of a console window.

Cookies. May we use Google Analytics to count visits? It stays off unless you allow it. Privacy policy